R.G.Collingwood and A.N. Whitehead on Metaphysics, History, and Cosmology

Whitehead, of course, was well aware of the problem of historical knowledge, of the impossibility of "mere knowledge", without taking into account the presuppositions or standards of the historian. But Whitehead did not dwell on it, as Collingwood did, or let it warp his overall view. (F.L.Baumer, Modern European Thought Continuity and Change in Ideas, 1600-1950, 1977, 496)

When Whitehead left for the United States, where he would write his major metaphysical works, Collingwood lost a major ally.1 The philosophical climate in England between the two wars was characterized by an anti-metaphysical attitude which manifested itself first in Cambridge, from the thirties onwards became dominant in Oxford, and eventually found a programmatic expression in A.J. Ayer’s Language, Truth and Logic. In this analytic and in part even neo-positivistic climate, Robin George Collingwood, appointed professor in metaphysics at Magdalen College in 1935, was, in fact, a "lone wolf." Hence, it cannot be surprising at all that in this period he felt more related to Whitehead’s metaphysical thinking than to the ideas of his "Oxbridge" colleagues.2 In this context, it is very surprising that no analysis has emerged which has elaborated the relationship between Whitehead and Collingwood, and more specifically their concept of metaphysics.

The only article known to me which has explicitly linked the two authors was Ramchandra Gandhi’s "Whitehead on the Distrust of Speculative Philosophy," wherein Gandhi focuses on the differences between their concepts of metaphysics. Gandhi interprets Collingwood’s concept of metaphysics as a thinking about thinking. In confining the attention of the metaphysician to the descriptive analysis of changing absolute presuppositions, Collingwood has, on his view, reduced metaphysics to all-too-modest proportions. Such a concept of metaphysics has nothing to do with what is traditionally understood as metaphysics. In this context, Gandhi stresses the analogy between Collingwood’s reformed metaphysics and Strawson’s descriptive metaphysics, two conceptions that, on Gandhi’s view, have to be rejected.3 A concept of metaphysics such as that of Whitehead necessitates, on the contrary, "the analysis and critical evaluation of scientific presuppositions in connection with presuppositions of other domains of civilized thought (moral, religious, sociological, aesthetic, etc.), so as to arrive at a satisfactory conception of the most fundamental characteristics of all that we encounter in our experience."4

In this article my aim is to show in four stages that the kinship between Collingwood’s concept of metaphysics and Whitehead’s is much stronger than Gandhi claimed. To show this, I shall make use not only of Collingwood’s published works, but also of his unpublished manuscripts released in 1978. First, I shall outline the evolution of Collingwood’s thinking on metaphysics since 1933. Against this background I then discuss Collingwood’s interpretation of, respectively, Alexander’s and Whitehead’s concepts of metaphysics. Collingwood’s preference for Whitehead’s concept of metaphysics has to do especially with the transcendental justification Whitehead gives of his concept of metaphysics. It is at that level that both the analogies and the differences between both thinkers must be situated. These differences eventually explain why Collingwood’s metaphysics is a historical one, while Whitehead’s metaphysics is a cosmological one.

I. Evolution in Collingwood’s Thought on Metaphysics

On 22 February 1935, Collingwood wrote his "draft of appreciation for the Waynflete Professorship" from which I quote the following sentences:

My chief interests lie in the region of metaphysics, and I desire to devote myself more particularly to these interests in the future, and especially in the following directions. 1) Hitherto, I have spent a good deal of time on historical study. My aim in so doing has always been to prepare myself for an attack on the philosophical problems (metaphysical and epistemological) connected with the idea of history (historical process and historical knowledge). I regard this preparation as now complete ... in order to develop the philosophical ideas to which they have led me. 2) At the same time, bearing an mind the relation between historical process and natural process, I should try to develop in my own way the metaphysical inquiries concerning nature which have lately been brought into fresh prominence by Alexander and Whitehead. I regard inquiries of this kind as an essential part of metaphysics and desire that Oxford should make its contribution to their progress. For the last 18 months I have been working almost exclusively on this subject, and lectured on it last term.

The first results of these metaphysical inquiries can be found in the five books of the manuscript "Notes towards a Metaphysic" (written from September 1933 till May 1934), in which he makes an endeavor to construct a cosmological-metaphysical system of his own,5 following the example of Whitehead’s and Alexander’s description of reality as a process, but based on his method elaborated in An Essay on Philosophical Method,6 and in "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory," the first (never published) cosmology conclusion to The Idea of Nature. Less than one year later, however, Collingwood qualified the impact of cosmology on his metaphysical project.

I.1. Development of a Metaphysical System

This qualification had to do entirely with the distinction Collingwood gradually introduced between what he calls history in the proper sense, and cosmology or "pseudo-history." The starting point for this distinction is the meaning of the terms "evolution" and "past." These terms, Collingwood wrote after 1934, have a different meaning in relation to their reference to the level below or of human consciousness.7

On both levels, there is an evolution in which states from a previous phase turn into those of a subsequent phase. Hence, on both levels, the past plays a prominent role in this evolutions the contemporary state is always inconceivable without the previous one. Yet, in both cases the past plays a completely different role. With regard to the level below human consciousness the previous phase out of which the current state has originated is irreversibly past. Once the new phase has started, the past is "dead." On the level of human consciousness, however, the evolution manifests itself in a different way. Human thought can retain the past, because the mind has the capacity to recall events by consciously re-thinking ("re-enacting") them. Precisely because of this capacity one can speak of development. Only on this conscious level does history in the proper sense of the word occur.8

In the manuscript "Method and Metaphysics," delivered as a lecture for "The Jowett Society" on June 19, 1935,9 this distinction plays a central role in the elaboration of his metaphysics. Collingwood distinguishes here three kinds of reality: "abstract entities," "minds" and "bodies." Abstract entities are merely potentialities, logically preceding both material reality and human thought. Apart from "minds" and "bodies," they remain pure potentialities, which can only be actualized in both. Before going into Collingwood’s view on the different ways in which abstract entities are actualized in "minds" and "bodies," I shall first go into the specific meaning of what Collingwood calls "abstract entities." For the way in which Collingwood in this manuscript defines abstract entities suggests a strong analogy between them and what Whitehead calls "eternal objects," as interpreted by Collingwood both in ‘Sketch of a Cosmological Theory" and The Idea of Nature.10

In the manuscript "Realism and Idealism" (1936), Collingwood elucidates the meaning of the term "abstract entity"-- for which he uses the term "a priori-idea" as a synonym -- within the context of what he calls objective idealism: "In saying that reality consists of ideas, [objective idealism] is saying that there is a distinction between the ideas or principles exemplified in natural things and these things themselves; that the principles are not mere abstractions and processes .... Thus it conceives the world of nature as something derived from and dependent upon something logical prior to itself, a world of immaterial ideas; but this is not a mental world or a world of mental activities or of things depending on mental activity although it is an intelligible world or a world in which mind, when mind comes into existence, finds itself completely at home."11 A priori ideas are no abstractions of the human mind, but form an immaterial world of potentialities, that are not only preconditions of the sensible reality, but also of human thought itself.

In the manuscript, "The Nature of Metaphysical Study," in which Collingwood develops a view on metaphysics corresponding to his later concept of metaphysics as the science of absolute presuppositions, it is clear as well that, for Collingwood, pure being is such an a priori idea: "Pure being Is not an existing object, but an abstraction.... In thinking about pure being, therefore, we are not thinking about existing objects or things, we are thinking about what, in Platonic language, are called forms, or ideas, or in modern terminology concepts" (TNMS 13).

This definition, however, is immediately followed by a proviso: "after all those metaphysicians were right who said -- you simply can’t think about pure abstract being; they were right in this sense, that when you do think about it (which in effect they admit you can do, or the words pure abstract being, which they themselves use, would be words without any meaning whatever) you find that it won’t stay pure" (TNMS 10). In other words, being is never entirely devoid of peculiarities: "Pure being becomes its own determinations, or develops them, for becoming or development is a process of change initiated from within. Pure being is thus not only identical with nothing, it is also identical with becoming.... The idea of metaphysics in general cannot be grasped in abstraction by a purely formal definition unless we allow this abstract idea to sprout determinations of its own in the shape of particular metaphysical problems."12

As being can never be studied as an independent object, the history of metaphysical thought cannot be without implications for the history of being: "[E]very science goes through a process of historical development in which, although the fundamental or general problem remains unaltered, the particular form in which this problem presents itself changes from time to time; and the general problem never arises in its pure or abstract form, but always in the particular or concrete form, determined by the present state of knowledge or, in other words, by the development of thought hitherto. This is a universal rule governing all forms of human thought; there can be no reason why metaphysics should be an exception. And indeed the attempt which I have made to formulate the fundamental problems of metaphysics is an attempt which could have been made, in exactly that way, only at the present stage in the history of the world" (TNMS 14-15).

Of decisive importance for the development of his metaphysical system and his concept of metaphysics from 1934 onwards is the ascertainment that the abstract entities are actualized in the world of "bodies" and "minds" in a different way. In the world of the "bodies," what has once happened has forever disappeared. In the world of the "minds," the past can always be called up again. Hence, a distinction must be made between cosmology (i.e., the study of material changes) and history proper (i.e., the study of human thinking). Metaphysics, then, is primarily the study of the general characteristics of reality by means of an inquiry into the changing absolute presuppositions of human thought, of which cosmology is an important part.

This interpretation of the development of Collingwood’s concept of metaphysics is reinforced, when we compare manuscript, "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory’ (the first cosmology conclusion, 1934),to manuscript B (the second cosmology conclusion, 1935 or 1937). In the first conclusion, in which he explicitly addresses Whitehead, Collingwood largely identifies natural processes with historical processes.13 The second conclusion moves away from this position:

I have referred to Alexander’s phrase, the historicity of things, as describing the main conception of this new philosophy. The question that remains is how far this phrase is strictly justified. It is intended to express the fact that natural reality, like human reality, is now regarded as consisting altogether in process. But is this one kind of process or two? (B 3)

Now, before making a further comparison between Collingwood’s and Whitehead’s concept of metaphysics, I first intend to go into another explanation why Collingwood seemed to have moved from one conception of metaphysics (framing metaphysical principles of the world) to another one (examining historical presuppositions of human thought).

I.2. Transcendental Justification of his Concept of Metaphysics

In "The Nature of Metaphysical Study" Collingwood writes that, with regard to the status of a priori concepts, the metaphysician has to cope with a twofold question: "What are they, and what is the nature of the way in which we know them? That is just what we hope to find out if we pursue our metaphysical studies"(TNMS 12-13). The distinction between these two questions may help us explain the difference between Collingwood’s approach towards metaphysics in the manuscripts on metaphysics before 1936, on the one hand, and in An Essay on Metaphysics and the manuscripts on metaphysics after 1936, on the other.

Between 1933 and 1936 Collingwood wrote in the manuscripts "Notes Towards a Metaphysics," "The Nature of Metaphysical Study," ‘Method and Metaphysics," and "Realism and Idealism," that metaphysics was an attempt to find out what we can about the general nature of reality. After 1936, however, Collingwood defined metaphysics as the historical study of absolute presuppositions, first in the manuscript The Function of Metaphysics in Civilization (1937), afterwards in An Autobiography and An Essay on Metaphysics. What, at a first glance, seems to be a flat renunciation of his earlier view is to be explained, if the two different questions are taken into account. Before 1936, Collingwood’s aim is to answer the first question: what are a priori ideas and how do they manifest themselves in human thought? Answering that question is tantamount to constructing a metaphysical theory, in particular the theory of objective idealism. After 1936, he no longer works at the elaboration of a metaphysical theory, confining to the second question: what is the nature of the way in which we know a priori ideas? Answering that question is tantamount to the identification of metaphysics to the historical study of changing absolute presuppositions. In his preface to An Essay on Metaphysics, Collingwood explicitly underlines this distinction: "This is not so much a book of metaphysics as a book about metaphysics. What I have chiefly tried to do in it is neither to expound my own metaphysical ideas, nor to criticize the metaphysical ideas of other people; but to explain what metaphysics is ... and how it is to be pursued."14

Why then this seemingly drastic evolution in Collingwood’s thought on metaphysics? To answer this question, one has to take into account A.J. Ayer’s Language, Truth and Logic, published in 1936, of which the first chapter, The Elimination of Metaphysics, is devoted to the destruction of the possibility of metaphysical knowledge. This chapter appears to have been, at least in some degree, the spur to the writing of An Essay on Metaphysics.15 Ayer’s programmatic assault on the possibility of metaphysics could not leave Collingwood, the current Waynflete professor in metaphysics at Oxford, unaffected. If the possibility of the metaphysical project itself is not accepted, then the endeavor to elaborate a metaphysical theory does not seem to be very effective either. So, Collingwood takes the counteroffensive: from now on he concentrates on the question of a transcendental - epistemological justification of metaphysics. The discussion between Ayer and Collingwood is situated on this level.

Collingwood’s method in arguing his case against Ayer is to accept his premises while denying his conclusions. In brief, Collingwood argues that Ayer fails to eliminate metaphysics for the simple reason that metaphysical propositions are not, as Ayer assumes, propositions but are, on the contrary, presuppositions and hence not amenable to the same treatment. For Ayer, metaphysical statements are nonsensical because they are not verifiable; for Collingwood, metaphysical statements are not verifiable because they are not propositions, directly describing empirical reality but presuppositions, causing by "logical efficacy" verifiable propositions to arise. Hence, metaphysical statements can never be empirically verifiable, analogous to empirical propositions. For Collingwood, Ayer’s neo-positivist attack on metaphysics, which is closely connected with a propositional logic based on a realistic epistemology,16 is an attack not on metaphysics, but on pseudo-metaphysics.17

A metaphysician’s aim, on Collingwood’s view, is to describe and elucidate the general characteristics of reality. But how is such an inquiry to be pursued? It is not situated on the logical level of empirically verifiable or tautological propositions, but on a different logical level. As a matter of fact, what the metaphysician examines are the logical relations between empirically verifiable/tautological propositions and their underlying presuppositions. The last or absolute presuppositions he thus finds form the only access to being, the proper object of metaphysics. Only by re-thinking! re-enacting the historical evolution of different absolute presuppositions can the metaphysician raise the question of being.18

Collingwood’s definition of the task of the metaphysician in The Elimination of Metaphysics must be understood against this background: "Metaphysics is primarily at any given time an attempt to discover what the people of that time believe about the world’s general nature; such beliefs being the presuppositions of all their "physics," that is, their inquiries into its detail. Secondarily, it is the attempt to discover the corresponding presuppositions of other peoples and other times, and to follow the historical process by which one set of presuppositions has turned into another" (A 66).

This definition does not imply that metaphysics does not deal with reality and only refers to thinking about reality.19 As stated above, in An Essay on Metaphysics, Collingwood does not intend to expound his own metaphysical ideas, but to give a justification of the metaphysical project. In other words, Collingwood answers Ayer by emphasizing that metaphysical language about being is never situated on the level of empirically verifiable or tautological propositions but on the level of absolute presuppositions. Only from that insight can the possibility of metaphysical thought and speech be justified.

Hence, we may safely conclude that Collingwood did not move from one conception of metaphysics to another; he only made, in response to logical positivism, a shift in strategy towards the problem of metaphysics. Furthermore, it is obvious that this shift in strategy has been facilitated by his change of view on the relation between the historicity of natural processes and human affairs. And so, we can return to the question of Collingwood’s interpretation of Whitehead’s concept of metaphysics, as elaborated in the two unpublished cosmology conclusions to The Idea of Nature and in The Idea of Nature itself.

II. Collingwood’s Interpretation of Whitehead

In the final pages of The Idea of Nature, Collingwood extensively discusses Whitehead’s concept of metaphysics. He first emphasizes there the resemblances between Whitehead’s and Alexander’s metaphysics: both thinkers consider reality as an evolving process, in which the Whiteheadian "events or occasions," and the description of the structures of reality, correspond to Alexander’s "point-instants" and his description of patterns of reality (IN 165-166).

Furthermore, this evolving process is characterized by what Whitehead calls "extensiveness" and "aim." "Extensiveness" implies that the cosmic reality develops upon a stage of space and time: every event in the temporary world is spread over space and goes on through time. In that respect, Whitehead agrees with Alexander. "Aim" implies that cosmic processes do not change at random, but can be explained in terms of teleology. Alexander rejects an anti-teleological vision on evolution as well. With regard to the explanation of the teleological character of the evolution, however, the most important difference between Whitehead’s and Alexander’s cosmology becomes obvious.

II. 1. Alexander versus Whitehead

For Alexander the whole cosmic evolution is based on one single foundation: a continuum that has both a space-aspect and a time-aspect. When new qualities emerge, these qualities, belonging to that pattern of the space-time continuum, are wholly immanent in the new event in which they are realized.

Whitehead’s cosmology is based on a double foundation: time-space, on the one hand, and what he (in Process and Reality) calls "eternal objects," on the other. "Eternal objects" are potentialities, which as forms of determination can enter into the becoming of actual entities and without which actuality is impossible. Hence, new qualities that emerge are not merely empirical qualities of new "occasions," they are also "eternal objects," belonging to a world of what Plato called forms or ideas; they are both immanent and transcendent: "Here Alexander inclines towards an empiricist tradition ... which identifies that which is known with the fleeting sense-datum of the moment; Whitehead, with his mathematical training, represents a rationalist tradition which identifies that which is known with necessary and eternal truths. This leads Whitehead back to Plato, and to asserting the reality of a world of eternal objects as the presupposition of the cosmic process" (IN 169; cf. SCT par. 33 and following). This double foundation enables Whitehead to solve certain fundamental problems which, according to Collingwood, remain unsolved for Alexander.

First, there is the question why nature should have in it a nisus towards the production of new things, and why specific new qualities do emerge and others do not. For Alexander, there is no answer: we cannot but accept the fact in a spirit of natural piety. For Whitehead, the answer is clear: "the answer is that the peculiar quality belonging to those things is an eternal object which, in his own phrase, is a ‘lure’ for the process: the eternal object, exactly as for Plato or Aristotle, attracts the process towards its realization."20

Secondly, there is a question of what relation holds between God and the world. For Alexander, God is the world as it will be when it comes to possess that future quality which is deity; in Collingwood’s view, such a concept of deity renders nonsensical the ordinary religious meaning which we attach to the word "God" (IN 163-164; 169). For Whitehead, God is an "eternal object," but an infinite one: "therefore He is not merely one lure eliciting one particular process but the infinite lure towards which all process directs itself" (IN 169; cf. SCT par 40, 41).

The improvements Whitehead introduces to the cosmological system of Alexander make him, according to Collingwood (IN), the most prominent cosmological thinker of his era. His thought is not only innovating and challenging, but also incorporates the great philosophical tradition.21

II.2. Collingwood and Whitehead

It is no surprise that Collingwood, in a number of places in his works, formulates his great admiration for Whitehead’s thought. As stated above, in the neo-positivist and "irrationalist" Anglo-Saxon philosophical climate of the inter-bellum period, there was no philosopher to which he was more closely related. Like Collingwood, Whitehead not only underlined the limits of rationality, but also its possibilities. Like Collingwood, Whitehead had the intention to construct a metaphysics in terms of which the nature of being could be interpreted. Like Collingwood, Whitehead rejected a non-cognitive interpretation of the meaning of human life.

In the passages in which Collingwood refers to Whitehead, two characteristics, apart from the always admiring tone, are conspicuous. First, Collingwood qualifies the thesis that Whitehead elaborates a realistic metaphysics. In that respect, Collingwood stresses the importance of the transcendental aspect of Whitehead’s metaphysical project. Secondly, it is striking that Collingwood himself, after 1934, always made a distinction between Whitehead the cosmologist and Whitehead the metaphysician. These two characteristics enable us to elucidate the affinities between their respective concepts of metaphysics.

II.2.1. Whitehead and the Transcendental Turn

Whitehead and Kant are often said to have completely different metaphysical projects. Kant’s metaphysics is identified with a transcendental philosophy, aware of the limits of rationality. Whitehead’s metaphysics is considered to be a realistic one, leaving aside the insights of the Copernican revolution. To underpin this realistic interpretation, one may refer to Whitehead’s magnum opus, Process and Reality, where, on several occasions, he explicitly objects to a Kantian epistemology, presenting his philosophy of organism as a return to a pre-Kantian mode of thought.22

Collingwood’s philosophy developed out of an opposition to the realistic epistemology, which he stigmatizes as the undischarged bankruptcy of modern philosophy (A 45). At first sight, such an anti-realist attitude seems to contradict his admiration for the work of metaphysicians like Alexander and Whitehead. How can one simultaneously reject a realistic starting point and approve of the elaboration of a metaphysics based on a realistic epistemology?

With respect to Alexander, the answer to this question is clear. The criticism already given of Alexander’s concept of metaphysics in The Idea of Nature (IN 163) becomes even more radical in An Essay on Metaphysics. It is precisely his empirical-realistic starting point, Collingwood writes in An Essay on Metaphysics, which prevents Alexander from seeing the distinction between absolute presuppositions and empirically verifiable propositions. As a consequence, the promising endeavor of Alexander to elaborate a contemporary metaphysics ultimately results in a pseudo-metaphysics: "Thus considered, Alexander’s metaphysics would seem to be a variety of positivistic metaphysics, whose difference from the commoner varieties consists chiefly in being the work of a very rich, very wise, and very profound thinker" (EM 176).

With respect to Whitehead, the same question receives a completely different response. While Collingwood is explicitly affirmative about the realistic standard of Alexander’s starting point, he is reserved concerning Whitehead’s. Already in The Idea of Nature, he made a distinction between Whitehead’s realism and that of the analytic philosophy.23 In An Autobiography, he radicalizes that distinction, interpreting Whitehead’s realism as contradictory to the realistic epistemology of the neo-positivists.24 Hence, he concludes that Whitehead’s cosmology is in fact constructed on an anti-realistic principle (EM 176).

In the manuscript "Realism and Idealism," Collingwood states in a no less polemical way that the term "realism" may be retained with regard to the theory of perception, on the condition that it is qualified in Whitehead’s way:

whether my view of perception is to be called realist or not will, I think, vary according to the taste of different persons using the word. Whitehead would call it realistic, as I gather from the fact that he calls his own view realistic and that my view is in essentials much the same as his. Others would refuse it the name because they regard as realistic only a theory of perception which asserts that what we perceive exists just as we perceive it independently of its being perceived, whereas I, like Whitehead, think that the object of perception really is what we perceive it to be only as what Whitehead calls an element in an actual situation that includes as other constituents not only the context but also the perceiver. (RI 54)

Thus, according to Collingwood, Whitehead obviously is no naive realist, constructing a metaphysics as if the transcendental turn had never taken place. The question is not whether Whitehead has transcendentally justified his metaphysical project, but how he has done it. It is precisely on the transcendental level that the differences and the affinities between Collingwood and Whitehead are to be situated.

II.2.2. Collingwood and Whitehead versus Kant

Kant had situated the conditions for the possibility of the understanding of reality in the transcendental structures of the human mind. In that way he had made explicit the central presupposition founding every form of scientific inquiry, the conviction that reality is rational and to a certain extent susceptible to human understanding. For Kant, this theory did not imply the end of an epistemological objectivity; on the contrary, it functioned as its guarantee. For there was the one and only one transcendental subjectivity, measuring all phenomenal appearances and so constituting all laws of all knowledge.

Collingwood is one among many thinkers who demonstrated the untenability of such a theory. Being an heir to the "Copernican revolution," he has undermined the universal claims of the Kantian transcendental subjectivity: the historian Collingwood is fully aware of the historicity of this "transcendental" subjectivity.

Once the historicity of the transcendental subjectivity is accepted, a cognitive relativism seems the only alternative. For if "the" subjectivity does not exist, no ground can be found in the structures of "the" human mind for the universal validity of our knowledge. In order to evade cognitive relativism, one cannot but resort to an answer that takes into consideration more than only the transcendental structures of our thought.

In discussing the manuscript "Method and Metaphysics," I have already pointed to the striking similarity between the concepts of reality in Collingwood and Whitehead: for both authors, reality consists of formative elements and actual entities. It is precisely in the introduction of formative elements as conditions of the possibility of actual entities, according to Collingwood, that Whitehead differs from Alexander.25 Furthermore, the status of one of these formative elements, the "eternal objects," is analogous to that of the "abstract entities":26 both are situated between the realism of ideas and pure nominalism. Starting from this concept of reality, both authors repudiate the Kantian project of a metaphysics as transcendental philosophy (Kant’s metaphysics of nature or "Erscheinungsontologie").

For Collingwood, objective reality is not constituted by the subjective ideas of a transcendental subject (cf. SCT par. 37). Hence, within the context of the metaphysical theory of the objective idealism, as elaborated in "Realism and Idealism," the term "a priori" receives a different meaning: a priori ideas function as abstract entities, as potentialities that are gradually actualized in the evolving reality. However, this metaphysical objective idealism is compatible with an epistemologic realism, as interpreted by Whitehead: "Objective idealism is epistemologically realistic; it believes we know the object itself as it really is." (RI 104)

In the preface to Process and Reality, Whitehead repudiates the Kantian doctrine which considers the objective world as a theoretical construct of the human experience. In the third chapter of the second part, he elucidates this repudiation:

The philosophy of organism is the inversion of Kant’s philosophy. The Critique of Pure Reason describes the process by which subjective data pass into the appearance of an objective world. The philosophy of organism seeks to describe how objective data pass into subjective satisfaction, and how order in the objective data provides intensity in the subjective satisfaction. For Kant, the world emerges from, the subject; for the philosophy of organism, the subject emerges from, the world. (PR 88 [135-136], italics mine)

The transcendental foundation is broader for Whitehead than for Kant. As conditions of the possibility of our experience -- whatever that experience may contain -- he postulates three formative elements: the realm of forms ("eternal objects"), creativity, and the Principle of limitation or definiteness of becoming ("God").

III. Collingwood’s Criticism of Whitehead

In spite of his admiration for Whitehead’s metaphysical system, Collingwood formulates two objections in "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory" and The Idea of Nature. I will not assess Collingwood’s criticism on Whitehead’s theory of "eternal objects" here (IN 171-173; SCT par. 33 and following), but will examine Collingwood’s evaluation of Whitehead’s view on the creative advance. The distinction between them concerning this issue determines to a considerable extent the distinction between both concepts of metaphysics. In this respect I do not only refer to The Idea of Nature but to the two unpublished cosmology conclusions (SCT, B) as well.

The crucial question for Collingwood is this: how do we have to understand the transitions from nature to life and from life to mind? It is Whitehead’s merit to have described the fundamental continuity running all through the world of nature, from its most rudimentary forms to it most complicated and highest development known to us in the mental life of human beings. "But when we ask him whether this series of forms represents a series really developed in time he seems uncertain of his answer; and if we go on to ask the precise nature of the connection between one form and the next, he has no answer to give except to insist that in general all such connections are formed by the creative process which is the world itself." 27 In this respect Collingwood refers to the ambiguity of the term "prehension."28

Preliminary conclusion: Whitehead remains, in Collingwood’s view, vague concerning the distinction between change on the level below consciousness and development on the conscious level. In a letter to Alexander (dated February 13, 1935), Collingwood put this criticism in a nutshell:

There is still one point in which I think (though I am not sure) Process and Reality fails to take up and develop a leading point in Space, Time and Deity. Your world seems to me a world in which evolution and history have a real place. Whitehead’s world is indeed all process, but I don’t see that this process is in the same way productive or creative of new things (e.g.. Life, Mind) arising on the old as on a foundation. Whitehead seems rather to deny that these things really are new at all -- at least he seems to say so explicitly in the little Nature and Life .... I don’t believe that matter is really alive, and all that business. I think it’s only a dodge to evade the question, how does anything generically new come into existence?29

As stated above, it is precisely this distinction between both levels that Collingwood elaborates after 1935. On the basis of this distinction, he assigns a central role to the history of human thought in his metaphysical inquiry, at the expense of cosmology.

This interpretation of Collingwood’s changing concept of metaphysics is reinforced by the information in the two unpublished cosmology conclusions. The first conclusion largely identifies natural processes with historical processes, although Collingwood here tentatively adumbrates his criticism on Whitehead’s lack of historical insight.30 The second conclusion, as already indicated, dearly moves away from this position (B 3).

III.1. The Inadequacy of Collingwood’s Criticism

In the quoted letter to Alexander, Collingwood writes: "I think I understand most of Space, Time and Deity, but God knows if I shall ever understand more than half of Process and Reality .... All of it that I do understand (with very small reservations) I accept with gratitude and enthusiasm." In several manuscripts, he simultaneously underlines his enthusiasm for Whitehead’s thought and his wavering in its interpretation.

As a matter of fact, Collingwood’s criticism is insufficient on several points. His statement that Whitehead’s cosmology is founded upon a double pillar, the time-space continuum and the "eternal objects," is much too simple. For Whitehead, reality consists of the actual temporary world and three formative elements (creativity, eternal objects and God). Against the background of the relationship between these three formative elements, Collingwood’s criticism concerning Whitehead’s description of "eternal objects" misses the point.31

Furthermore, Whitehead nowhere describes God as an infinite "eternal object." By virtue of the ontological principle, "eternal objects" are not actual. For Whitehead, God is the non-temporary actual entity ordering the "eternal objects" by his conceptual understanding, giving the potentialities "graded relevance" and in this way structuring the realm of potentialities. Whitehead modifies the Aristotelian concept of God by giving room to becoming in his own concept of God.32 Finally, Whitehead introduces in the concept "prehension" subtle distinctions (physical and mental prehensions,

"comparative feelings," "propositional feelings," etc.), which all emphasize the distance he takes from certain forms of panpsychism.33

III. 2. The Importance of Collingwood’s Criticism

Although Collingwood’s reading of Whitehead was superficial on crucial points, this insufficient criticism marks the point where both thinkers follow divergent paths. The resemblance between their concepts of reality is obvious: for Whitehead and Collingwood, reality consists of formative elements and actual entities. It is precisely the introduction of formative elements as conditions for the possibility of the actual world that is, according to Collingwood, the greatest merit of Whitehead. Furthermore, the status of the eternal objects" as identical to that of the "abstract entities" entails a middle course between a Kantian subjective idealism and a naive realism.34

The decisive difference, however, between both authors is situated on the level of the actual entities. Whitehead’s ontological principle implies that everything is an actual entity (in the strictest sense of the word) or combination of actual entities: both mental experiences and events on the subatomic level are actual entities. For Collingwood too, both mental and physical events are actual. But because of their different relation to the past, Collingwood makes a distinction between "bodies" and "minds." Only mental entities are capable of retaining their past in such a way that it can live on in the present situation. In that way "minds" are more real than "bodies."

Hence, in the work of both authors we find actual entities and formative elements. Whitehead introduces, within the formative elements, a clear distinction between creativity, eternal objects and God. Collingwood introduces, within the actual world, a clear distinction between "bodies" and "minds."

This divergent view on the constitution of and the relation between formative elements and actual entities has far-reaching consequences for both their concepts of metaphysics and especially the relationship of cosmology to metaphysics in their thought. In Whitehead’s thought, there is a direct link between cosmology and metaphysics: cosmology describes the general characteristics of reality we are living in, metaphysics the most general characteristics of all possible reality (cf. Whitehead, ER 76). For Collingwood, this link is less direct: in order to find the general characteristics of reality, we must follow how the abstract entities are actualized in the world of "bodies" and "minds." Because of this divergent process of actualization -- the material past is dead, the mental past is alive -- a distinction must be made between cosmology or pseudo-history and history proper (i.e., the study of human thought). Metaphysics, in that respect, is the study of the general characteristics of reality by means of the description of changing presuppositions of human thought, of which cosmology is a part.

Only when we understand the specific relationship between abstract entities, on the one hand, and material and mental entities on the other, as elaborated in his theory of objective idealism, does the true meaning of the concluding chapter of The Idea of Nature become clear. I once cite "Realism and Idealism," the passage about objective idealism in which Collingwood clearly states his conception of the world of nature: "Thus it conceives the world of nature as something derived from and dependent upon something logical prior to itself, a world of immaterial ideas; but this is not a mental world or a world of mental activities or of things depending on mental activity although it is an intelligible world or a world in which mind, when mind comes into existence, finds itself completely at home."35 We cannot but hear the echo of this metaphysical theory in the final words of The Idea of Nature, in which Collingwood maps the distinction of two kinds of science (natural science versus history):

if nature is a thing that depends for its existence on something else, this dependence is a thing that must be taken into account when we try to understand what nature is; and if natural science is a form of thought that depends for its existence upon some other form of thought, we cannot adequately reflect upon what natural science tells us without taking into account the form of thought upon which it depends (italics mine). What is this form of thought) This is a question which Alexander and Whitehead have not asked. And that is why I answer the question, "Where do we go from here?" by saying, "We go from the idea of nature to the idea of history." (IN 176-177; emphasis added)

With regard to the meaning of the last sentence, I do agree with David Boucher’s interpretation of reducing its meaning to being a reference to the following term’s lectures.36 In my view, however, it is the last but one sentence which is of utmost importance here, referring as it does to Collingwood’s concept of objective idealism, as elaborated in "Realism and Idealism" and adumbrated in "The Function of Metaphysics in Civilization."37

III.3. Collingwood Versus Whitehead: The Impact of the Historical Turn

Once we see this difference in the two concepts of metaphysics, we can go back to the question of its transcendental status. Common to both authors is their repudiation of the Kantian transcendental constitution of reality. But it is precisely in their divergent interpretation of the cosmology-metaphysics relation that their positive definitions of a more-than-Kantian transcendental constitution differ.

While constructing his concept of metaphysics, Collingwood takes into account the data brought in by the historical and linguistic turns.38 In fact, both turns can be considered as variables of the transcendental turn: whether you accept one epistemological center (Kant) or different and irreducible centers (Wittgenstein), the common starting point is that a description of reality is always determined by the way we look at it. In other words, however variable, the limits of the world will always be linked to the limits of speech and thought.

Collingwood thus underlines after 1935 that a metaphysics can only be constructed by means of an analysis of human experience. Now, according to Collingwood, Whitehead has, as already mentioned, neglected to make use of this distinction between human and non-human experience. In one sense, this criticism is undeserved: Whitehead does make a distinction between a conscious and a non-conscious level of experience. On the other hand, one can not deny that this distinction plays a minor role in his metaphysical methodology. For Whitehead calls his transcendental principle a "reformed subjectivist principle," which implies that all actual entities are subjects of experience.39 By means of this principle, he can insist that his philosophy of organism does not reject the transcendental turn, but expands it.40

In order to think reality both authors not only take into account the events, but also the potentialities that are actualized in the events. In respect to the way these potentialities or "abstract entities" are actualized, Collingwood, however, makes a distinction between actualization on the conscious level of thought and on the non-conscious level of material reality. In other words, in opposition to the "reformed subjectivist principle," Collingwood takes as a methodological starting point the distinction between "minds" and "bodies."41 On the basis of this divergent methodological starting point, Collingwood’s project is called an historical metaphysics and Whitehead’s project a cosmological metaphysics.

However, this formulation might suggest Collingwood is ruling out the cosmological aspect of a metaphysical inquiry, which is, of course, not the case. Both history and cosmology play a role in metaphysics, but the historical study of human thought is primordial, cosmology or the study of nature being itself a product of human thought. Collingwood holds this view of the relation cosmology-history, elaborated from 1935 onwards, in The New Leviathan as well. This is the conclusion of the first part, On Man:

18.91. The object of scientific study, for a man who has taken part in the progress of human thought down to the present time is history. The world of Nature, first the law-abiding Nature of modern science and second the end-seeking Nature of Greco-medieval science, is as real as you will; but it is not history, it is the background of history. 18.92. It is in the world of history, not in the world of Nature, that man finds the central problems he has to solve. For twentieth-century thought the problems of history are the central problems: those of Nature, however interesting they may be, are only peripheral.

IV. Identical Inspiration, Distinct Elaboration

At first sight, Collingwood’s and Whitehead’s concepts of metaphysics do not have much in common. By means of the foregoing comparative analysis, I have tried to show that both authors in fact have the same purpose. Their basic inspiration is identical: to elaborate a metaphysics in terms of which the nature of being can be interpreted. The differing appearance of their concepts of metaphysics has especially to do with a different background and, consequently, a different methodology.

Collingwood, being an historian, is especially interested in the question how being manifests itself in the history of thought. To answer this question he shows by means of a historical-logical description of the evolution of absolute presuppositions how the eternal philosophical questions in every epoch have manifested themselves in a different way, and how the different metaphysical answers can only be understood as answers to these questions. Hence, the metaphysician’s task is twofold: he has to trace the absolute presuppositions of different epochs, and to reconstruct the historical process by which one constellation of absolute presuppositions turns into another. Only in that way can it be made clear how being manifests itself in the evolution of human thought.

In Whitehead’s thought, this historical aspect comes less to the fore. Trained in logic, mathematics and positive sciences, his main intention was to bring philosophy once again in touch with the sciences of his era (quantum mechanics, relativity theory, non-mechanical biology) and to elaborate a cosmological-metaphysical theory on the basis of the analysis of their presuppositions.

I call their differing concepts of metaphysics complementary for two reasons. First, Whitehead complements Collingwood by not only constructing a concept of metaphysics, but also by elaborating a metaphysical system. Collingwood did not elaborate a metaphysical system of his own, making some tentative endeavors in the manuscripts, "Notes Towards a Metaphysics," "Method and Metaphysics,’ and "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory." After 1936, he confined himself to the justification of the possibility of the project of metaphysics, without being able to elaborate that project himself. Second, Collingwood complements Whitehead by stressing the question of the transcendental conditions of the possibility of a metaphysical project.42 It is particularly in this domain that the importance of Collingwood for current metaphysical thought is to be found.

On the one hand, Collingwood participates in (and has undoubtedly contributed to) what may be called the contextualism of the twentieth century, i.e., the idea that reason does not function as the external criterion of culture, but is to be attributed to the culture in which it operates. On the other hand, and in this way unlike contextualismCollingwood thinks that this culture bound rationality has to be criticized time and again by rationality itself. History does not evolve as a continuous process determined by eternal rational principles. Nor is it true that history would be unreasonable because reason itself is historical. Precisely in following the inner process of historically changing absolute presuppositions, the metaphysician follows the way in which the "abstract entity" being evolves.

Hence, the kinship between Collingwood and Whitehead becomes most obvious in those writings in which the status of philosophical rationality is discussed. There is a particularly strong resemblance between Whitehead’s small and suggestive work in the philosophy of science, The Function of Reason, and Collingwood’s methodological treatise, An Essay on Philosophical Method.43

In The Function of Reason, Whitehead makes a distinction between practical and speculative reason, the reason of the foxes and the reason of the gods (FR 10-11). Practical reason is bound by factors in the world, looking for efficient methods to grasp them. But human life transcends the urge to dominate the world; it wants a "better life." That is why another function of reason is needed: theoretical reason looking for an insight into the complexity of reality. This theoretical or speculative reason, anarchist in its search for transcending the existing methods to deal with reality, is itself bound to method: even in transcending (practical) methods, reason is bound by a (speculative) method.

This method is twofold: on the one hand, speculative philosophy builds systems of abstractions in terms of which all elements of our experience can be interpreted. Simultaneously, there is the acute awareness of the incompleteness of every abstraction and the endlessness of the philosophical search for always more perfect abstractions. Hence, it is typical of speculative reason to criticize again and again its own abstractions. Speculative reason only transcends itself by criticizing itself.

However, speculative reason is inhibited by the massive "obscurantism" of human nature, the refusal to speculate freely about the limits of traditional methods. Because the obscurantism of every generation finds its primary spokesmen in those who maintain the dominating methodology, in the first part of the twentieth century, positivists were its paradigmatic representatives (FR 44).

In An Essay on Philosophical Method, Collingwood defines a philosophical system as a scale of forms, in which every form differs in kind and in degree. In conformity to this definition the historical development of metaphysics is also seen as a development of a scale of forms. Such a definition implies that no metaphysical system is applicable to every situation, in all instances. On the contrary, every new situation demands a modification of the system.

Hence, an unchangeable method by means of which all philosophical problems can be solved is completely out of question. But admitting this does not imply that philosophy/metaphysics is without method: its own method consists precisely in the repudiation of a rigid method. Philosophy! metaphysics demands "not a random flexibility, a mere looseness in the application of a method nowhere quite appropriate; it is a uniform or methodical flexibility, in which the method changes from one topic to another because form and content are changing pari passu as thought, traversing its scale of forms, gradually approximates to the ideal of a perfectly philosophical subject-matter treated by a perfectly philosophical method" (EPM 192).

Collingwood, like Whitehead, refers to the positive scientists as "obscurantists" who repudiate the methodology -- transcending thought of metaphysics:

Throughout the [19th] century the tendency of European thought was increasingly to deny and neglect metaphysics. Natural science, by the mouth of positivism, presented itself not only as a natural science, but as a substitute for history (under the name of sociology), a substitute for religion (under the Comtian name of "la religion de l’humanité") and a substitute for metaphysics (under the name of positive philosophy). The contempt for metaphysics, openly expressed on all sides, as e.g. in the slogan of the German positivists, keine Metaphysik mehr, did not mean that natural science was not to be allowed any presuppositions. Whatever, it did not mean that no metaphysical propositions were to be accepted. It meant that such propositions were not to be catalogued or codified. It meant that they were to be kept hidden and not promulgated.

They were to do their work in the dark. The ruling class of natural scientists, like so many tyrannies in the course of history, regarded a refusal to publish the laws by which it ruled as an indispensable instrument of its own tyranny (italics mine). The class of persons on whom by the tradition of centuries the task fell, of bringing to light the hidden presuppositions of everyday thought, whether scientific or historical, (I refer of course to the official teachers of philosophy) were treated with a contemptuous neglect. (FMC 29-30)

In the manuscript "Notes Toward a Metaphysics," the terminological resemblance with Whitehead is most striking. There Collingwood defines philosophy as a thought systematically fighting against its own abstractions (NTMe 58), describing the development of metaphysics as appealing "to a world of ideal objects towards which the world of experience has an asymptotic nisus,"44 a metaphor Whitehead also makes use of in The Function of Reason (FR 53).

In sum, like Whitehead, Collingwood insists that metaphysics lives on systematic thought: to understand is to see connections. At the same time there is the acute awareness of the incompleteness of each metaphysical system: it is supported by an unlimited background of presuppositions, out of which it arises and to which it continuously refers. Still, it offers a matrix to interpret all the elements of our experience. Each metaphysical system is an endeavor to elucidate the inner meaning it already possesses. At the same time, its primary task consists in criticizing the elucidation achieved.

The historian Collingwood explicitly situates his own concept of metaphysics within the great metaphysical tradition:

To a person who does not understand what philosophy is, or by what processes it moves, the history of sixty generations appears as a chaos, the record of random movements hither and thither by wandering planets, which no theory of epicycles can reduce to reason. But this appearance of irrationality, I make bold to say, cannot survive the discovery that philosophical thought has a structure of its own, and the hypothesis that in its changes it is obeying the laws 0f that structure. Thus, from the point of view of a rational theory of philosophy, the past history of philosophical thought no longer appears as irrational; it is a body of experience to which we can appeal with confidence, because we understand the principles at work in it, and in the light of those principles find it intelligible. (EPM 224)

Whitehead’s metaphysics is greeted by Collingwood as a new stage, in continuity with that metaphysical tradition:

In Whitehead’s work all the leading conceptions of these new sciences have been fused into a single view of the world which is not only coherent and simple in itself but has also consciously connected itself with the main tradition of philosophical thought; Whitehead himself, [...] claims continuity with the philosophical tradition. Whitehead has escaped from the stage of thinking that the great philosophers were all wrong into the stage of seeing that they were all right; and he has achieved this, not by philosophical erudition, followed by an attempt at original thought, but by thinking for himself first and studying the great philosophers afterwards (IN 170).

 

Notes

1.Cf. W. M. Johnston, The Formative Years of R.G. Collingwood (The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 1969), 138; S. Toulmin, "Conceptual Change and the Problem of Relativity, "Critical Essays on the Philosophy of R. G. Collingwood, edited by M. Krausz (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1972), 202.

2. "This kinship is especially clear in the last pages of his The Idea of Nature and in both the manuscripts "Notes towards a Metaphysic" and "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory."

3. R. Gandhi, "Whitehead on the Distrust of Speculative Philosophy," International Philosophical Quarterly 12 (1972), 402 [cited as IPQ72].

4. 1PQ72 402.

5. "The science which I am discussing is cosmology .... For reasons which I partly stated in my Balliol lecture in Bradley (January 1934) I regard cosmology as the main subject at present demanding attention from serious philosophers" (NTM 1d).

6. NTM, a, 4-5; cf. D. Boucher, "The Principles of History and the Cosmology Conclusion to The Idea of Nature," Collingwood Studies 2 (1995), 148.

7. Cf. the manuscripts "Reality as History" (1935) and the so-called B-manuscript, the second unpublished conclusion to IN; the articles "The Historical Imagination" (1936) and "Human Nature and Human History" (1936) and different sections from IN and IH.

8. "Whereas, for bodies, time always gives with one hand and takes away with the other, for minds, the passing of time means the acquiring of experience and the consequent enrichment and development of mind’s various activities" (MM 23). It is now clear why historians habitually restrict the field of historical knowledge to human affairs. A natural process is a process of events, an historical process is a process of thoughts" (IH 216).

9. This manuscript is a sequel to EPM as well. He here explicitly applies to metaphysics the philosophical method elaborated in EPM.

10. See MM 3-14; IN.169-173; SCT par.33 and following.

11. RI 104. An identical concept has been elaborated in IN 174-177.

12. TNMS 11, 13. It is to be noted that the criticism which Collingwood here formulates is identical to his criticism on the concept of pure being in EM 14.

13. See especially par. 38-39: "Par.38: Historical knowledge is not empirical knowledge, it is not perception or observation; it is essentially inferential. The historian argues to his conceptions he argues that because the data are thus and not otherwise the past event must have been of such and such a kind. His object, therefore, the past event, is not only an eternal object but also a necessary object, an object that must be what it is, and is known rationally in apprehending this necessity; Par.39: Applying these results to our knowledge of nature: we regard nature as a self-creative process and therefore creative of eternal objects."

14. EM, vii. The manuscript The Nature of Metaphysical Study shows that, on Collingwood’s view, both definitions of metaphysics are complementary. See W. J. Van der Dussen, History as a Science. The Philosophy of R G. Collingwood (The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 1983), 193-195;J. Connelly, ‘Metaphysics and Method: A Necessary Unity in the Philosophy of RG. Collingwood," Storia, antropologia e scienze del linguaggio (1990), 112-120.

15. See EM 163, footnote; A.J. Ayer, Philosophy in the Twentieth Century (London, Allen & Unwin, 1982), 197.

16. "But if the "realism" of my youth is dead, it has left not only a heritage of general prejudice against philosophy as such, but a partial heir. Its propositional logic.. has inspired a school of thought which is continuing the work of jettisoning whatever can be recognized as positive doctrine by reviving the old positivistic attack on metaphysics" (A 52).

17. EM 163. This argument heavily relies on J. Connelly, 82-83.

18. Collingwood’s concept of absolute presuppositions is very complex. A detailed elaboration of this issue is beyond the scope of this article. For more information, see G. Vanheeswijck, "The Function of ‘Unconscious Thought’ in RG. Collingwood’s Philosophy," Collingwood Studies. edited by David Boucher, Collingwood Society (1994), 108-123; G. Vanheeswijck, "Metaphysics as ‘A Science of Absolute Presuppositions’: Another Look at R.G. Collingwood," The Modern Schoolman (1996), 333-350.

19. See G. Vanheeswijck, "The Function of ‘Unconscious Thought’ in R.G. Collingwood’s Philosophy," Collingwood Studies (1994), 108-123.

20. IN 169. In SCT par.36, Collingwood makes a distinction between eternal objects of historical thought and Whitehead’s eternal objects and examines their relation: "The eternal objects of historical thought are concrete eternal objects, e.g., the revolution of 1688; Whitehead’s eternal objects are abstract eternal objects, e.g. a certain kind of blueness, or (returning to 1688) the exact configuration of the splash made when James II threw the Great Seal into the Thames. What is the relation between these? I suggest that the abstract eternal object is merely one element in a concrete eternal object taken by itself in abstraction. The real eternal object here is the event as a whole James II throwing the Great Seal into the Thames; the configuration of the splash owes its eternity not to the fact that a splash with exactly the same configuration might happen again at any time, if that is a fact (which I suspect it is not), but to the fact that it was part and parcel of the event.

21. Although his rather Platonic cosmology ends in a rather Aristotelian concept of God, this recapitulation is obviously not a mere repetition: "Whitehead, following out his own train of thought, has thus reconstructed for himself Aristotle’s conception of God as the unmoved mover, initiating and directing the entire cosmic process through its love of Him. And it is curious to observe that the identity of his own thought with Aristotle’s, which Whitehead gladly admits, had to be pointed out to him by a friend, Whitehead having apparently never read Aristotle’s Metaphysics for himself. I mention this not to ridicule Whitehead for his ignorance of Aristotle --nothing could be farther from my mind-but to show how in his own thought a Platonic cosmology may be seen, in the pages of Process and Reality, turning into an Aristotelian" (IN 170). The friend in question was Collingwood himself (I am indebted for this information to Lewis S. Ford).

22. "in the main the philosophy of organism is a recurrence to pre-Kantian modes of thought" (PR xi [vi]). "These lectures will be best understood by noting the following list of prevalent habits of thought, which are repudiated, in so far as concerns their influence on philosophy: . . . (vii) The Kantian doctrine of the objective world as a theoretical construct from purely subjective experience" (PR xiii [x]). "The philosophy of organism is the inversion of Kant’s philosophy" (PR 88 [135]).

23. "His work in philosophy forms part, and a very important part, of the movement of twentieth-century realism; but whereas the other leaders of that movement came to it after a training in late-nineteenth-century idealism, and are consequently realistic with the fanaticism of converts and morbidly terrified of relapsing into the sins of their youth, a fact which gives their work an air of strain, as if they cared less about advancing philosophical knowledge than about proving themselves good enemies of idealism, Whitehead’s work is perfectly free from all this sort of thing, and he suffers from no obsessions; obviously he does not care what he says, so long as it is true. In this freedom from anxiety lies the secret of his success" (IN 165).

24. Cf. Whitehead’s own characterization of his cosmology as "a transformation of some main doctrines of Absolute Idealism onto a realistic basis" (PR xiii [viii]). Collingwood interprets this characterization as follows: "In Whitehead the resemblance is more with Hegel; and the author, though he does not seem to be acquainted with Hegel, is not wholly unaware of this, for he describes the book as an attempt to do over again the work of "idealism," "but from a realist point of view." "Actually, however, if ‘realism’ means the doctrine that the known is independent of, and unaffected by, the knowing it, Whitehead is not a ‘realist’ at all; for his ‘philosophy of organism’ commits him to the view that everything which forms an element in a given ‘situation’ is connected with everything else in that situation, not merely by a relation of compresence, but by interdependence. It follows that, where one element in a situation is a mind, and a second element something known to that mind, the knower and the known are interdependent. This is precisely the doctrine which it was the chief aim of the ‘realists’ to deny" (A 45-46).

25. The lack of "formative elements" is, in Collingwood’s opinion, also the weak point in the philosophy of Bergson (IN 141).

26. "When I call [the abstract entities] abstract I do not mean that we in any sense make them by an act of abstraction; I mean rather that we are thinking about them when we do what is called thinking abstractly The abstract entities of which we have universal and necessary or a priori knowledge, are in that knowledge contemplated by us not merely as instanced here or there in the world of body or mind, but in themselves; and on the principle, or if you like the assumption, that we know things as they are, when I am satisfied that we know them not merely as instanced in bodies or minds but in themselves, I say that they are not merely instanced in bodies or minds but are in themselves" (MM13-14).

27. IN 174. The reason why Collingwood’s question is not answered might be that Whitehead sees the emergence of life and mind as necessarily contingent matters, outside the scope of metaphysics.

28. "Everything enjoys what he calls ‘prehensions,’ that is to say, somehow absorbs what is outside itself into its own being ... but once more, as in the case of life, he is on the horns of a dilemma. Either mind is at bottom the same as these elementary prehensions, in which case there is no creative advance, and life is a mere abstraction from mind as matter is from life, or else it is something genuinely new in which case we have to explain its relation to that out of which it grew. And once more Whitehead does not appear to see the dilemma" (IN 173-174).

29. See M. Hampe & H. Maassen, editors. Die Gifford Lectures und ihre Deutung. Frankfurt Suhrkamp, 1991, 16f. I thank Lewis S. Ford for this reference.

30. SCT par. 33: "The concept of process implies, if properly considered, that one and the same thing can be the product of a process and also an eternal object. Thus the dualism which Whitehead thinks the only way out of this problem is avoided, and we can say that the world of process is the world of eternal objects. Whitehead does not realize this, possibly because he has not considered the nature and implications of history"; par. 35: "Thus all historical events become eternal objects; and if this is the case with history, it is the case with all self-creative processes. If the entire process of nature is a becoming, as Whitehead sees that it is, then this becoming must generate eternal objects. It does not presuppose them all, as Whitehead thinks, nor does it generate merely transient objects, as both he and Alexander assume."

31. Cf. J. Van der Veken, ‘Whiteheads filosofie van de creativiteit. Samenhang van de grondcategorieën," Tijdschrift voor Filosofie (12), 1980, 11-47.

32. For Collingwood’s elaboration of his concept of God, see SCT par. 40 and following, in which he identifies God with pure being. Here, I will not go into the question of this rather problematic identification. The elaboration of the problem of the God-concept in Collingwood’s thought would require another article. With regard to a comparison between Whitehead’s and Collingwood’s views on the relation metaphysics-religion, I wish to refer to SCT par. 54 in which Collingwood makes a distinction between objective and subjective immortality. Also this distinction might elucidate the difference between both authors’ concept of metaphysics. The elaboration of this question would require another article as well.

33. The term panpsychism needs to be nuanced as well. If by panpsychism is meant pluralistic idealism in the sense of Leibniz, Whitehead is not a panpsychist. If it is used to mean that all actuality has both mental and physical poles, it is difficult to deny that Whitehead would be a panpsychist. A better term in this respect would be "pansubjectivist."

34. See RI 102-104; FMC 51-52.

35. RI 104. An identical concept has been elaborated in IN 174-177.

36. D. Boucher, 154. ‘The concluding sentence to The Idea of Nature may well be a reference to the following term’s lectures: "I answer the question ‘Where do we go from here?’ by saying, ‘We go from the idea of nature to the idea of history’." This was the title of the lectures for the Trinity Term.

37. FMC 51-52: "But [to think that all people share the same basic presuppositions] was possible only because no one had yet sufficiently studied the history of thought to have discovered that metaphysical presuppositions are variables. With that discovery it becomes impossible even for a moment to take seriously either a realistic metaphysics according to which metaphysical propositions state our empirical knowledge of the categorical characteristics of reality, or an idealistic or psychological metaphysics according to which these depend upon the way in which the human mind as such is always and everywhere constructed ... We must start again at the beginning and construct a new metaphysical theory which will face the facts revealed by history. This has never yet been done." It is clear that Collingwood in this last sentence refers to the theory of objective idealism. For more information cf. G. Vanheeswijck, "Metaphysics as a ‘Science of Absolute Presuppositions’: Another look at R.G. Collingwood. A Reply to Rosemary Flanigan," The Modern Schoolman (1996) 333-350.

38. Cf. JA. Martin, "Collingwood and Wittgenstein on the Task of Philosophy," Philosophy Today 25 (1981), 12-23.

39. "The reformed subjectivist principle adopted by the philosophy of organism is merely an alternative statement of the principle of relativity .... This principle states that it belongs to the nature of a "being" that it is a potential for every "becoming." Thus all things are to be conceived as qualifications of actual occasions" (PR 166 [2531).

40. "The philosophy of organism aspires to construct a critique of pure feeling, in the philosophical position in which Kant put his Critique of Pure Reason. This should also supersede the remaining Critique’s required in the Kantian philosophy" (PR 113[172-173]). "It follows that the philosophy of organism entirely accepts the subjectivist bias of modern philosophy" (PR166 [253]).

41. Without explicitly naming Whitehead, in the article "The Historical Imagination" Collingwood rejects Whitehead’s definition of "ingression": "Nor is it possible to give an account of knowledge by combining theories of these two types. Current philosophy is full of such combinations: eternal objects and the transient situations in which they are ingredient" (IH 234).

42. Still one may not forget that Whitehead too treats the concept of history and the conditions of the possibility of metaphysics in his discussions with Descartes, Locke, Hume and Kant, without making them a central issue.

43. In this respect I also refer to the resemblance between Whitehead’s concept of metaphysics, as elaborated in the first chapter of the first part of Process and Reality, "Speculative Philosophy," and in the second part of Adventures of Ideas, "Cosmological," and Collingwood’s concept of metaphysics in the manuscripts "Correspondence with Gilbert Ryle," "Notes Towards a Metaphysic," and "The Function of Metaphysics in Civilization."

44. "[Theoretical reason] does not abolish consciousness or experience, but it appeals to a new world which is not and never can be experienced: a world of ideal objects towards which the world of experience has an asymptotic nisus" (NTM d 87).

 

References [Collingwood]

A An Autobiography. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1978.

B Second unpublished conclusion so The Idea of Nature, 1935 or 1937.

EM An Essay on Metaphysics. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1940.

EPM An Essay on Philosophical Method. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1933.

FMC "The Function of Metaphysics in Civilization," unpublished manuscript, 1937-1938.

IH The Idea of History. Edited by T.M. Knox. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1946.

IN The Idea of Nature. Edited by T.M. Knox. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1945.

MM "Method and Metaphysics," unpublished manuscript, 1935.

MTM "Notes Towards a Metaphysics," unpublished manuscript, 1933-1934.

RI "Realism and Idealism," unpublished manuscript, 1936.

SCT "Sketch of a Cosmological Theory," unpublished manuscript, 1934.

TNMS "The Nature of Metaphysical Study," unpublished manuscript, 1934.

Evolving Sensibilities of our Conception of Nature

I. Introduction

We are undergoing a changing sense in our conception of nature. This was partly ignited by Alfred North Whitehead and other visionaries of nature of the 20th century. Whitehead envisioned a nature in which mind was not bifurcated from nature, and in which nature was alive. As he said, "the effect of this sharp division between nature and life has poisoned all subsequent philosophy."1

What sense of nature do I have in mind? Certainly one in which we understand that we evolved as part of nature, that many of our abilities are linked to past adaptations.2 This view of nature is replete with both competition and cooperation in the fight for survival. Nature is also spectacular and one ought to be awestruck by it, humbled and invigorated by its great power and beauty.3 But nature also reflects our social sensibilities.4

Let me begin with a parenthetical remark: there are many uses of the concept of nature, many of which I use in describing the history of the term and its present use. My concern, like other investigators, is to link a conception of nature with our transactions with one another.5 In this regard, one can ask the question about whether our decision-making is good, whether it is of value in the context of a sense of nature. In addition, my view is one in which science and philosophy are continuous with one another, but one in which philosophy is not reduced to the handyman of science.

The vision that I suggest is one in which nature is not bifurcated from values; values cut across the line between nature and culture or society thereby reducing the dividing line between them. The value and rights of our offspring and the risks that they will face, because of our decisions about the resources of nature, eradicates the dividing line between values in nature from those in society -- the value and the right that future generations thrive both in culture and as part of nature.6

In what follows, I begin with an historical presentation about nature and our transactions with each other. I build toward the thesis that a vision of nature is linked to our carving out sanguine, valued action and labor with regard to the use of nature and its resources. A philosophy of nature is constitutive of an environmental/economic perspective. The argument is to characterize an evolving sense of nature and ourselves and our decision-making. The decision-making embodied in meaningful labor perhaps is localized within environmental economics.

II. Landscapes

Our age truly has become one of changing landscapes, of environmental intimacy and dependency which crosses over regional borders. But before culture became the fabric of the everyday, nature afforded the necessities and life was dictated by their procurement. Our life was dominated by local adaptations. In the course of human "progress," when leisure emerged speculative thought surfaced. Our brain already contained the possibility for speculative thought.

Speculative thought and linguistic competence lay at the heart of our divergence from other primates. The early cave drawings of nature are about objects of need and awe. The drawings also reveal a definite link and appreciation of nature. The representations reveal our first speculations of our surroundings. Nature was alive, mysterious and awe-inspiring, and one was very much a part of it. Nature was not something detached from us. The separation of ourselves from nature was a much later invention. There may not have been an egocentric dominance in our psyche. The world was not revolving around us.

It has been claimed that the "paleolithic mind" experienced nature as alive, not dead. Magna mater was vibrant and appreciated; the land was sacred. Our place, while insecure, was one of awe and delight.7 With the effort to explore and to provide safety, we began to dominate and to render nature subject to our aims and wishes. In this process we lost some of our awe and respect for nature.

These claims about nature, I submit, are indeed romantic and somewhat misleading about our past. They capture something of our past, and these ruminations are replete with the intellectual imperative that an exaggerated domination of nature, a disregard for the consequences of one’s decision-making, is what we need to move beyond. Why? Because we need a sense of nature for which we are respectful; we want a vision of nature where we can see that we are still a harmonious part of it, labor in it, and need it.

In human ontogenetic development, one moves away from the childlike sense that the world revolves around us to a recognition that we are not the center of things but a part of things. Perhaps primitive humans were not so egocentric but simply awed by what they saw when they had time to reflect upon it. The vastness of nature was sublime, but the chores of life were in finding and satisfying the basics.

Because nature was alive and vibrant and we were not detached from it, our first speculative thoughts about nature were those of animism. Our early theories of the world were of extra human or animal spirits (animism) orchestrating the affairs of life in nature. The range was wide, and it grew ever wider as we began to theorize more about the origins of things. The early shamans were the leaders in the community, deciphering and encoding about the origin of things. To them nature was alive; death was an omnipresent danger, but there was still no void, no vacuum, no uninhabited lifeless space.

It has been suggested that our loss of the wilderness experience and the nurturing that it engendered gave rise to modernism. This sense of nature was replete with domination, subjecting nature to our needs taking it as a resource to be exploited. Of course nature was our resource, but, on the one hand, a finite one and, on the other hand, revealing an ethic in labor and guidance for our decision-making.

I suggest, again, that we should neither reify nature in terms of mythological beginnings nor trample upon nature disrespectfully. We transact with nature daily. It is a vital source of what we need to survive. The transaction model of interacting with nature is most often put in the context of individuals (or firms or countries) and the negotiations and contracts that take place between them. The transaction consists of utilizing the sources and resources of nature; the conception is that of long-term vision, the labor intimate to the decision-making. In other words, we are (so to speak) taking out a contract with one another with regard to our interactions with nature.

We need, however, to work out the conception of the individual and community and place both in an evolving biological and cultural context. Decision-making is rooted in thoughtful action that has value, and the distinctions between nature and culture are blurred; the decision-making about the environment, our nested relationships within communities, and how this impacts our sense of ourselves is where we now turn.

III. Philosophical Visions of Individuals and Community and Our Sense of Nature

I am a modern biological scientist and, as such, I want to focus on the Enlightenment sense of the individual and nature. This I hope will prove instructive in reformulating a sense of nature in which interactions as bonds between individuals and nature are emphasized.

The individual was glorified on this Enlightenment view and this was not an entirely bad thing. The breakdown of pernicious authority, whether of church or state, resulted in an appreciation of human spirit, inquiry and labor. After all, knowledge of causes meant something analogous to control and prediction or necessity. But the flavor of humanism was about human ties to one another. It was about our bonds as well as about the resurrection of early classical thought, as medieval armor and cobwebs of the mind had begun to be shed.

Humanism was a glorification of human knowledge and undertakings and not an appreciation of nature. The spirited gentle world of Saint Francis was ignored by the Enlightenment amidst the protestations against church and state authority. With the onset of the Reformation and the Enlightenment, an individual mind was elevated further away from nature and became dominated by science (another form of authority) where previously it had been dominated by theology.

Within the spirit of the Enlightenment, there was the guiding belief that if individuals were allowed to satisfy our wants and needs then civil society would function well. The pursuit of one’s economic goals was perceived to benefit society as a whole. Nature was conceived as replete with unbounded riches ready to be used. The dominant thought was that each individual, each atom of society, should be allowed to express its economic actions. Thus the society would have amassed wealth through individual economic activity. Adam Smith8 also spoke to the Enlightenment sense of individuality, on the one hand, and to the larger satisfaction of wants, on the other. Nature dwindled further under the purview of this outlook.

On this view, individuals were self-contained. That is the ideal or the model for human progress and development; it is what Whitehead linked to a notion of "misplaced concreteness." It is the model of the rational human being uncontaminated by the pushes and pulls of external forces. This view misconstrued human reason and human freedom.9

Nature seemed to have descended into faded impressions. Materials, the ground of our existence as we forged landscapes in which to live, now seemed distant, too distant. Empiricism became pale and passive, because it was concerned with the association of impressions. There seemed to be nothing real about matter, let alone community and bonded social ties of real importance. My own view is that our decision-making, communitarian bonds, and their legitimization, required the sense of the public(s) as we capture our connectedness to nature and its resources.

Hegel’s vision of nature was alive, but only through the mythic embodiment of a grand plan. The science that derived from nature as alive did not seem to lead to any great discoveries in the natural sciences. Marx’s sense of nature and its resources was not any more enlightened than Adam Smith’s.10 Nature was there to be harvested not for the individual but for the state. The state was transcendent and nature and the individual were secondary. The state in its glory was the vehicle of expression. Nature was of secondary worth and became a resource to be used for the benefit of the state Any shred of romantic vision of glorious nature was bourgeois and replete with exaggerated individualism for a small few who could appreciate nature. The actual ideal surge was not toward nature but toward historical necessity and the liberation of humanity and its disease of exaggerated privacy.

Perhaps some integration of two Italian thinkers provides the balancing link of individual and community that I have been adumbrating. Vico, the Italian philologist and philosopher, emphasized the community and, therefore implicitly, transactions between humans, in his commentary on the evolution of culture and the history of humanity. He cultivated what became known as the human sciences, and his picture is perhaps best placed in the context of his fellow contemporary thinker Galileo, who represents the Enlightenment ideal of the individual mind forging an independent path through inquiry.11

Vico’s vision was of humanity laboring through our decision-making and action in order to forge out meaning; it was the labor of creating meaning through our decision-making. An objective world was not lost with the breakdown of the medieval edifice, nor with the cool world of colliding atoms. Rather the world was animated by human labor and discourse.

Galileo may have provided the context in which to conceive individual decision -- making and experimental science. Galileo, a pious Christian, helped solidify modern science by coupling invention, theory, experiment, and technique with individual choice. The experimental mind of science was that of an individual alone in rebellion against state or Church authority. Years later this attitude developed into the emergence of modern inquiry, individual decision-making and the modern sense of human rights.

Galileo was at this time part of the group of thinkers who were moving away from the Medieval view of the world. The architecture of hierarchical purpose was beginning to falter. With the rise of the physical sciences, the teleology with its objective order was disintegrating. Galileo was an intellectual engine in the breakup of the linking of our conceptions and decision-making of purpose with nature, and he was part of the overthrow of medieval scholastic and classical Greek thought. But nature as "alive" and our transactions and participation within nature was not understood. Now let us return to the issue of a nature that is alive with inquiry and in which the human spirit is thriving.

IV. Adapting and Appreciating Nature

Malthus argued that overpopulation creates stiffer competition and extinction of those not fit. Population growth run rampant is a danger to society, but a built-in safeguard is the extinction of those unable to survive. It is hard to envision that the majority will benefit as we witness the fallen over-populated masses reduce themselves brutally. After all, our humanity taught us to respond to the needs of others, the combination of moral sentiments and additional rules set the conditions for such moral decisions and actions. Now those needs are not to be met. Nurture just the strongest and most economically stationed? If this were the case, society would be brutal, if not living hell. It seems even more brutal than the state of nature that Hobbes deemed barbaric and short.12 Such an extreme is not helpful for it does not balance the softer sides of nature with this harsh extreme

But with Romanticism the vision of nature as a value again reappeared, but in a flowery form. The vision that Rousseau had was of harmonious humanity amidst the tranquility of nature. Ecological leadership was ridden with the myth of a return. The new garden was not that of Eden, but was envisioned somewhere in the South Pacific or the English countryside. Both myths undermined human responsibility, and created a false picture of nature.13 Nature is as harsh as well as it is grand and lovely and nurturing. To portray one at the expense of the other is to err unnecessarily.

Bergson contrasted the necessity of nature in physics with the "élan vital" of biology (e.g., freedom in nature, spirit); the dualism that permeated Descartes’ and Kant’s vision of nature, that which was located in human reason was now shifted to a location in nature. In other words, rationalists had placed the bulk of freedom in the cognate faculties of the human mind in contrast to the stark necessity of physical events. Later dualists like Bergson envisioned human life not as the cognate faculty of reason but by contrasting the life forces of nature to physics. He presented a philosophy of nature of living entities rendering creative choices as they expressed themselves. Unfortunately, the klan vital served as a vaporous entity analogous to that of ether. Biological events unfortunately were then set aside, once again encouraging an inherent dualism.14

Bergson and others were right to emphasize biological events as inherently life-affirming, but wrong in mythologizing them. In addition, Bergson did not emphasize the important sense of laboring in the natural world. Lamarck did so by emphasizing learned habits. For example, giraffes stretched and labored to reach objects. He thought they then passed on these abilities to their offspring. This idea became known as Lamarckism, and has been discredited within biology. Lamarck’s contribution was to emphasize labor as part of natural events as animals struggle, as they solve problems and as they adapt to local challenges.15

Our concept of landscapes continued to change. From the pens of Thoreau or, later, John Muir, nature was appreciated as well as to be protected. A sense of sanity was depicted by our relation to nature. The pleasure and serenity Rousseau received from solitary walks was further elaborated and described by Thoreau as he retreated into the woods; on these walks he retreated and escaped into the solitariness of himself, but he did keep alive the idea that nature was alive and that its resources were valuable.

V. Philosophical Naturalists; Thought in Action

The American pragmatists, particularly Peirce, but also James and Dewey, emphasized the role of community. Labor, meaningful thought in action, should be spent in carving up the landscape for communities to be formed. The labor of landscaping would promote common bonds. They tied participation to labor and leadership. Dewey especially colored his inquiry to integrate individual choice and cultural bonds amidst our sensibilities to nature. Moreover, these philosophers tied nature and culture together as continuous with one another. Landscapes changed by our labor, by our decision-making and habits.17

The theme of nature’s vitality figured prominently in the thinking of Whitehead and the American Pragmatists. While some pragmatists have received a bad reputation by identifying knowledge with what works and what works with technology, this was not the case for them all.18 Others tied their political acumen to the belief that we are part of the natural order. They proposed that leadership takes its cue from the realization of

Our relationship to other living things. In addition, they neither exaggerated the individual at the expense of being a part of society, nor denigrated the individual for the glorification of society. A balance was sought between the two. This balance was also extended to nature.

A philosophy of nature, therefore, includes both the sense of human beings as survivor and adaptor and human beings, the laborer. Early leaders in the fields of economics and the biological sciences did not realize the deep but perhaps fragile relationship between the ecology of living things and the labor of economic activity, but now we do. Transactions with others, in the context of respectful engagement and meaningful labor with nature, is one very important value, in addition to the fact that the idea of property and a just, equitable world is still an ideal to which we aspire.

Our culture has expanded the sense of rights.19 As our civilization has grown we ought to have moved beyond the overly egocentric sense of rights which dominated for so long. When we rebelled against church and state authority and proclaimed the dignity of humanity we took a great step. When we realized that we were not the center of the universe through the models of Copernicus, Darwin or Freud we reached forward to the realization that our relationship to the world around us is one of dependence and cannot be transcended while reducing the value of what is around us. A conception of others and their rights, and the rights of future generations, has necessitated our duties towards nature.

While we struggle to accept responsibility, the seductions to remain oblivious are ever present. But there is a fragile trend for greater responsibility now because our sense of rights has expanded, and this has widened our horizons. The vision is that of the cultivation of the commons, the lands -- biocentric, othercentric.

VI. Economics And Ecosystems

A philosophy of nature and decision-making is to be found in the fusion of economics with ecology,20 and less perhaps, with the traditional philosophy of physics or biology. My argument is that evolving sensibilities toward the natural world requires that the land be construed as sacred but instrumental for our use.

History is replete with economic practices and laboring that raped the land, that compromised its capacity to reproduce and flourish. The Puritans wanted to "tame" the wilderness. But nature is the source of our power and is our partner. When we lose sight of this we become lost and worse -- we become alienated and destructive.21

Even John Stuart Mill was an early proponent of conservationism, just as he was an advocate for woman’s rights. His individualistic philosophy did not hamper these important recognitions. For conservation can be compatible or not with individualistic or socialistic visions; both can either trample or respect nature.22

A recognition of the limits of growth has been an implicit principle of some cultures and has been expressed formally in books like Small is Beautiful and The Limits of Growth. Growth does not always mean bigger; it should mean better, and more responsible. In our age it means sustaining the environment and not consuming it detrimentally, thinking ahead, moving beyond narrow egocentric and cultural egocentric points of view.23

When one demythologizes our sense of nature as neither inherently sacred nor bestial, one may generate a more balanced decision-making and expanding rights amidst considerations of nature and its resources. This, I believe, will direct us on our way to a more sanguine judgment about ourselves. Perhaps from Darwin we have realized our continuity in nature. What the science of ecology and the philosophical works of Alfred North Whitehead do is point out the utter interconnectedness of humans and nature, their interrelatedness.

An evolutionary account of human action is, in part, the spontaneous choices of individuals amidst biological constraints and the social milieu, but one does not rule out human purposes of which there are several important ones. One norm in decision-making is to render the world not worse but better off by our presence. Another is to be respectful of our natural surroundings on which we depend. We take out a contract with others to protect the commons; and we labor to keep them stable, sustainable. There is a responsibility to hand down a healthy nature to future generations.

As a critical realist, I focus on the objective values that are uncovered in our inquiry amidst the valuational component of our decision-making. In no place is it as clear as in reasoning about the environment.

VII. Value And Nature

Valuational decisions emerge in measuring worth, in pursuing what we take to be important, measuring the objects in our world. Values instruct us, inform us about what we ought to pursue. Values obviously are essential in the consideration of nature and the use of its resources. Perhaps this reflects the humanization of nature. But to humanize nature is not necessarily to rob it of its great majestic worth. By necessity, as we alter nature by our labor, we humanize nature with our artifacts.

Our decision-making in environmental-economics forces us to participate in nature. We are not abstracted from it but are constantly embedded in nature, even on the most stony of city streets. Nature’s wild elegance can be civilizing and is an important value that we share, that we socially construct, and yet take to be empirically real. One of the key values is the sense of wild nature and its civilizing effects upon our constitution. This is in contrast to an earlier perspective, particularly with the Puritans when they arrived in America, that the value of nature and its wildness represented the wildness in us, something to be done away with.24 Our values, at least to some extent, have shifted.

Valuing living things has its roots in the ancient and modern sages of many persuasions and includes not only humans but also much of the natural world. Natural variety and its preservation have value in and of themselves, but they also have value for the development of medicines and other material that are useful to us. As the above discussion suggests values are fundamental to our thinking and are part of our objective landscape in terms of both intrinsic and extrinsic valuational decisions.25 Because of the normative nature of values, this is not simply a sociological point.

Species have determinate (intrinsic) value that reflects their definiteness and worth. Normative measures capture the worth of species. Each species is unique, as we participate with them in the larger ecosphere. This requires recognizing the value of our environment, of ourselves.26 There is an aesthetic dimension to our experience and our decision-making in capturing the value in things.27 The pragmatic tradition tries to capture the richness of experience and our interests, balanced against human inquiry and worth as we capture the value that lies in our transactions with one another and with nature.

We are forced to rank values. What one wants, like the economist Boulding suggested (following the playwright Oscar Wilde), is to know the worth of something in addition to its value; the decision-making about species should reflect its intrinsic worth and extrinsic value.28

From my point of view, one very important goal is the preservation of many kinds of living entities and the habitat in which they evolved. And progress here is at best frail, and at worst non-existent. At times this consideration is for ecological stability; at other times it is for economic, medical or aesthetic considerations, and so forth. At each crossing the preservation of species -- the preservation of nature -- will compete with human labor and decisions for entrepreneurial action. Nature reminds us that we labor and transform our environment; even the decision to preserve nature is a decision to mold it in some way.

Values are inherent in our inquiry, in what we find important. But our values do not create nature, and our "psychocentric" conception of world-making lends itself to being disrespectful to a world (nature) we did not make. While our values do not create nature, they can certainly instill greater appreciation of nature.29 What one wants is a balanced view that acknowledges the worth of natural entities and the value the terrain has for our economic decision-making. The legitimation of values places them in the larger culture, undercuts the rigid separation of nature and culture. The objectivity of value judgments places the mind’s decision-making in the broader culture milieu of inquiry.

This view of value allows one to ask, what is the value of species? One should move away from values being tied to the senses or to subjective judgment and to the realization that values are themselves cognate and fundamental to our decision-making. There is little that is subjective about them in the old pejorative sense of their being private rather than cognitive and real. One may legitimately ask the even more general question: What is the value of nature? Is it for us? But we are part of nature. This is not an abstraction. Environmental decision-making reveals our roots in nature and our utter dependency on its preservation. This is not romantic, but pragmatic.

How then does one respond when one hears about the plight of some 600 surviving mountain gorillas being subjected to possible obliteration when warring factions in Africa are fighting one another? Do we care more about the gorillas? Of course not. But the issue lingers and calls forward issues of values in our decision-making and judgment. Value judgments are tied to problem-solving, and problem-solving lies at the basis of decision-making.

My argument is that we embody value as fundamental to our decision-making, acknowledging that value permeates our experience and determines it, and that if we tie it to life-securing labor and ethical, engagement in everyday transactions, we will have made some progress in our conceptions of ourselves. The way we "see" the world reflects the way our mind-brain works as well as the properties of the world with which we are coping, in which we are striving to survive and perhaps thrive.

VIII. Decision-Making, Nature and the Enlightenment

Inquirers like myself are beholden to the Enlightenment. We are nurtured by its grandiose pretensions of knowledge and liberation. I have not given up on the Enlightenment, but I do seek to modify it and provide a new perspective of the Enlightenment and our sense of nature. What I suggest is that the Enlightenment notion of reason be downsized to human proportion and that it needs to be mixed with an appreciation of nature.

By Enlightenment, I refer to the great faith in reason and inquiry, modified by its link to classical pragmatism (e.g., Peirce and Dewey) and Whitehead. The Enlightenment notion of nature was mechanical in the clockwork metaphorical depiction. Everything in it was run by necessity and totally predicted. Chance was precluded from rational discourse, and from nature. This sense of nature, the methods of determining consequences from hypotheses, and understanding the rules that govern our choices dominated philosophical conceptions of science informed from within the science.30

The Enlightenment ideal of reason and its perfection in science needs to be linked to an evolving notion of inquiry -- a conception of inquiry that is inclusive of other disciplines not formally listed as science. The Enlightenment tended to be scientistic. Thus, reinvisioning nature and ourselves is not only part of accepting the fact that our knowledge is not certain, but also that inquiry is larger than science. In the end, I would concur with Whitehead that "the function of reason is to promote the art of life."31

Decision-making is knotted with what Dewey called "funded wisdom." These are the well-worn practices of decision-making in action that have worked, that have validity and merit. They reflect decisions tied to uncertainty, everyday ethics and consideration of rights and our judgments about nature. Such decisions reflect individuals trying to adapt and cope with their surroundings and generate new avenues of action. Perfect reason, therefore, is replaced with imperfect but adaptive and open problem-solving proclivities. The dethroning of reason is not the dissolution of the concept of reason and its legitimation. There is no descent into irrationality. Legitimation in decision-making bridges individual choice with social or community considerations. The way I use the concept of "legitimation," as I have already indicated, is by necessity a social term.32

One essential and important endpoint in decision-making, therefore, is participating in a covenant of thinking and laboring individuals, bearing responsibility, and recognizing the importance of social goods. The common good(s) -- in this case nature -- ought to bridge decision-making and labor in nature together as a normative goal. One result is a frail contract between decision-making amid the delicate balance of rights and nature.

Our relationship to nature reminds us that our cognitive abilities evolved as a natural system. Our brain is a computing device, determining meaning and coherence and for solving problems. Brains evolved, in part, to solve problems. One comes in this regard to appreciate that flexibility is a characteristic of evolution and it should be a characteristic of decision-making. Rigidity leads toward extinction. Recognition that decisions are tied to knowledge, the lack of it and the means of acquiring it, requires a broad range of approaches in acquiring knowledge and in informing our everyday transactions with one another.33

Decision-making and our individual choices are rooted amid the larger social and public world in which we participate, and in which others are participants. After all, what rights do is increase those individuals that can participate, and what morals do is encourage that we avoid myopia and not trample on others. This concern is placed in the backdrop about decisions concerning nature, about the increased "globalization" of environmental risk.34

IX. Conclusion

I have suggested that a proper philosophy of nature is tied to environmental economics, a conception of labor that is thoughtful and with value, a vision of persons as inherently part of the natural world and as responsible decision-makers, not alienated from nature. This is the normative goal for which there are varying degrees of instantiation in the real world.

In this age of molecular biology, a philosophy of biology needs to be rooted in a sense of nature, with human labor and history. Conceptions of nature and decision -- making need to be placed into an historical context. For instance, there is a historical expansion of our notion of rights towards considerations of the environment and future generations that will need the resources of the environment.

The philosophy of biology is about the structure of biological knowledge -- its instrumental use and the values that permeate the inquiry. But its grounding is in our appreciation of nature, our evolutionary past, and the value of nature to our economic sensibility and our everyday labor and praxis.35

Decision-making about nature has to do, in part, with allocation of resources, environmental economic decision-making. Nature, however, has value over and above its use in economic terms; cost-benefit analysis would have one believe that values are merely subjective. Values are real entities of our culture and nature. The value of our decision-making must capture the dignity of relations between culture and nature. But there will always be conflict between issues of efficiency and equity.

These issues in our decision-making about nature reflect both the psychology and the culture in which one lives. What I have emphasized are transactions and contracts; they hold for individual choice, collective action and for the preservation, cultivation, and use of nature. They require leadership and labor. They are part of the legitimation process as we think about nature, our decision-making and rights. The labor, meaningful thought in action with value, is not without alienation; perfect unalienated labor is a great fantasy, a worthy ideal in less pejorative terms but not likely to be real. The benefits of ecological-economics on our decision-making are those which influence us to conserve, preserve, to move away from exaggerated egocentrism and consumerism.36

Decision-making in ecological economics provides a context in which to think about participating in nature. Within science, participation was seen as a confound, a loss of objectivity. But Heisenberg in physics over fifty years ago noted that we interfere with nature as we look on it, and he ushered in the uncertainty relations associated with modern physics.37 This is a fact of inquiry. The question is to what degree: the degree of uncertainty can be small enough so as not to matter, or large and matter a great deal. The point for us is that a conception of decision-making in environmental economics has to include some notion of participating in nature.

This sense of participation ties thought and action together in a context of being a part of nature. But rights and natural resources are expanded to include future generations. We march together in a strengthening confederation of concerned citizens forging out future economic security and well being amid our sense of insecurity and nature.

The justification for the above is in the delicate balance in our decision-making as we attend to our creative decisions and our economic prosperity, as we attend to the rights of others and our transactions, and as we remind ourselves that human health is linked also to our relationships with our labor and to nature.

 

Notes

1. A.N. Whitehead, Modes of Thought (New York: Macmillan Co., 1938).

2. Charles Darwin, The Origin of Species (1859) (New York: Mentor Books, 1958); E. Mayr, One Long Argument (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1991).

3. Immanuel Kant, Critique of Judgement (1792) (New York: Hafner Press, 1951).

4. A. N. Whitehead, Process and Reality, Corrected Edition (New York: Free Press, 1978).

5. John Dewey, Experience and Nature (1925) (La Salle, Ill.: Open Court, 1989).

6. E. B. Weiss, "The Planetary Trust: Conservation and International Equity," Ecology Law Quarterly 11(1989), 495-581.

7. M. Oelschlaeger, The Idea of Wilderness (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1991).

8. Adam Smith, Wealth of Nations (1775) (New York: Collier Press, 1957).

9. Immanuel Kant, The Critique of Practical Reason (1788). New York: Bobbs-Merrill Co., 1956.

10. My colleague David Sarokin and I discuss these points in our article, "The Necessity of Environmental Economics," Journal of Environment Management 38(1993), 259-280.

11. G. Vico, The New Sciences (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, and the great Galileo, Discoveries and Opinions (New York: Anchor Books, 1957).

12. T.R. Malthus, An Essay on the Principle of Population(1898) (New York: Penguin Books, 1970) and T. Hobbes, Leviathan (1651) (The Liberal Arts Press, 1958).

13. J.J. Rousseau, The Social Contract (1762) (New York: Hafner Publications, 1947).

14. Henri Bergson, The Creative Mind (New York: Citadel Press, 1946).

15.J.B. Lamarck, Zoological Philosophy (1809). Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1994.

16. D. Thoreau, Great Short Work,. New York: Harper and Row, 1971.

17. R.C. Neville, The Highroad Around Modernism. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1992. Also contrast J. Dewey’s, Experience and Nature with R.C. Rorty’s Objectivity, Relativity and Truth (Cambridge and New York: Cambridge University Press, 1991) for a different sense of American Pragmatism; also see my Pursuit of Inquiry (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1992).

18. For a discussion of these issues, see R.B. Westbrook, John Dewey and American Democracy (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1991).

19. R.F. Nash, The Rights of Nature (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1989); D. Sarokin and J. Schulkin, "Co-evolution of Social and Environmental Justice," The Environmentalist 14 (1994), 121-129.

20. H. Daly and J. Cobb, For the Common Good (Boston: Beacon Press, 1989).

21. P. Miller, Errand Into the Wilderness (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1956).

22.J.S. Mill, The Subjection of Women (1869) (Cambridge: M.I.T. Press, 1970).

23. E. F. Schumacher, Small is Beautiful (New York: Liberty Press, 1975); G. Hardin, Living Within Limits (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1993).

24. P. Miller, Errand Into the Wilderness (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1956).

25. B.G. Norton, Why Preserve Natural Variety?(Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1987); P.W. Taylor, Respect For Nature (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1986); John Rawls, A Theory of Justice (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1971); The Price of Preservation, edited by A.G. Chisholm and A.J. Moran (Taisman Institute, 1993).

26. R.C. Neville, The Cosmology of Freedom (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1974); A.N. Whitehead, Modes of Thought (New York: Macmillian Press, 1938).

27. CL Lewis, An Analysis of Knowledge and Valuation (LaSalle, Ill.: Open Court Press, 1946).

28. K.E. Boulding, "Some Contributions of Economics to the General Theory of Value," Philosophy 0f Science 223 (1956), 1-14.

29. See D. Weissman’s interesting new book, Truths Debt to Value (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1993). Weissman put the issue of value clearly by staring that "values are either created by our appraisal or found in the things themselves" (103).

30. Charles S. Peirce, Reasoning and the Logic of Things (1889) (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1992),John Dewey, Essays an Experimental Logic (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1916).

31. A.N. Whitehead, The Function of Reason (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1929), 4.

32. J. Habermas Legitimation Crisis (Boston: Beacon Press, 1975;) Jay Schulkin, The Delicate Balance (Lanham, Md.: University Press of America, 1996).

33. See, for example, Mitroff and H.A. Linstone, The Unbounded Mind (New York: Oxford University Press, 1992) for an excellent discussion of how flexibility of perspective is essential for decision-making.

34. See A. Gidden’s interesting book, The Consequences of Modernity (Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1990) for a discussion of the relationship between environmental risks and the increased social proximity of individuals across cultures and continents.

35. See, for example, D. Hull, Philosophy of Biological Science (Englewood-Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice Hall, 1974); Alexander Rosenberg, The Structure of Biological Science (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1985); Alexander Rosenberg, Instrumental Biology or the Disunity of Science. (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1994); Elliot Sober From a Biological Point of View. (New York: Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994).

36. P.W. Taylor, Respect for Nature (Princeton University Press, 1986); M. Sagoff, The Economy o/the Earth (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1988); and H. Rolston, Philosophy Gone Wild (Buffalo: Prometheus Books, 1986) and Environmental Ethics (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1989).

37. W. Heisenberg, Physics and Philosophy (New York: Harper and Row, 1958). "But all things excellent are as difficult as they are rare."

The Prehensibility of God’s Consequent Nature

A. Introduction to the Problem

Nowhere in his work does Whitehead give an explicit account of the question: how can God’s consequent nature, which he himself characterizes as "incomplete" (PR 345), influence the temporal world? "To be able to have influence" means that God’s consequent nature must be prehensible for temporal (or "worldly")2 occasions, but this demands the satisfaction of God’s consequent nature, and this would seem antagonistic to incompleteness. None of the passages which mention the workings of God’s consequent nature consider this conceptual problem (see PR 32, 87-88, 350-351). The efficacy of God’s consequent nature on the world may, however, contain an aspect of Whitehead’s philosophy which is important for theology. For[this is the context in which the issue of God also as Moved Mover is relevant. That is why the question – "if and how God’s consequent nature can be prehensible and therefore efficacious" -- is especially pertinent to any attempt at finding a (more) accurate model for God’s efficacy in the world. This question is the subject of the present article.3 First, the problem will be examined and two different lines of interpretation will be noted [Section A]. Then a proposal for interpretation will be made [Section B], and will be discussed and elaborated [Section C], and compared to closely related alternatives [Section E]. In between, it will be necessary to briefly consider the characterization of God’s own aim [Section D].

Whitehead calls the influence of an actual entity (say "a") on another actual entity ("b") the functioning of "a" in regard to "b" or the prehension of "a" by "b." In this prehension, "a" is appropriated by "b" as an (immortal) object in "b’s" concrescence. That is why Whitehead uses the term "objective immortality" (of "a") to indicate the functioning of "a" with regard to other actual entities. This functioning of "a" requires that "a" itself has become completely determinate; in other words, that its concrescence has achieved satisfaction. In the satisfaction of an actual occasion the process of becoming which can be described as the transition from indeterminateness to determinateness comes to an end, and with it the subjective immediacy of the occasion perishes.4 With this satisfaction the objective immortality begins, namely, the functioning in respect to other processes of becoming. For this reason, satisfaction is the juncture of immanent causality to transient causality,5 and hence of subjective immediacy to objective immortality.

So, the question we are facing is: If God’s consequent nature realizes itself in part out of the prehensions of all worldly actual entities (PR 345), to which new ones, however, are continually added, how then can the consequent nature of God be objectively immortal (PR 32)? Does the concrescence of the actual entity God somehow achieve satisfaction after all? Is there objective immortality for God despite God’s incompleteness (PR 345)? Is it the case that God is objectively immortal without this implying that Gods subjective immediacy has disappeared? Apparently so, according to Whitehead, even though he will answer to the question how God (unlike other actual entities) can provide data for other actual entities without "perishing": "This is a genuine problem. I have not attempted to solve it."6 This might seem to indicate that the concept of God was not his primary concern (SGW 4).

Many philosophers and theologians who have been concerned with Whitehead’s metaphysics have pointed out this problem of consistency. Charles Hartshorne, Ivor Leclerc and the earlier John Cobb, together with many others, see the solution to the problem of God’s prehensibility in the so called "societal view of God." That is to say, they think of God in accordance with the model of a "society," and more precisely in accordance with the model of that "society" which consists of one temporal thread of successive actual entities (a "route" of actual entities). According to this view, a divine actual occasion integrates -- just like every worldly occasion – the occasions it is given and achieves its satisfaction. This satisfaction is prehended, together with those worldly occasions which have appeared in the meantime, by the successive divine occasion, which also arrives at satisfaction in its turn. So, God is seen as a "serial society," as a route of actual divine occasions, which all successively end in satisfaction, and are therefore prehensible.7

Only a handful of process thinkers hold on to Whitehead’s explicit statement that God is not a route but one actual entity (PR 18, 87, 110), the so-called "entitative view of God." One of these was A.H. Johnson who was the first to mention the possibility of a "societal view," and thereby elicited an explicitly negative reaction from Whitehead.8 Others who entertain this view are, mainly, William Christian, Lewis Ford, Marjorie Suchocki, and Jorge Nobo.9 Amongst these, Ford is the only one who links his holding of the "entitative view" to an emphasis on the imprehensibility of God’s consequent nature10 (and who later finds this so much of a problem that he starts searching in other directions, though not in that of the "societal view").11 The other three -- Christian, Suchocki, and Nobo -- do see possibilities for a conceptually coherent account of the prehensibility of God. The interpretation I will give below moves in their direction. The points of mutual difference will be treated in Section E.

B. Proposal for Interpretation: God’s Everlasting Concrescence as Growing Satisfaction

Whitehead’s vision of God as one actual entity does not necessarily imply problems concerning consistency if one takes into account certain characteristics which pertain only to that one special actual entity "God" -- characteristics due to which God is qualitatively different from all other actual entities, without thereby making the actual entity "God" an exception to the metaphysical scheme (PR 349, 343).

A worldly actual entity begins with a set of data, its actual world, which must come together into one complex feeling. This process of synthesis or becoming, this concrescence, concerns itself with the transition from indeterminateness to determinateness (PR 45, 29,212) or, as Whitehead once said, from "incoherence" to "coherence" (PR 25). This process of becoming has temporal duration. Until the process of synthesis is finished, the actual entity which is becoming cannot be prehended because it is not yet fully determinate; that is, it has not yet achieved its satisfaction.

Now, according to Whitehead, God too is in a process of concrescence. However, despite what Whitehead once said of God12 -- the "always in concrescence" -- this does not mean that God is enveloped in an ordinary process of concrescence and therefore has not integrated the given data (and then could nevertheless be prehended). Rather, Whitehead says God always has "objective immortality" (PR 32), implying that God is always fully determinate; that is, that God has always integrated all the available data. But God nevertheless is still in growth or concrescence because new data are continually added. God is, so to speak, continually done integrating, but continually there is something new to integrate -- just like "the past" is always the completely determinate set of events which have passed but grows nonetheless. And just like every occasion which has passed immediately belongs to the past, without any temporal delay or transitional state, so too every past occasion is immediately integrated in God’s consequent nature.13 So, all God’s prehensions always are integrated in God, and that is precisely why God is "satisfied" and prehensible at every moment. But this satisfaction differs from that of worldly entities in that it is not static but dynamic, as there is constant addition to it.14 It must be understood as a "growing satisfaction." Hence, God’s consequent nature can be characterized as being determinate (cf. PR 32) as well as incomplete (PR 345).

The possibility of a growing satisfaction is linked to the fact that the aim of God’s "concrescence’ (greatly simplified) can be formulated as "retaining all past actual entities and integrating them."15 This means that it is possible to think both that the aim has been attained at every moment and that the aim changes with the creative advance of the world. In this manner, Whitehead’s conceptualization can be thought to hold that God’s consequent nature can be prehended because it is always fully determinate, although it is never complete and therefore "always in concrescence."16 This "always in concrescence of God’s consequent nature, hence, does not mean "still not concrete," but refers to an ever-growing satisfaction. God as fully actual is therefore both always becoming as well as always being.

When Whitehead uses the term "concrescence" in regard to God, then this is not concrescence in the usual sense of the word; in other words, not concrescence as the transition from indeterminateness to determinateness, but "concrescence" as continually growing satisfaction. In any case Whitehead at best only once speaks of the "concrescence" of God’s consequent nature,17 while usually speaking of God’s consequent nature in terms of "evolving" ("the consequent nature of God, which evolves in its relationship to the evolving world" [PR 12]) or "growth" ("this operative growth of God’s nature" [PR 346]). Also in Johnson’s account of his conversations with Whitehead, Whitehead says that God is temporal in the sense that God "grows."18

C. Discussion and Elaboration

As Whitehead also applies the term "growth" to worldly macro-organisms (PR 188), i.e., to "societies," the question arises if, and to what extent, he is covertly presenting a "societal view." This will prove not to be the case. Actually, White-head’s view clashes with the model of an ordinary (worldly) actual entity for the same reason as it clashes with the view of a "serial society," but it has graver repercussions for the society-model as will become clear in the following.

Let’s start with the idea of God as an actual entity. A normal actual entity has phases of concrescence which are not yet completely determinate, namely, all those phases prior to satisfaction. Now, such phases of indeterminateness or incoherence are absent in God’s case. This has to do with the reversal of polarity in God as compared to the polarity of the worldly actual entities (PR 345). God starts at the conceptual pole, of which Whitehead says: "God is primordially one, namely, he is the primordial unity of relevance of the many potential forms" (PR 349). The physical prehensions which are added to this primordial nature, do not as yet have to be brought to unity, but are prehended in terms of God’s conceptual unity, and are thereby instantaneously absorbed into that unity: "in the process he [God] acquires a consequent multiplicity, which the primordial character absorbs into its own unity" (PR 349).19 The completely determinate final unity which Whitehead terms "satisfaction," which is the culmination in a normal concrescence, and which is reached though phases of indeterminateness of the mutual relations of the elements which partake in the concrescence (PR 25-26, 211-212) -- this completely determinate unity is not a finishing point for God, but a permanent characteristic of God. This is why God is always satisfied and therefore prehensible. However, because physical prehensions are constantly added, this divine satisfaction grows, rather than remaining constant.

If, on the other hand, we start with the idea of God as a "serial society," leaving out the phases of indeterminateness in every link (so that it would become a continuous chain of satisfactions only), it might appear that we had arrived at the same view as above. This is, however, not the case. Despite there being certain points of agreement -- and this is why Whitehead can in both cases speak of "growth" and even explicitly remarks upon their similitude as to "endurance"20 -- there are crucial differences. First of all, a chain of satisfactions concerns itself, metaphysically speaking, with satisfactions of different subjects, and as we try to place greater emphasis on the mutual identity regarding the subjects, we also emphasize the completeness of the mutual inheritance, and therefore also the priority of physical prehensions! For God’s prehension of a previous divine satisfaction should also be conceived as a physical prehension. But, with the priority of the physical pole in every divine link, the reversal of God’s polarity has disappeared, and with it the plausibility of the non-existence of phases of indeterminateness. In other words, to start from the idea of God as society and then to leave out all phases of indeterminateness, is a contradictio in terminis. If one wishes to retain the "societal view," one must also retain the non-reversed polarity of God, and therefore also the existence of phases of indeterminateness in God. Hence the societal view has two consequences. First, on this view, the conceptual pole would, for God just as for any actual entity, be secondary (and not primordial). This in turn implies that the aim of every divine concrescence must be adapted to the situation it has been given. But then, where is this aim derived from, now that God as primordial valuation is no longer in the picture to be available as an answer? Further, the second consequence of the societal view is this: according to that view, God is time and time again briefly indeterminate. This implies that God is continually briefly imprehensible. One might try to escape this by conceiving of these periods as infinitely short, but this does not principally invalidate the fact that they do have duration. The societal view therefore creates a prehensibility problem while trying to solve one.

But aren’t there intrinsic problems with the entitative view as presented here (i.e., God as one actual entity with a reversed polarity, due to which none of its phases are indeterminate) as well? For instance, (1) how can it be that new data are continually added to God during God’s concrescence, while every other actual entity is "closed" during its concrescence? And (2) doesn’t this model of growing satisfaction signal a return to a persisting substance with variable characteristics? And (3) isn’t perishing of subjective immediacy a categorial necessity for God’s efficacy too, in other words, for God’s objective immortality?

The answer to these questions, it will turn out, has in each case to do with the reversed polarity of God.

To (1): In the case of a worldly actual entity, the conceptual pole is not primordial but consequent. This means, among other things, that its subjective aim is related to its actual world. That is why the actual world of an actual entity must be "closed," if it is to have a definite aim and if there is to be any individuality. God’s aim, however, is not dependent on God’s actual world, but is primordial. This is why God’s subjective unity or individuality does not require that actual world being closed. So, the addition of new data during God’s concrescence raises no difficulties.

To (2): At first sight Whitehead’s view that God can grow, that is, change and still remain the same subject, seems to clash fundamentally with his view of inner relatedness and thereby to signal a relapse into the "substantivism" Whitehead had rejected.21 Here, too, the reversed polarity of God is of crucial importance, because God’s own aim being independent of God’s actual world implies that the concept of God’s ability to grow does not signal a return to substantivism. To explicate: The unity of a subject is constituted by its subjective aim. Now, in the case of a normal worldly subject that aim is constituted in regard to its given actual world, but for God that is not the case, as we have seen. God’s aim is derived from God’s primordial nature without any reference to a given actual world (PR 345). This cannot mean that God has a definite aim which has nothing to do with real actual entities, because then there would be no internal relatedness of God at all. Furthermore, that aim either would not be achieved by God (in which case God could not yet be prehended), or it would be, but then there would be nothing to grow. No, "God’s aim" must be an indexical, or a token reflexive term, resembling terms such as "actual world," "yesterday" or "here," in other words a term which changes in material meaning as the standpoint changes. The approach mentioned in Section B of God’s aim as "retaining all past actual entities and integrating them" satisfies this. In this way it can be understood that God’s aim remains formally the same, which guarantees the unity of the subject, but "shifts" materially, and this according to the particular relations in which God is involved. However, this does not mean that relations are accidental for God. According to Whitehead’s view, God would not be fully actual without physical prehensions, and hence without the consequent nature. In other words, despite the particular relations being accidental the relatedness as such is not, because relatedness is essential, for God too. So, there is no relapse into substantivism in Whitehead’s conception of God.

To (3): Because God’s aim can in a vastly simplified manner be presented as "retaining all past actual entities and integrating them," we can see, as is indicated in Section B, that this aim is fulfilled at every moment and that it shifts materially with the advance of the world. According to this view, God’s consequent nature can be prehended, because it is continually fully determinate, even if never complete and therefore, to be understood in a certain manner, "always in concrescence. Always in concrescence and never in the past" should be read as "always subject, never merely object." God’s becoming and God’s being a subject, therefore, have not perished with God’s being and God’s being a superject. But isn’t their perishing a metaphysical necessity, as Ivor Leclerc claimed (which formed an argument in favor of the societal view for him) and which was also asserted later by Lewis Ford?22 The answer is: No, Whitehead has no category in his metaphysics which requires "perishing" for "objective immortality." But then, what does Whitehead do say in this context? After the presentation of his categorial scheme, and before he begins the discussion which leads up to, or is explanatory of, the categories of that scheme, he states as one of his preliminary notes: "Actuality in perishing acquires objectivity [i.e., objective immortality], while it loses subjective immediacy" (PR 29). He also says: "In the organic philosophy an actual entity has ‘perished’ when it is complete" (PR 81-82; cf. 85). The only reference to perishing within his categoreal scheme is (although with the use of a different terminology): "Thus ‘becoming’ is the transformation of incoherence into coherence, and in each particular instance ceases with this attainment" (Category of Explanation xxii [PR 25], italics added). This last sentence cannot, however, refer to God, because as was explained above, the sense in which one can speak of "becoming" in God’s case is not that of "becoming" as a transformation from incoherence to coherence23 So the only two passages that remain to be analyzed are those of Process and Reality 29 and 81-82. The quotation from Process and Reality 29 can be represented by two propositions in the following manner:

[1] "If perishing then objective immortality" (for short: poi), and

[2] "If perishing then loss of subjective immediacy" (plsi).

The quotation from Process and Reality 81-82 can be represented as follows:

[3] "If the actual entity is complete then perishing" (c p).

Now, by modus tollens, it is correct to derive from [2]: "If there is no loss of subjective immediacy, then there is no perishing (-lsi -p).

But it is not correct to derive from [1]: "If there is no perishing then there is no objective immortality." For (-p -oi) cannot be derived from [1]! In the case of negation the direction of the implication is, after all, reversed.

In accordance with the propositions Whitehead gives, the retention of subjective immediacy does not imply the impossibility of objective immortality! What then is the reason for the misunderstanding? Well, in the case of a worldly actual entity satisfaction implies determinateness as well as completeness. Therefore, for those entities, satisfaction implies on account of the determinateness the beginning of objective immortality, and also, on account of the completeness the perishing of subjective immediacy (from 3) (PR 292-293).24 But God’s satisfaction is, for the above mentioned reasons, the only one that does not combine determinateness with completeness, but with incompleteness, which is why -- categorically correct -- it is only in this case that the implication of "perishing" is not applicable.

In conclusion, none of the objections which have been made here can be raised against the entitative view of God, as long as this is understood as the view that God has a reversed polar structure due to which no phase is indeterminate. This view clarifies the fact that God, also with regard to the consequent nature, is continually prehensible and so can be continually efficacious (this, quite unexpectedly, in contradistinction to the societal view), even if God’s consequent satisfaction is never complete and hence God’s subjective immediacy never perishes. The whole argument hinges on Whitehead’s perspective of God as actual entity having a primordial conceptual pole, by which the actual entity "God" -- within the confines of the proposed metaphysical model -- differs to such an extent from other actual entities that concrescence is possible for God without phases of indeterminateness, and satisfaction is possible without (temporal) completeness.

This unique aspect of God’s nature also implies that the two forms of process mentioned by Whitehead do not apply to God. The process in God cannot be conceived of as a process between occasions (which is a transition or "external supersession"), nor can it be conceived of as that type of process which occurs within an occasion as an "internal supersession" of phases of indeterminateness finishing in a final satisfaction ("concrescence" in the usual sense of the word). So, God’s process does not fit in the usual model of change, nor in the usual model of becoming.25 Whitehead preferably considers the process in God in terms of growth, which, to be sure, may be viewed as a form of internal supersession, that is, as a succession in which the previous phases are retained without loss, however in this special case as a succession of satisfaction-phases. So there is, albeit in a manner which easily leads to misunderstandings, also in Whitehead some sort of "immutability" of God, because change pertains to a nexus (e.g., a society), and God remains one actual entity. But this is an "immutability" which does not exclude temporal growth.

D. God’s Aim

In the above discussion, God’s own subjective aim has been mentioned several times, and I have mentioned its special nature, which is the result of God’s conceptual pole being primordial. It is well to pay a little more attention to the special nature of God’s aim now.

In Section C, God’s aim has been presented in simplified fashion several times as "retaining all past occasions and integrating them." Actually this is a simplified representation of only half of God’s aim, namely, that half which corresponds to the concrescence of God’s consequent nature. Besides that, however, Whitehead also calls God’s primordial nature a concrescence (which should be taken to be a concrescence without indeterminate phases as well), and with regard to this primordial concrescence Whitehead speaks of a divine aim too (PR 87-88).

Of this aim of the primordial concrescence, Whitehead says: "The concrescence [of the primordial nature of God] is directed by the subjective aim, that the subjective forms of the feelings [i.e., God’s conceptual feelings] shall be such as to constitute the eternal objects into relevant lures of feeling severally appropriate for all realizable basic conditions" (PR 88, italics added); and elsewhere: "Thus God’s purpose in the creative advance is the evocation of intensities" (PR 105). The aim of God’s primordial concrescence therefore has a strongly "superjective" aspect (see below).

About the subjective aim of God’s consequent nature Whitehead says: "His primordial nature directs such perspectives of objectification [in his consequent nature] that each novel actuality in the temporal world contributes such elements as it can to a realization in God free from inhibitions of intensity by reason of discordance" (PR 88, italics added). And in the final chapter Whitehead says of it: "The wisdom of subjective aim prehends every actuality for what it can be in such a perfected system . . . woven by rightness of feeling into the harmony of the universal feeling, which is always immediate, always many, always one, always with novel advance, moving onward and never perishing" (PR 346).26 And several lines further:

The image -- and it is but an image -- the image under which this operative growth of God’s nature is best conceived, is that of a tender care that nothing be lost. The consequent nature of God is his judgment on the world. He saves the world as it passes into the immediacy of his own life. It is the judgment of a tenderness which loses nothing that can be saved. It is also the judgment of a wisdom which uses what in the temporal world is mere wreckage. (PR 346)27

It is useful to pause here in order to consider the general structure of a subjective aim as Whitehead expounds it in his Categoreal Scheme. There he says concerning the subjective aim of a concrescence: "The subjective aim, whereby there is origination of conceptual feeling, is at intensity of feeling (a) in the immediate subject, and (ß) in the relevant future" (Cat. Obl. viii, PR 27). That "relevant future" Whitehead further explains: "The relevant future consists of those elements in the anticipated future which are felt with effective intensity by the present subject by reason of the potentiality for them to be derived from itself" (PR 27). The a-aspect and the ß-aspect can therefore, respectively, be indicated as the "immediate" and the "superjective" aspects.

The actual entity "God" seeks, like every actual entity, in accordance with this Categoreal Obligation, the maximum intensity of experience for itself and also for the future on which it anticipates its superjective influence. But in contrast to normal actual entities, God has two ways to do this. One way is to integrate all available elements as best as possible (for Godself and for the relevant future) by means of God’s everlasting concrescence (with "as best as possible" meaning "with as great an intensity of experience as possible"). This way is in correspondence to the two aspects a and ß of the subjective aim of worldly entities mentioned above. But the additional way available for God is antecedently persuading those elements themselves to become as intensive as possible. This extra primordial way is open only to God. For God is the only actual entity that has prior influence on the elements it thereafter integrates in itself. This is why the depth of satisfaction of worldly entities which God seeks through the primordial valuation, may be viewed as an intermediate stage towards the fulfillment of God’s own being: "His aim for it [i.e., an immediate occasion] is depth of satisfaction as an intermediate step towards the fulfillment of his own being" (PR 105). Because Whitehead, however, does not stop the creative advance at God’s consequent nature, but extends it to the superjective aspect of this "specific satisfaction," this "fulfillment of God’s own being" also happens to some extent for the relevant future. So God aims, according to Whitehead and in complete accord with his categoreal scheme, at a maximum intensity of experience for the world, and this in order to be able to derive from it a maximum intensity of experience for "himself," and this again thereby to contribute to the intensity of experience of the world. Here we see a clear example of the rhythmicity which can be said to be a characteristic of Whitehead’s philosophy.

E. Discussion of Three Related Proposals

Earlier I mentioned three renowned Whiteheadian scholars who are explicitly in favor of the entitative view and consider it not to imply a problem regarding God’s prehensibility. It is because of the general relevance of this problem for Whiteheadian theology that it is important to compare the above discussed proposal with its proposed interpretations.

For chronological reasons a natural starting point would be to compare my proposed interpretation with the interpretation of William Christian, published in 1959.28 My interpretation shows great similarity to Christian’s, despite having been developed independently of his. The latter can be seen in the difference between his line of argumentation and mine. As to the resemblance, this comes out manifestly on three points: (a) that God has, according to Christian, a "continuous though changing satisfaction," which is comparable to my "growing satisfaction" (IWM 409); (b) that God does not lose his subjective immediacy, and that such a perishing is not categorically obliged; and (c) that the finality of God should be seen as telos and not as end. (IWM 294-301). All these are points with which I can agree whole- heartedly. This applies less to his argumentation. His line of argumentation hinges strongly on God’s everlastingness. In my opinion, however, the line of argumentation should be the other way around. To repeat briefly: because of God’s aim (due to the reversal of poles) being independent of any concrete actual world and so being formally characterizable (in greatly simplified form) as "retaining and integrating all past occasions," this aim "shifts" with the advance of the world, that is why God’s process is everlasting. That is why also that the addition of new physical prehensions during the process does not form a problem. That is why also that God’s aim formally speaking is continually attained (God can be called "determinate"), while materially speaking its extension increases without end (hence the "incomplete"). Because of this incompleteness God’s subjective immediacy does not end, despite God’s always having a specific satisfaction, and that is why there is, only in God’s case, no perishing, With respect to all these points my argumentation rests on the reversal of poles in God (by which an aim is possible for God which is formally independent of any concrete actual world, while Christian does not use God’s reversed polar structure but uses God’s everlastingness as his main argument. But then this divine everlastingness cannot be easily accounted for. So, my interpretation in particular adds something to Christian’s by way of the grounding of argumentation.

The second author I wish to consider is Jorge Luis Nobo. In the collection of articles based on lectures in honor of Hartshorne’s ninetieth birthday, Nobo unfolds, in reaction to Lewis Ford, how in his opinion Gad is essentially immutable, imperishable and objectifiable.30 In doing this he agrees with Ford’s criticism that Hartshorne’s societal view of God does not offer an adequate Whiteheadian solution to the problem of God’s objectifiability or prehensibility, but in contrast to Ford he is of the opinion that such a Whiteheadian solution is possible, and that it is even reasonably simple. In order to show this, Nobo (conceiving God as one actual entity) uses the model of internal supersession as a starting point. To be precise, he uses the normal form of internal supersession, that is, supersession as the succession of phases within the process of concrescence in which the individual "is becoming more definite, but is not changing," and in which a previous phase does not perish for the sake of the following, but is absorbed into it without loss or alteration.

On the basis of this model, God’s immutability and everlastingness can easily be conceived, but how does Nobo account for God’s prehensibility, that is, for God’s being a superject? Well, according to Nobo, it is sufficient for any actual entity to be "any complete synthesis of all the existential data available for the creative activity of an experiencing subject" in order to be a superject (GEI 178). Therefore, every time God has synthesized the data which are available at the beginning of that stage of divine development, God is prehensible. The difference with my proposal is subtle, yet profound. Nobo makes very clear that he thinks that God recurrently has a stage of still being occupied with integrating the data which were available at the beginning of that stage.31 Apparently that process has a certain duration according to Nobo, and it can be seen, like in a normal process of concrescence, as the transition from indeterminateness to determinateness. As soon as determinateness is achieved, another new process of integration starts with respect to the available data which have arrived in the meantime, because although at that moment all the data which were available have been synthesized, in God’s case, in contrast to a normal actual entity, the subjective aim has not thereby been fully actualized.

Nobo, too, argues that God’s process continues despite achieving satisfaction. Where I say: God’s aim (that of God’s consequent nature) is achieved, and remains open, because it is an aim which continually "shifts" (and can be such because God’s aim is formally independent of any actual world whatsoever, but materially consequent on the evolving world, Nobo says: the aim of God’s primordial nature is never achieved, but the data available at the beginning of every stage are synthesized every time, and this is sufficient for prehensibility -- not the same argumentation, as can be seen, but a closely related one, indeed. Yet Nobo’s interpretation differs from my interpretation on two crucial points. First of all, no account is taken of the fact that God as an actual entity has a reversed polar structure and thereby does not have any phases of indeterminateness, while it is exactly because of that reversal of poles that God’s aim "shifts" and hence is infinite. Furthermore, Nobo is forced by the stages of indeterminateness to view the development of God’s consequent nature as a succession of recurrent new becomings of determination, instead of as a continuous succession of specific satisfactions (a growing satisfaction) as in my view. Precisely these two points of difference cause his model to have more characteristics of the societal view than he realizes and wants, and with that his model shares in the aforementioned short-comings of that view.32

Somebody who -- in marked contrast to Christian as well as Nobo -- does argue explicitly for God’s prehensibility on the basis of the reversal of God’s poles is Marjorie Hewitt Suchocki. She refers to it steadily in several publications?3 Yet, and this is at first sight surprising, her view differs from the interpretation proposed by me. Since God starts at the conceptual pole, and this conceptual pole is complete and therefore satisfied (according to Whitehead, Suchocki claims that God starts where other entities end -- at satisfaction -- and that in God’s case this satisfaction follows what in other actual entities precedes -- the concrescence (EE 139-140). So, she does not have the model of a growing divine satisfaction which "changes" in respect to its content, but she has the model of an unchanging primordial satisfaction followed by the concrescence of God’s consequent nature? "Thus the satisfaction of God lies in this conceptual a temporality; it is primordial, underlying and pervading the reality of God. This being the case, the concrescence of God cannot move toward satisfaction; it can only move from satisfaction" (EE 139).

Where in my interpretation there is a constant and growing satisfaction on God’s part, there is in her view a movement of Gad in the direction of multiplicity (despite her trying to retain the unity of God nevertheless): "If an entity originates in a reversal of poles, then it must move from one to many in an increasingly complex unity" (MGWG 246). In my opinion the phrase "to many in an increasingly complex unity" is somewhat paradoxical. This is less so in an earlier and a bit lengthier passage, in which she seems to picture the process in God as threefold (one-many-one): the "reverse entity [God] would move not from multiplicity toward a simplified though complex unity, as do the occasions, but from a complex unity toward an ever greater multiplicity. This concrescent multiplicity, in conformity with the essential unity of an actual entity, would be absorbed into the primordial unity" (MGWG 241). But here too her choice of words remains somewhat ambiguous, and difficult to combine with the "move from satisfaction" cited above. This ambiguity has to do with the fact that for Suchocki the third phase in the "one-many-one" -- if it is named at all -- does not mean a new unity; in other words, it does not refer to an altered satisfaction. For she claims explicitly that God’s satisfaction cannot alter or grow, implying that there is no difference of extension between God’s primordial satisfaction and God’s total or consequent satisfaction. Her argument for this is that since the primordial satisfaction already contains all possibilities, there simply are no new possibilities which could alter the satisfaction (MGWG 243; EE 141,142). I will discuss this view shortly. But first we must consider what purpose God’s consequent nature serves according to Suchocki. Isn’t it superfluous?

For Suchocki, God’s consequent concrescence, i.e., God’s concrescence on the basis of God’s physical prehensions, serves for expressing, manifesting, realizing, or making concrete that primordial satisfaction: "The integrating process whereby God interweaves the prehended world with his primordial satisfaction is the concretization of this satisfaction, the brilliantly moving experience of its reality" (MGWG 244-245, italics added.)35 In contrast to worldly actual entities God’s own subjective aim, in Suchocki’s opinion, does not precede God’s satisfaction, but follows on it: "this satisfaction is translated into subjective aim" (MGWG 244). Where Whitehead says in Categoreal Obligation viii, "The subjective aim, whereby there is origination of conceptual feeling, is at intensity of feeling (a) in the immediate subject, and (ß) in the relevant future" (PR 27), it appears to be Suchocki’s reasoning that in God’s case, since satisfaction is already given, the a-aspect is no longer applicable, and therefore only theft-aspect remains. Thus she describes God’s subjective aim as a "superjective aim" (MGWG 244). In this view God’s consequent nature does not contribute something to God, for God is already primordially satisfied, but makes the superjectivity of God’s primordial satisfaction possible. Therefore, God’s consequent concrescence is directed solely towards that "superjective aim." In other words, Suchocki’s reasoning goes as follows: if God’s primordial nature is to be effective for an actual situation, then a detection of that actual situation is necessary as well as a connection between God’s conceptual valuation and that particular situation. Suchocki views God consequent nature as God’s prehensions of the actual world and the connections of these prehensions with God’s primordial conceptual feelings, such that the relevance of those conceptual feelings for that concrete situation can become manifest. In this manner, God’s primordial satisfaction can achieve a concrete determination for that situation, and this is a different determination for every situation: "God’s satisfaction is primordially definite; in his process of concrescence, that definiteness simply manifests itself as a continuously moving determinateness" (MGWG 246). So in her opinion, God’s consequent nature changes the efficacy of the immutable (primordial or atemporal) satisfaction towards the world, or better yet, makes it manifest and possible. As has been said, God’s aim is at this efficacy or superjectivity, and for this the everlasting consequent concrescence which is guided by that aim is needed.

Let us, in order to come to an evaluation of this original and intriguing interpretation, put the differences between her view and Whitehead’s in sharper focus (differences which do not arise in my interpretation), keeping in mind, to be sure, that differences as such are not necessarily for the worse.

For Suchocki, God’s consequent nature serves only the superjectivity of God’s primordial satisfaction. However, within Whitehead’s conceptuality the participation of God’s consequent nature is not needed simply for God’s primordial nature to be efficacious. In this mariner, Suchocki gives God’s consequent nature a role as medium, a role which the consequent nature of God does not have in Whitehead?36

That God "begins" with a purely conceptual satisfaction is in accord with Whitehead, however, that this satisfaction is such that no supplement to it is possible, differs from Whitehead’s view. As has been said, Suchocki consistently speaks of "the primordial satisfaction" while Whitehead also refers to God’s "specific satisfaction" (PR 88), and he also speaks of the contribution of every new temporal actuality to a realization in God (PR 88, 345). According to Suchocki, a supplement to God’s primordial satisfaction would be impossible because that satisfaction already contains all possibilities.37 It is indeed the case that all eternal objects are envisaged in God’s primordial nature according to Whitehead and, by this, that all pure potentials are accounted for. However, this does not imply that there already are propositions, i.e., impure potentials, contained within it, according to Whitehead. These impure potentials are emergent (PR 188, 259). This makes supplementation to the primordial nature logically possible, and hence a specific consequent satisfaction is possible (cf. PR 88).

Whitehead introduces God’s consequent nature for a number of reasons, one of them being that this integration of God’s conceptual feelings with physical feelings makes propositions and consciousness as subjective form possible, and this makes it conceivable that God possesses consciousness. In other words, Whitehead expressly conceptualizes an integration of God’s physical feelings and God’s conceptual feelings from which an intrinsic enrichment compared with God’s primordial satisfaction ensues.38

Another point of difference is that Suchocki leaves it almost out of consideration that Whitehead views the aims which God offers to the worldly occasions as directed towards the depth of intensity of those occasions "as an intermediate step towards the fulfillment of his own being" (PR 105). So in contrast to Whitehead, Suchocki views the aim of God’s concrescence merely as superjective.39

And last but not least, Suchocki expressly states that God’s consequent nature is not prehended, while Whitehead not only claims in the last page of Process and Reality that "the perfected actuality passes back into the temporal world, and qualifies this world so that each temporal actuality includes it as an immediate fact of relevant experience" (PR 351), but also speaks in more exact language of "[t]he objective immortality of his [God’s] consequent nature" (PR 32).

Here it is useful to interrupt the exposition for a moment, in order to point out that there are many passages in Suchocki which suggest far less of a difference between her interpretation and mine (the latter being closer to Whitehead’s view, if only in wording). So the question arises: Is the difference truly that great, or is it a question of phrasing and emphasis?

Is, for example, a primordial satisfaction which manifests itself concretely in different contexts as a "moving determinateness" (MGWG 246) something other than God’s absorbing physical prehensions in God’s primordial unity? I place more emphasis on God’s growth, and Suchocki emphasizes the primordial completeness which always manifests itself differently. Yet she too says: "God’s satisfaction is a dynamic enjoyment of ever deepening intensity, always complete, and always in the process of completion" (EE 147). In other words, she too mentions fulfillment of God’s own being, albeit not as an aspect of God’s aim. And where she speaks of a moving determinateness in different contexts (cf. MGWG 246), this may be more than would appear at first sight like the emergent propositions I mentioned above.

And, though reluctantly, Suchocki too speaks of a contribution of an occasion to God:

The occasion’s value to God cannot consist only in its togetherness of eternal objects, important though this is. Such togetherness has been known and valued by God eternally in the primordial vision. Rather, the peculiar contribution 0f the occasion is its vividness of actual embodiment of just those possibilities which it selects to the exclusion of all others. Its intensity of attainment is its valuation in the immediacy of itself. This alone can be the contribution of the occasion to God, but this is everything. (EB 93)

Despite her explicit position that there are no new possibilities which can alter God’s satisfaction (MGWG 243; EE 142), she says: "The quality of God’s satisfaction does not change since it is always harmony, always adventure, zest, and peace. But the components of this satisfaction are continuously increasing, and each addition to the pattern qualifies the superjectivity of the satisfaction relative to the becoming world" (BE 145, italics added. Also, earlier in the same book, she says: "The unity of God is the integration of the primordial and consequent natures in what we will suggest is a continually dynamic satisfaction" (EE 84). These and other quotes resemble my interpretation more closely than was suggested above.

Yet it still appears to me that Suchocki does not refer to a "continuous though changing satisfaction" (Christian) or to a "growing satisfaction" as is contended in this article. The following quote may serve as an indication:

God "begins" with a definiteness which is constantly moving. The pattern of definiteness by its very nature is kaleidoscopic, manifesting one bright beauty following another, in ever self-surpassing intensity. The constancy is that the pattern always manifests the harmony of adventure, zest, peace, truth, and beauty; but what is manifesting the qualities, and how, is consequent upon God’s prehension of the world. The definiteness, however, depends upon the primordial satisfaction and is mediated through the mutuality of subjective form by which God feels every prehended occasion in light of all others and in light of the primordial vision. (EF 147, italics in the latter sentence added)

Suchocki seems to consider (here) God’s consequent nature merely as an intermediary for the efficacy of God’s primordial nature. This is in line with her explicit contention that God’s consequent nature is not, itself, prehended (WR 9) and with the fact that she bases the prehensibility of God purely on God’s primordial satisfaction.40

So, despite there being texts of Suchocki in which God’s third phase (the last "one" of the one-many-one) resembles a growing satisfaction, it appears to me that her interpretation contains a fundamentally different suggestion; namely, that there is no intrinsic enrichment of God on the basis of prehensions of the world, and that these prehensions above all play a mediating role for God’s unchanging conceptual satisfaction. However, the fact that Suchocki’s opinion is not fully lucid with regard to this point encumbers its assessment41 Yet a number of evaluative remarks can be made.

First of all, the ambiguity noted has to do with the fact that Suchocki does not make it fully clear what God’s final unity is other than God’s initial unity (and to which degree it is a unity42). In one way or another, the fact that Suchocki sees concrescence chiefly as a synthesis of eternal objects has a part in this (see, for example, MGWG 242). If it would be the case that a concrescence is merely the synthesis of eternal objects, then actual occasions, naturally, have nothing to offer to God. Then it even becomes wholly unclear what the world would be for. Even though Suchocki makes an attempt to see the contribution of an actual entity as more than the "togetherness of eternal objects" CEE 93), she gives little weight, it seems to me, to the affirmation repeatedly made by Whitehead "that the process, or the concrescence, of any one actual entity involves the other actual entities among its components" (PR 7, italics added).

Secondly, according to Suchocki, God’s consequent nature plays a necessary role in every offer of an initial aim by God (which, by the way, accords with the standard interpretation). I think, however, that this has undesirable consequences for the problem of theodicy. For, if God would give the initial aim on the basis of concrete detailed knowledge of the actual situation, knowledge the new occasion does not have by itself in such completeness, then it would be possible that "captains piloting vessels like the Titanic would be warned when icebergs invaded sealanes."43 And God would be responsible for the absence of such a warning. So we would be back to the problem of God’s responsibility for evil, which Whitehead wanted to avoid.44

Besides this, the preservation of the world in God can hardly be conceived within the scope of Suchocki’s interpretation,45 and she explicitly bars any possibility that such a preserved world could influence worldly entities: "I experience God only in terms of his primordial satisfaction, not in terms of his consequent experience, and hence not in terms of my past self as conscious in God" (WR 9). Apart from the aspect of consciousness, this sentence seems to me to contradict the difficult final paragraph of Process and Reality (PR 351). Surely, in principle there is nothing wrong with a modification of Whitehead if it can be viewed as in improvement, but I see no reason to evaluate this as such, because Whitehead’s own (implicit) conception seems to me very rich in possibilities when it comes to the interpretation of theological issues like "conscience" and "grace," for example.46

Finally this: this essay deals with the problem of the prehensibility of God’s consequent nature. With respect to that it must after all be said that Suchocki’s writings do not so much solve this problem, but rather do not address it. For in her interpretation, God’s consequent nature is not prehended. Because of this, her interpretation falls in a certain sense outside the scope of this article. That, in itself, is no problem. But giving no place to the notion of prehending God’s consequent nature means, I think, leaving unused good opportunities offered by Whitehead’s system, not only for understanding the personal experiences mentioned above, but also expressly for the understanding of certain crucial experiences which transcend personality.47

F. Conclusion

In this essay, I hope to have shown that the entitative view, when combined with the reversed polarity of God, does not run into difficulties concerning the prehensibility of God’s consequent nature.

The entitative interpretation of God’s prehensibility as I have presented it in this essay, however, differs from the entitative interpretations of Jorge Nobo and of Marjorie Suchocki, and does not lead to the complications their readings, to a lesser or greater extent, entail. The difference with the interpretation of William Christian is much less fundamental, and lies mainly in the manner of argumentation. Where his argumentation is based on God’s everlastingness, which however -- in the absence of the reversal of poles as an argument -- remains ill-founded, my argumentation is based on the reversal of God’s poles, which is well-founded in Whitehead’s metaphysics.

The emphasis on the polar reversal is essential to my interpretation. This emphasis it shares with Suchocki’s, while it is hardly present in Nobo and Christian.

In contrast to Suchocki, however, I conclude from the reversal of poles, that Gad is always in concrescence and always in satisfaction not only primordially, but also consequentially, and so is always becoming and always being, always subject and always superject. This resembles Christian’s view of God’s "continuous though changing satisfaction," but differs from the views of Nobo and Suchocki. For Nobo, God isn’t always in satisfaction and Suchocki accounts only for the primordial satisfaction.

My interpretation, though developed independently, may be seen as a reassertion of Christian’s proposal, partly though a stronger argumentation based on the reversal of poles, and mainly by a refutation of the objection made by Leclerc and Ford. Their objection to Christian’s view is that for prehensibility (or objective immortality) of God, the perishing of God’s subjective immediacy is required. I think I have shown that this objection fails because of the reversal of poles. For the reversal of poles entails that satisfaction for God doesn’t mean determinateness and completeness, but determinateness and incompleteness. Because of this incompleteness the requirement of perishing is dropped. So, God as fully actual, is always in concrescence and always in satisfaction, and therefore always prehensible.

In this way, I think, it has been shown with some force that Whitehead’s view of God as one always concrescing actual entity does not pose any difficulties for the prehensibility of God, provided we take account of the unique nature of that one actual entity "God." And thereby that the conception of God as one actual entity offers the possibility (and more so than the societal view) to conceive of God as efficacious with regard to worldly entities, even with respect to the consequent nature. This offers attractive perspectives for a theological reflection on God’s involvement in the world.

 

References

IWM William A. Christian, An Interpretation of Whitehead’s Metaphysics, New Haven, CN: Yale University Press. 1959.

GEI Jorge Luis Nobo, "God as Essentially Immutable, Imperishable and Objectifiable: A Response to Ford," Hartshorne: Process Philosophy, and Theology, edited by Robert Kane and Steven Phillips, Albany NY: State University of New York Press (1989), 175-180.

SCW A.H. Johnson, "Some Conversations with Whitehead Concerning God and Creativity," Explorations in Whitehead’s Philosophy, edited by Lewis S. Ford and George L. Kline, New York: Fordham, University Press (1983), 3-13.

RWT Palmyre M.F. Oomen, De relevantie van Whitehead voor een theologie van Gods werkzaamheid (The Relevance of Whitehead for Theology of God’s Efficacy: working title), Ph.D. Dissertation, University of Nijmegen, forthcoming in 1998.

MGWG Marjorie Suchocki, "The Metaphysical Ground of the Whiteheadian God ," Process Studies 5 (1975), 237-246.

WR Marjorie Suchocki and Lewis S. Ford, "A Whiteheadian Reflection on Subjective Immortality," Process Studies 7(1977), 1-13.

EE Marjorie Suchocki, The End of Evil Process Eschatology in Historical Context, Albany. NY: State University of New York Press, 1998.

 

Notes

1This essay is taken from a section of my dissertation on "The Relevance of Whitehead for a Theology of God’s Efficacy" (forthcoming in book form, henceforth cited as RWT).

2Whitehead uses the adjective "temporal" to indicate actual entities in the world. But because he acknowledges a temporal aspect to God as well, this adjective is, properly considered, not distinguishing enough. That is why I prefer the adjective "worldly" to indicate actual occasions. "Worldly" here thus means "in the world."

3DenisHurtubise has argued in the preceding essay of this issue of Process Studies that until now there is no solution for the question of the prehensibility of God’s consequent nature. Let me propose however a way in which this question probably can be resolved.

4The question whether this is the case for God, and its negative answer, will be the subject of the following section.

5Such an undialectical demarcation, however, does not completely do justice to Whitehead’s view.

6According to the report of A.H. Johnson, "Some Conversations with Whitehead Concerning God and Creativity." 10 (henceforth cited as SCW).

7John Cobb’s primary concern in choosing this view was the prehensibility of God’s consequent nature. For conceiving God as an actual entity would imply, according to him, that God has not yet reached satisfaction, and therefore could not be efficacious towards world occasions (A Christian Natural Theology Philadelphia, PA: Westminster, 1965], 188; henceforth cited as CNT). Besides that, it would imply that God has not yet reached satisfaction, and therefore eternally strives for an unattainable aim. This is foolish, as well as being in contradiction with Whitehead’s speaking of God’s satisfaction, according to Cobb. He considers all these problems solved by the "societal view" (in which he, in contrast to Hartshorne, retains eternal objects, as well as God’s satisfaction which is passed on in every new divine entity).

Hartshorne has another motivation for seeing God as a society. Initially he thought that -- he was simply explicating what Whitehead should have said or perhaps even wanted to say (The Divine Relativity: A Social Conception of God [New Haven, CN: Yale University Press {1948; 1974}], 30-31; Charles Hartshorne and William Reese, Philosophers Speak of God [Chicago, IL: University of Chicago Press, 1953; 1965], 274; henceforth cited as PSG). His main argument is that the prehension (by God) of the "many" must, in God’s case also, lead to an "increased by one" and, therefore, to a new entity ("Whitehead’s Novel Intuition," Alfred North Whitehead Essays on his Philosophy, edited by George Kline [Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall, 1963], 18-26, at 23). But in the case of these transitions in God "there is no lapse of memory, no loss of immediacy, as to occasions already achieved," says Hartshorne. He points this out as a difference between the sequence of God’s occasions and normal linear sequences (PSG 274).

For Leclerc, however, the loss of immediacy (which is always present in the case of a normal serial society) forms the main argument for conceiving God as a society, because Leclerc considers "perishing" to be metaphysically required for every prehensibility, including God’s (Review of William Christian, An Interpretation of Whitehead’s Meta physics, Journal of Philosophy 57 [1960], 138-143; henceforth cited as RWC). These arguments will be reviewed in the text in Section C

8Johnson recounts his conversation with Whitehead in the following manner

JOHNSON: "Can you think of God (as consequent) as a ‘society’?" Whitehead replied that he had considered the possibility, since a society is what endures, and an actual entity passes away. But, WHITEHEAD: "The answer is no." In a society the past is lost. One ordinary actual entity fades away and only some of its data are passed onto another actual entity. But in God, his past is not lost" (SCW 9).

9William Christian, An Interpretation of Whitehead’s Metaphysics, especially 294-301 (henceforth cited as IWM); Lewis Ford, "Boethius and Whitehead on Time and Eternity," International Philosophical Quarterly (1968), 38-67 (henceforth cited as BW); Lewis S. Ford, "Is Process Theism Compatible with Relativity Theory?" Journal of Religion 48 (1%8), 124-135; Marjorie Suchocki," The Metaphysical Ground of the Whiteheadian God"(henceforth cited as MGWG); Marjorie Suchocki, The End of Evil: Process Eschatology in Historical Context, especially 135-155 (henceforth cited as EE); Jorge Luis Nobo, "God as Essentially Immutable, Imperishable, and Objectifiable: A Response to Ford" (henceforth cited as GEL).

10See the quotations of Lewis Ford in note 16.

11See Lewis S. Ford, "The Non-temporality of Whitehead’s God," International Philosophical Quarterly 8 (1973), 347-376, at 370 (henceforth cited as NTWG 370); and, for example, Lewis S. Ford, "Contrasting Conceptions of Creation," Review of Metaphysics 45 (1991), 89-109, and "The Divine Activity of the Future," Process Studies 11(1981), 169-179; and "Contrasting Conceptions of Creation," Review of Metaphysics 45 (1991), 89-109.

12See note 17.

13See Section C for direct argumentation.

14This is in contrast to what is expressed in the passage: "[The] doctrine, that the final satisfaction" of an actual entity is intolerant of any addition, expresses the fact that every actual entity -- since it is what it is -- is finally its own reason for what it omits" (PR 45), which, considering the context, clearly seems to refer to "actual occasions.

15See Section C for further argumentation, and Section D for a more comprehensive treatment of God’s aim.

16Lewis Ford, too, once attempted such a solution, but arrives at a completely different conclusion. He writes:

That is not to say, however, that God never attains satisfaction. Satisfaction means the complete unity and integration of all available prehensions. Now God achieves unity of feeling by conceptual supplementation exclusively, not by physical elimination. Since these supplementary pure conceptual feelings only acquire temporality through their integration with physical feelings, no time elapses between the simple [divine] physical feeling of a particular actual occasion and its integration within the divine satisfaction. Each occasion prehended is instantaneously absorbed into this conceptual unity, and thus there is no time at which God’s feelings are unintegrated. Thus the divine experience is completely satisfied at all times and in all places. But this divine satisfaction cannot take place all at once, at a single time, whether momentarily or instantaneously. In order to include every temporal occasion as it comes into being, the divine satisfaction must be everlasting. (NTWG 370)

Ford, however, continues as follows: "Precisely because it is everlasting and never perishes, it is never completely determinate. Thus God, insofar as he is temporal, is never completely actual, and hence [never] prehendable. His temporal becoming never yields to being" (NTWG 370). In accord to the main text this is, in my opinion, an incorrect conclusion based on a basically correct analysis. Ford’s conclusion is based on the absence of perishing in God’s case. See the main text, Section C, for why this argument is not conclusive.

Ford also has expressed recently the same conclusion "[O]nly when all subjectivity has perished in the attainment of objective being can any feeling be prehended. For hybrid prehension to work, therefore, the conceptual feeling it objectifies must belong to the satisfaction. Yet the divine everlasting concrescence never reaches satisfaction in the sense that it attains a final unified being which precludes any further becoming" ("God at Work: The Way God is Effective in a Process Perspective,"Encounte, 57 [19%], 327-340). Here too the satisfaction of God, if understood in a certain manner, is not precluded, but nevertheless Ford concludes imprehensibility, again argued through the absence of perishing of subjectivity in God’s case.

17The often quoted "always in concrescence" comes from the following passage:

The non-temporal act of all-inclusive unfettered valuation is at once a creature of creativity and a condition of creativity. It shares this double character with all creatures. By reason of its character as a creature, always in concrescence and never m the past, it receives a reaction from the world; this reaction is its consequent nature. It is here termed "God"; because the contemplation of our natures, as enjoying real feelings derived from the timeless source of all order, acquires that "subjective form" of refreshment and companionship at which religions aim" (PR 31-32).

(note 17 continued)

The "always in concrescence in this passage probably does refer to God’s consequent nature in the text -- and that would be the one time that Whitehead speaks in this fashion of God’s consequent nature, but linguistically speaking it refers to "The non-temporal act of all-inclusive unfettered valuation [i.e., God’s primordial nature]" in this passage. This passage is somewhat contorted anyway, because the sentence "By reason... consequent nature" does not fit well with either the previous sentence or the one after it.

Also worthy of note is that in the exposition in Process and Reality 87-88 of God’s threefold nature Whitehead speaks of concrescence with regard to God’s primordial nature but not with regard to God’s consequent nature.

18 In the report of Johnson’s conversations with Whitehead in 1936 which have already been mentioned, Johnson asks Whitehead: "You refer to the everlasting nature of God, which is, in a sense, non-temporal, and in another sense temporal... In what sense is God temporal’?" He recounts Whitehead’s opinion in the following manner: "Whitehead replied that by ‘temporal’ he here means ‘[exhibiting] growth,’ not coming to be and passing away. He stated that God grows, and thus in a sense is historical. God is everywhere (in time). God is not historical in the sense of having a definite ‘whereness’ or existing as a merely ‘present’ being who fades" (SCW 7).

19 The same argumentation can be found in the following quotation from Lewis Ford which was also used in note 16:

Satisfaction means the complete unity and integration of all available prehensions. Now God achieves unity of feeling by conceptual supplementation exclusively, not by physical elimination. Since these supplementary pure conceptual feelings only acquire temporality through their integration with physical feelings, no time elapses between the simple physical feeling of a particular actual occasion and its integration within the divine satisfaction. Each occasion prehended is instantaneously absorbed into this conceptual unity, and thus them is no time at which God’s free1ings are unintegrated" NTWG 370, italics added.)

20See Johnson, SCW 9, cited in note 8.

21See, for example, the complaint of Griffin in this direction, in his review of Marjorie Suchocki, The End of Evil, Process Studies 18 (1989), 57-62.

225ee Leclerc, RWG 141-143. While Lewis Ford initially posits, with the aid of the same passage from William Christian (LWM 298), that Whitehead’s categorial scheme doesn’t require perishing for objectification, but only "something determinate" in God (BW 64-65), later he, too, says exactly the opposite (without further explanation): "Yet a concrescence that never perishes cannot be objectified and hence cannot prehended. How would God then influence the world temporally?" ("Temporality and Transcendence," Hartshorne, Process Philosophy, and Theology, edited by Robert Kane and Steven Phillips, Albany, NY: State University of New York Press [1989], 151-167, at 155). He says something similar in the quotations given in note 16.

23William Christian, however, does consider this passage in his deliberations, because he does not account for the fact that the becoming being discussed (and therefore also the ceasing of that becoming) cannot be applied to God (to the contrary, he says explicitly: "Thus ‘becoming’ applies to God and to actual occasions"). He gives two alternative interpretations, both of which would be consistent with Whitehead’s conception of God, though I as yet find un-convincing (IWM 298).

24This text reads: "But with the attainment of the ‘satisfaction,’ the immediacy of final causation is lost, and the [actual] occasion passes into its objective immortality, in virtue of which efficient causation is constituted." Note that this remark is about occasions, so not about God.

25See for those two forms of process, PR 214.

26 I have presented this "universal feeling" in the above as "growing satisfaction."

27Noteworthy is that different authors seem only to speak of the aim 0f God’s primordial concrescence, that is to say of God’s aim qua its superjective aspect, when they consider God’s aim. See, for example, Christian ("God aims not at some finite objective but at the realization of all possibilities whatever" [LWM 297Th Ford ("Whitehead’s Conception of Divine Spatiality, Southern Journal of Philosophy 6[1968], 10, and BW 66); and Nobo (GEI 179). Suchocki does remark upon the duality of God’s aim ("the aim in its direction toward the world, and. a return movement, from the world to God" [MGWG 243-244]), but she considers the aim of God’s consequent concrescence as nothing but superjective: "This double movement of process, with its essential unity, provides the relevance of primordial envisagement for the world’s individual occasions" (MGWG 244), more on this in Section E.

28The useful and much appreciated An Interpretation of Whitehead’s Metaphysics (LWM).

29Though it is also the case that Christian says that God is everlasting due to the fundamental difference between God and worldly occasions with regard to polarity ("From this fundamental difference between God and actual occasions. [I]t follows also that God is everlasting"), this point is very weakly argued. The only reason he gives is: "He [God] does not perish, as all other actual entities do. For primordial means ‘not before all creation, but with all creation’ (PR 521)" (LWM 288). However, the passage Christian quotes refers, in Whitehead’s text, explicitly to God’s primordial nature, which according to Whitehead is precisely not "everlasting" but "eternal" in the sense of atemporal (PR 345).

30Nobo, GEI.

31As is evinced by the following quotations from Nobo: "Moreover, each completed stage in the supersessional development of God’s consequent nature is causally objectifiable because it constitutes a complete physical synthesis produced by the consequent creative activity out of all the attained actualities already in existence relative to the beginning of that stage of the divine development (PR 523-524)"; its continuation: "In this account, the primordial nature and each already completed stage of the consequent nature represent each a specific, or relative, satisfaction of the divine concrescence. They represent God as fully made, or fully determinate, in respect to any set of determinate existents objectively available for his experience -- any set, that is, other than the set he is currently prehending into the fullness of his experience." and: "Given the proposed definition of "superject," however, the everlastingness of God’s subjectivity is no impediment to the superjective functioning of those aspects of God in which he constitutes the complete synthesis of all available determinate beings -- excepting those determinate beings currently synthesized into the fullness of God’s next specific satisfaction" (GEI 179, italics added).

32See Section C.

33Suchocki, MGWG, EE, and "Evil, Eschatology, and God: Response to David Griffin," Process Studies 18 (1989), 63-69 (henceforth cited as EEG); and Suchocki and Lewis S. Ford, "A Whiteheadian Reflection on Subjective Immortality" (henceforth cited as WR).

34 Suchocki, therefore, also speaks only of the "primordial satisfaction." Only once, as far I know, does she use the term "consequent satisfaction," and it is probably not a coincidence that this is in an article she co-authored (WR 11).

35For examples of other texts which contain the terms expression, manifestation, realization, and concretization, see Suchocki, MGWG 245, 246; EE 139, 140; EEG 65.

36Many process thinkers attribute this intermediary role to God’s consequent nature, because otherwise, in their opinion, no envisagement and/or no provision of specific initial aims would be possible (e.g., Christian, IWM 306-308; John Lansing, "The ‘Natures’ of Whitehead’s God," Process Studio 3 [1973), 143-152, at 147-148; Suchocki, MGWG 243-245; Lewis S. Ford, "When Did Whitehead Conceive God to be Personal?" Anglican Theological Review 72 [1990], 280-291, at 289-291. Cobb denies the first argument but accepts the second (CNT 155-156, 184). I deviate from the standard opinion, and in my dissertation I defend not only the possibility but also the desirability of Whitehead’s implicit conception that a (not completely) specific initial aim can be envisaged and can be provided by God’s primordial nature without the help of God’s consequent nature (RWT).

37Suchocki explicitly says: "In this case the satisfaction of God can be a component of his concrescent nature without requiring any deviation from the satisfaction or consequent change in its essential character. There simply are no new possibilities which could alter the satisfaction" (MGWG 243, italics added; reiterated in EE 142).

38Whitehead explicitly speaks of God’s consequent nature as a process of completion: "God is to be conceived as originated by conceptual experience with his process of completion motivated by consequent, physical experience, initially derived from the temporal world" (PR 345); and in the same vein: "In this way God is completed by the individual, fluent satisfactions of finite fact…" (PR 347).

39See what has been mentioned earlier in Section D and note 27.

40"[T]he definiteness that is required for the world’s prehension of God is provided by the primordial satisfaction" (EEG 65).

41This ambiguity is also revealed by the following remark, "In my words, they [i.e, God’s physical feelings woven into the harmony] bring the primordial vision to expression," which she continues without further explanation, "These feelings are then hardly accidental to God, but are-in fact such that without them, God could not exist" (EEG 65).

42 In Suchocki’s view, God’s final unity is evidently not a unity to such a degree that it provides a basis for the prehensibility of the consequent nature. See quote in note 40.

43Donald Sherburne, "Decentering Whitehead," Process Studies 15 (1986), 83-94, at 89. Only John Cobb has recently paid attention to this problem of theodicy connected (although in his view not necessarily so) with the provision of the initial aim by God’s primordial and consequent natures together (Cobb, "Sherburne on Providence," Process Studies 23 [1994], 25-29).

44As this is outside the scope of this article, the following very short exposition will have to suffice. In Whitehead’s conceptuality this problem of theodicy seems to be avoided by the fact that it is God’s primordial nature only that provides the initial aim. This implies that the "basic conditions" for which the initial aim indicates the best possibility of synthesis are themselves involved only as imagined, and so with "abruptness" and not with the complete concreteness of their real essences (SMW 170-171). Therefore, the initial aim hasn’t such a situational specificity as to raise the problem of theodicy. Moreover, the initial aim indicates the possibility of synthesis which gives a maximum intensity of experience for the immediate subject itself (and its anticipated future), and not the best for some "whole."

But isn’t the problem still at play in (the interpretation proposed here of) Whitehead through the efficacy of God’s consequent nature, which appears to be implied by the prehensibility of God’s consequent nature? For two reasons I don’t think that this is the case. First, even though God’s consequent nature is such as to be prehensible (that is what this article is about), the nature of by far the most worldly occasions is such that their prehension of God’s consequent nature is negligible, because they miss the complexity required for that. Moreover, even with respect to those highly complex organisms (like human beings) which can, now and again, catch a glimpse 0f God’s consequent nature, the problem of theodicy doesn’t return. For, even if we suppose that the prehension of God consequent nature also includes an aspect of "paranormal" transmission of information (which I hold was not the idea Whitehead had in mind, however), would God then be to blame when this information is not received? I don’t think so, because it would be a shortcoming on the part of the receiver rather than on the side of God, whereas God would indeed be to blame if the information were to play a role in God’s selection of the initial aim, like the standard interpretation has it.

45This observation, of course, appears to be incongruous with her exposition with regard to "subjective immortality" of the entities which have been received in God’s consequent nature. Cf. Ford and Suchocki, WR.

46To elucidate: Whitehead’s concept of God’s consequent nature as preserved and transformed World makes it conceivable that a human being by prehending that consequent nature -- when it happens -- "sees" hi5 or her own previous history, unified and trans. formed after God’s wisdom (PR 347, 351). This implies a number of things. First of all that in this way the experience of one’s own personal identity can be accounted for more completely (PR 107, note 17). But also, that prehending God’s consequent nature conceptually resembles looking in a mirror, only a mirror in which you see yourself at your best (cf. Religion in the Making [1926]. New York, Fordham University Press [1996], 155), and by which you are allured to become in fact as beautiful as you see yourself there. Theologically, the concept of "conscience" suggests itself here, though Whitehead doesn’t explicitly mention this. He does speak of "inner judge" (who can take the shape of "goddess of mischief" and of "redeemer") (PR 351). Whitehead emphasizes in this context in Process and Reality also the aspect of love: it is, as it were, seeing yourself back through the eyes of someone who loves you, and with that a knowing yourself accepted. This makes theological notions, not only of conscience and judgment, but also for example of "grace" or "forgiveness which sets free" conceivable in terms of Whitehead’s philosophy.

47 Here we can mention some of the things Whitehead brings up in his treatment of Peace: the sensitiveness to tragedy as disclosure of an ideal (Adventures of Ideas. New York, Free Press [1933] (1967), 286); the intuition of lasting importance ("Immortality, in The Philosophy of Alfred North Whitehead," edited by P.A. Schilpp. Library of Living Philosophers (La Salle, IL: Open Court, 1951], 698); the awareness of self-transcending interest (AI 285). Moreover, Whitehead’s concept gives the opportunity to understand the tension between the "self" [constituted by the aim provided by God’s primordial nature] and "self forgetfulness" [brought on by prehension of God’s consequent nature, that is, by "the immanence of the Great Fact"] (AI 295-296). Whitehead even connects the concept of truth to God’s consequent nature (PR 12-13). These points may serve as an indication of what can be at issue when the prehending 0f God’s consequent nature is not taken into account.

By the way, within Whitehead’s metaphysics the prehending of God’s consequent nature can be conceived of as an experience of God as well as -- entirely secular -- as an experience of the World in its unity and everlastingness. Hence, the experiences which can be interpreted with the aid of the concept of prehending God’s consequent nature certainly need not be construed religiously, as is obvious from Whitehead’s writings after Process and Reality (though that construal suggests itself with more force in the experience of being loved mentioned in the foregoing note). This might offer interesting possibilities to a theology that seeks intelligibility in a secularized context.

The Pacifism Debate in the Hartshorne — Brightman Correspondence

I. Introduction

The most substantive portion of the Brightman-Hartshorne correspondence took place from November 1933 through the summer of 1944.1 The major events in Europe and Asia during this time are well known, including the rise of Nazi Germany and the expansion of the Japanese Empire, culminating in World War II. Since Hartshorne and Brightman are intentional about relating their philosophies to the concrete issues of our human existence in the world, it is not surprising that at some point in their correspondence they would discuss some of the issues of the war and the United States’ involvement in it. The bulk of their discussion concerning the war centers around the issue of pacifism, with Brightman defending the pacifist position against Hartshorne, who sees doctrinaire pacifism as an irresponsible approach, especially given the aggressive actions of Germany and Japan in the 1930s and early 1940s.

I will highlight the main points of Brightman’s and Hartshorne’s disagreement in the correspondence about pacifism, and follow this with a discussion of the philosophical bases of their positions as these are found in the correspondence and some of their published works. I will then point out what I see to be the strengths and weaknesses of both their positions. I conclude by pointing to the thought of Martin Luther King, Jr., who in many ways incorporates the strengths of both these positions while, for the most part, leaving the weaknesses behind.

II. The Disagreement in the Correspondence

The pacifism debate in the correspondence was triggered by a short remark by Brightman in a critical review he wrote on Hartshorne’s 1941 book, Man’s Vision of God, in which Brightman criticizes Hartshorne’s stance against pacifism (MVG-R 96-99). Before noting this remark, let us first summarize Hartshorne’s anti-pacifism argument as it is found in Man’s Vision of God (MVG 167-173). Here Hartshorne criticizes doctrinaire pacifism for its lack of social awareness. Hartshorne writes: "there is evidence enough that dogmatic pacifism is often the expression of a preference for a certain enjoyable sentiment as against facing the tragedy of existence, which even God does not escape, and which we all must share together" (MVG 168). Hartshorne stresses that love is not to be equated with sentimental humanism (MVG 165), rather it is an effort to act on an adequate awareness of others, and this awareness may lead one to use force in order to coerce those who are oppressing others (MVG 168). Hartshorne understands love to be "social realism" which recognizes the necessity at times of using "coercion to prevent the use of coercion to destroy freedom" (MVG 168,173). To stress this point against the pacifist approach, Hartshorne writes, "Freedom must not be free to destroy freedom. The logic of love is not the logic of pacifism or of the unheroic life" (MVG 173).

Hartshorne is convinced that although war is an evil, it is not an evil to be avoided at all costs. With Germany and Hitler in mind, he writes that "it is better that many should die prematurely than that nearly all men should live in a permanent state of hostility or slavery" (MVG 173). Adequate social awareness, which in Hartshorne’s view is the primary factor in love, will not allow those who are unsocial to gain a monopoly on the use of coercion, and therefore it is appropriate at times to go to war in an attempt to avoid such a monopoly and its tragic effects on humankind. That love must sometimes choose the use of violent force is, according to Hartshorne, an avoidable part of the tragic aspects of our existence in a world where human sin is a stark reality. He maintains that "to decide to shorten a man’s life (we all die) is not ipso facto to lack sympathy with his life as it really is, that is, to lack love for him. It may be to love not him less but someone else more" (MVG 168). Thus, for Hartshorne, killing other persons may at times be the lesser of two or more evils.

The basis of Hartshorne’s case against pacifism is that the consequences of absolute pacifism are often worse than the consequences of forceful intervention (based on adequate social awareness -- which includes awareness of human sin and the precarious balance of power in world relations). Given this emphasis on consequences in his discussion of pacifism, Hartshorne may have been surprised by the remark in Brightman’s review which criticizes Hartshorne’s rejection of the pacifist approach. In the review Brightman writes, "Perhaps the worst effect of a priori thinking in the book is the rejection of pacifism on grounds derived from the abstract nature of social awareness (MVG 166-168), without concrete consideration of actual long-run consequences" (MVG-R 98). The words to emphasize in Brightman’s remark are "long-run consequences. Although short-term consequences may favor the use of violence or war, Brightman does not believe that Hartshorne has taken into consideration adequately the long-term consequences of a consistently pacifist approach. Hartshorne begs to differ, and the debate on pacifism in the correspondence begins.

Hartshorne responds to Brightman’s review in a letter written on January 22, 1942, less than two months after the United States’ official entry into World War II. In specific response to Brightman’s remark about pacifism, Hartshorne writes the following:

As to pacifism, I thought I pointed to the concrete consequences of pacifism. Do we differ there as to the conclusion? If so, in the Conference on Science, Religion, and Philosophy you will find my empirical discussion.

I was primarily trying to combat the a priori argument for pacifism, in the book. I never yet met a pacifist with much interest, as distinct from profession of interest, in the consequences, short or long, of his doctrine. I mean this and I know 0f no exception. I am plenty interested in the empirical aspects of this issue I assure you. (BHC January 22, 1942)2

Brightman responds as follows:

If all you were trying to do in the book was to combat the a priori argument for pacifism, I am with you. The only valid argument is, I think, empirical. But when you write the following sentence, I am astounded: "I never yet met a pacifist with much interest, as distinct from profession of interest, in the consequences, short or long, of his doctrine. I mean this and I know 0f no exception." It happened that your statement came tome about the same time as the copy of Fellowship with Nels Ferré’s article in it, pleading for pacifism precisely on the basis of consequences. All the Quakers I know base their action and their faith largely on the successful consequences of peaceful behavior. Although not an absolutist, I call myself a pacifist, and argue solely from concern about consequences. The failure of the last war, the terrible revenge that the defeated country has taken, has seemed to me good evidence of the failure of victory in war to secure desired consequences. At present there is less hope for victory and less desire for decent consequences than in the other war. If you are going to say that any pacifist who professes interest in the consequences of the method of love has profession but not interest, I do not see what you are basing that on. I know dozens 0f pacifists who are far more concerned about the consequences 0f their views and 0f this war than are most supporters 0f the war. As for your statement, I deny the allegation and defy the alligator in so far as it is proper for a pacifist to assume such attitudes. (BHC September 18, 1942)3

Brightman’s remarks sparked a lengthy reply from Hartshorne in his next letter, written only five days later on September 23, 1942. In response to Brightman’s astonishment at Hartshorne’s claim that he never met a pacifist who had much interest in consequences, Hartshorne makes the following clarification:

Of course my sentence about pacifists not being much interested in consequences is at best elliptical. All of us have a tendency to make facts and real probabilities fit our views (or get out of our sight) rather than to make the views adjust to the facts and the knowable probabilities. Now my impression has decidedly been that pacifists do this even worse and much worse than other people, especially other people who are articulate and educated. (BHC September 23, 1942)

Hartshorne picks up on Brightman’s comment on Ferré’s "Christianity and Compromise," and illustrates how even Ferré tends to overlook the consequences of the pacifist approach, and as a result fails to make his argument on an empirical basis. Hartshorne writes:

I have read Ferré’s article, also a long letter on the subject, and also talked with him. Interest in concrete knowable realities seems to me in the background even with him. He says, for example that the only way for Europe to get along is to have the German people united and strong. Yet every known fact about Europe and the Prussian tradition and many other aspects of the matter, including the elementary geographical facts, imply that such an arrangement would mean that only by a lucky miracle could the other peoples in Europe get their minimal rights, unless the other peoples had first been made strong in independence of German influence. Germans have every military advantage, and this one-sidedness is the great problem, made much worse by many facts about Europe’s traditions and structure. (BHC September 23, 1942)

After criticizing Ferré, Hartshorne turns to a criticism of Brightman’s remarks about the consequences of the present war and the results of World War I:

To call the last war a failure has to mean, for your argument, that a German victory might have been as well or better, unless you think we might somehow have gambled for a draw.... Now I see no good reason to think that a victorious Germany would have done less harm than a defeated one has done. On the contrary. We might now have not even a choke but to give into the Germans. But further. The results of the last war were not fatalistically determined by the war itself, or there is no freedom. Winning gives an opportunity, but opportunities are not guarantees. Now why was the opportunity not better used (it was not wholly wasted, in my view, far from it)? Well are pacifists honestly surveying the mass of evidence for the conclusion that, as one of the best German students of the problem, a very religious man, has said, the greatest help of all to Hitler in his catastrophic career was given by "international pacifism" (E. Heiman[n]). This seems to me a plain fact. Hitler need not have been successful in his villainous plans, had enough people believed in the wisdom of stopping him by force. Surely the failure to stop him had something to do with the widely diffused notion that fighting never accomplishes anything. Thus this very belief that fighting is useless is one of the chief reasons why the fighting of the last war was not more useful. A wise discriminating use of force is one thing, a panicky resort to force at the last gasp, followed again by a wave of vague pacifism, is another. I shall fight this vicious cycle all my life. (BHG September 23, 1942)

Hartshorne goes on in the letter to argue that pacifism actually makes war worse when it comes because it weakens the wrong side, allowing those less hesitant about using force to get the upper hand.

In response to Brightman’s criticism of Hartshorne’s rejection of pacifism as an example of a priori thinking which fails to consider the long-range consequences of pacifism, Hartshorne counters with the following:

Is the argument a priori? Absolute pacifism must be a priori, like all absolutes. Relative pacifism can appeal to contingent facts. However, in evaluating a principle of action rather than a description 0f facts there is in a sense necessarily an a priori element. That is, one must ask what the principle implies, should it be adopted, and this adoption is largely a possibility not a fact. In short, ideal experiment comes in to show what would happen. Still, that is not a priori in the strict sense. My argument was, that if all good men ad6pt the principle, or all wise men, that they will never use force then force will be left as the monopoly of any men not good enough or wise enough to abstain from it. That there will be such seems sure enough on an empirical basis, and it follows almost a priori from the notion that there is at least some plausible case for fighting, and this again follows pretty certainly from the fact that most [good and wise] men believe there is. (BHC September 23, 1942)4

Hartshorne goes on later in the letter to focus on Brightman’s remarks about the unlikelihood of desired consequences coming from the fighting or even from the winning of World War II. Hartshorne points out the differences between the consequences coming from victory or defeat, and he stresses the desirability of an Allied victory. He writes:

In any case, the primary consequences to be considered are those likely to follow from an Axis victory compared to those likely to follow from an Axis defeat... You say there is even less chance of a good outcome if we win than last time. I see many facts on the other side, but anyway that’s not the question, which is, is not the danger from defeat much greater than the danger from victory? This is not purely a question 0f your values or mine, there is a democratic principle involved. The United Nations are certainly much closer to being representative of mankind than the Axis, by any standard almost you choose, including the numerical. (BHC September 23, 1942)

Hartshorne concludes that pacifists are representing the interests of a minority in the world if they argue that the consequences of an Axis victory would not be worse than those of an Axis defeat.

In a handwritten addition at end of the letter, Hartshorne points to what he sees as one of the most devastating effects of the pacifists’ lack of social awareness and disregard for consequences. He writes in closing:

I add one thing out of unpleasant sense of duty, perhaps perverted. The more you argue that there is nothing to fight for now and little hope of victory the more you in effect fight on Hitler’s side. He’d pay you to do it, and wisely.

Sorry we have to argue this awful business. (BHC September 23,1942)

The debate on pacifism ends in Brightman’s next letter to Hartshorne, dated September 25, 1942, only two days after Hartshorne’s letter. Either there is an error regarding the date, or the United States’ postal service was much faster than it is today. At any rate, at the end of the letter, Brightman gives what proves to be the last word on pacifism in the correspondence. He writes:

I believe that Russia was right in calling on the League of Nations to keep the pledge of Versailles for a general disarmament. If England, France, Germany (Weimar), and America had kept the treaty, this war would have been averted. Nations pledged themselves to a pacifist policy and broke the pledge. The number of sincere and intelligent individual pacifists is very small. I believe that it is their important function to work now and in the peace for a reconciliation of humanity, to which they can make a unique contribution. This is not the whole story, but it is part of it. (BHC September 25, 1942)

III. Philosophical Bases for Hartshorne’s and Brightman’s Positions on Pacifism

Let us look now at how Hartshorne’s and Brightman’s positions on pacifism are related to their general philosophical outlooks. It is my contention that their positions hinge mainly on their understanding of value and their views concerning human nature.

For Hartshorne, as for Whitehead, value is connected to the complexity and enjoyment of experience, to the achievement of the satisfaction of an occasion of experience. That which adds to the complexity and enjoyment of experience adds to the value of the world and God who is fully present in the world. That which inhibits complexity and enjoyment of experience subtracts from the value of the universe. Given Hartshorne’s understanding of relations in which occasions of experience, and societies of occasions of experience, including humans, literally participate in one another’s being; it is not surprising to see Hartshorne’s emphasis on social awareness as the key to his rejection of doctrinaire pacifism. When certain human beings or groups of human beings subtract from the complexity and enjoyment of experience through various forms of oppression, aggression, or extermination, as in the case of Hitler’s Germany; the most responsible and loving thing to do at times, in Hartshorne’s opinion, is to use force in order that the oppressors, aggressors, and exterminators will be brought under control so that the value of human experience might again be increased. Hartshorne maintains that war "is better than to have a good part of mankind given over to slavery" (HCSTP 6). He believes that democratic nations have a particular responsibility to defend themselves and other nations in order to prevent injustices brought on by political tyranny (PDD 133).

Hartshorne is apt to use organic metaphors to describe our relations with each other, and this carries over into his discussion concerning the use of force and warfare. At one point, he even makes an analogy between war and amputation (PDD 139). There are times when a certain part of the body so threatens the rest of the body that the tragic choice must be made to eliminate it. It should be noted, with a sense of caution, that such organic analogies have been used by such figures as Hitler himself. He attempted to justify the purification of the Aryan race through the eradication of "undesirable elements" from the national body. However, the difference between Hitler and Hartshorne is that Hartshorne advocates the use of force only to deter others who are not respecting the freedom of other persons, whereas Hitler used force in order to bring about the dominance of one group over others, without any respect for the value of their experience.

In regard to the conception of human nature, Hartshorne seems to be squarely within the "political realism" tradition which focuses on the prevalence of sin in human nature and on the necessary use of power and coercion in group relations. In criticism of Brightman’s approach to world peace, Hartshorne remarks that in Brightman’s thought there is perhaps an "insufficient stress upon the ever-present tragedy of sin, which no plans for peace can hope to banish" (PIEP-C 557). Much like Reinhold Niebuhr, who is often described as a "Christian Realist" because of his "realistic" views about human nature and power relations, Hartshorne believes that various forms of coercion are necessary to maintain the balance of power among groups, and in certain circumstances this includes the necessity of going to war -- World War II being but one example. Hartshorne hopes that a peaceful world full of friendly cooperation might one day be possible. He says that he can hope for this "because it is God’s world; but on the other hand, we are human beings and not God, and so we remember our weaknesses" (HCSTP 12). In such an imperfect world, Hartshorne maintains that although persuasion is a preferable means of influencing others, love must be open to the possibility of using force so that those who are unloving may be coerced into a moderation of their aggressive tendencies. For Hartshorne, absolute pacifism fails to be aware of this "realistic" appraisal of human existence, and this he refers to as the pacifist delusion (BH 26-27).

For those aware of Hartshorne’s emphasis on persuasive power as being the only kind of power used by God, it may seem odd that Hartshorne advocates the use of coercive power on the part of humans. As David Basinger queries: "[H]ow can it be justifiable for us as humans to willfully use even violent coercion if God would never coerce at all? Or, to be more specific, if God would never use coercive power because persuasive power is morally superior and produces more worthwhile results, how can process theists justify the human use of coercive power in some cases? How can it become morally superior and more worthwhile for us?" (HG 166). Daniel A. Dombrowski is aware of this tension in Hartshorne’s thought, and he argues that it would be more consistent for Hartshorne to advocate the persuasive force of non-violent action rather than the use of coercive power to bring about peace (PHDT 345). Emphasizing along with Alfred North Whitehead that "‘the sense of peace’ consists in an immediate experience," Dombrowski maintains that "mediation through brute power always keeps us at least one additional step away from peaceful becoming" (PHDT 345).5

Why is it then that Hartshorne, the champion of the excellence of God’s persuasive power, maintains the necessity of humans sometimes using coercive power? To answer this question it is necessary to analyze Hartshorne’s use of the terms "persuasive power" and "coercive power." According to Barry Whitney, Hartshorne’s language concerning persuasion and coercion is imprecise and ambiguous (HT 58). Whitney maintains that "many of Hartshorne’s references to divine persuasion ambiguously imply what could just as easily be understood as coercion, despite the fact that this is clearly not what he has wished to imply" (HT 58). Hartshorne fails to distinguish among various degrees of divine persuasive power. Although Whitney agrees with Hartshorne that God’s power is not unilaterally determinative and therefore not coercive in the absolute sense, he "ascribe[s] a mixture of persuasive and coercive power to God," within the "infinite range of divine persuasive power, much of which is more persuasively influential, and hence more coercive, without it ever being an absolute coercion" (HT 65). This persuasive coercion is not to be confused with coercion "in the sense of overriding genuine creaturely freedom" (HT 65).

One might still ask, "Why doesn’t God be a little more coercively persuasive when it comes to controlling evil in the world?" More specifically, "Why doesn’t God exert more control over the Hitlers of the world?" David Griffin answers such queries with the following assertion:

[W]e are local agents, with bodies between us and the rest of the world. Insofar as we can persuade our bodies to carry out our wishes, we can use them to coerce other bodies. But God, being a universal rather than a local agent, does not have a localized body. Insofar as God does have a body, it is the whole universe of finite things, including our souls and bodies. There is no localized divine body between the divine soul and us with which God could manipulate our bodies. God cannot coerce, then, because God is not one finite, localized agent among others, but the one universal, omnipresent agent. (ER 104)

Although God possesses an infinite range of persuasive power, according to Griffin, God cannot coerce finite objects in the same way that localized agents can. This leaves open the possibility that although God cannot use violent, coercive force to control evildoers in the world, it may be morally justifiable for humans to do so in order "to prevent intolerable antisocial actions" (ER 157). It may sometimes be justifiable to counter negative coercion in the world "which frustrates, harms, or destroys" (ER 156) with coercive power in order to preserve value and genuine freedom that respects the freedom of others in the world. It is important, however, not to use violent, coercive power when nonviolent persuasion could be equally, or even more, effective than force. As Griffin maintains, "We would therefore engage in or consent to negative coercion only with extreme reluctance, and only as a last resort, after other possible solutions had been seriously and exhaustively explored" (ER 158). Hartshorne’s acute awareness of human sin will not allow him to rely solely on purely persuasive power to counter the forces of sin in this world. Those who would use negative coercive power in such a way that it inhibits the freedom of others must be stopped, and sometimes purely persuasive power is not enough to accomplish this. Thus we arrive at the seemingly paradoxical conclusion that sometimes we must make war to make peace, that is, we must use coercive persuasion to control those who would use coercive power for the purposes of injustice. One is reminded of Martin Luther King’s contention that "true peace is not merely the absence of some negative force -- tension, confusion or war; it is the presence of some positive force -- justice, goodwill and brotherhood" (NRJ 6). A similar conviction seems to underlie Hartshorne’s thought as well.

Now let us move on to the bases of Brightman’s position. In contrast to Hartshorne, Brightman has a much more narrow understanding of the locus of value. For Brightman, personality is the seat of all value (PIEP 544). In agreement with T.H. Green, Brightman holds that all value is "for, of, or in a person" (PIEP 544). He concludes that it is only in persons that peace can exist (PIEP 544). Consequently, there can be no real peace without "respect for personality" (PIEP 544). Brightman maintains that personality is free, that it is social, and that it grows through a process of dialectical tensions (PIEP 546-553). Because personality is free "an enduring peace must rest on plans for effective freedom in the whole world" (PIEP 548). Because personality is social, a permanent peace is only possible when there is reconciliation among peoples, and Brightman notes that reconciliation is difficult to bring about through the means of warfare. Because personality is growth through dialectical tensions, "peace is tension raised to a constructive, creative, cooperative level ... [whereas] war is destructive tension" (PIEP 553).

The philosophical principles undergirding Brightman’s pacifism are expressed in his formulations of the moral laws, which he describes as universal principles to which the will ought to conform its choices (ML 45). These laws are not to be confused with prescriptions for action in specific circumstances, rather they act in a regulatory way as principles according to which one should choose if one is to be moral. All of Brightman’s eleven formulations of the moral laws undergird the vision which fuels his commitment to pacifism, but at least four of them warrant special attention.

First, in Brightman’s formulation of what he calls the "Axiological Law," Brightman maintains that "all persons ought to choose ‘values which are self consistent, harmonious, and coherent, not ‘values which are contradictory or incoherent with one another" (ML 125). Given Brightman’s understanding of personality as the seat of all value, it is difficult for him to reconcile the killing of other persons with a respect for their personality. If the end or value that is desired is respect for personality, then it would be more consistent if the means to reach that desired end also reflect this value.

Second, in Brightman’s formulation of the "Law of Consequences, Brightman writes, "All persons ought to consider and, on the whole, approve the foreseeable consequences of each of their choices. Stated otherwise: Choose with a view to the long run, nor merely to the present act" (ML 142). Clearly Brightman believes that the consistent use of peaceful means will have more desirable consequences in the long run in respect to the value of personality than does war. His experience of the post World War I years provided him with an example of how difficult true reconciliation is after such widespread hostility among nations, and he feared that the long-run consequences of World War TI might not be much better. This fear led him to write the following in 1933: "[T]he probability that peace will involve greater evils than war is, under modern conditions, almost infinitesimal" (ML 154).

Third, in Brightman’s formulation of the "Law of the Best Possible," he writes, "All persons ought to will the best possible values in every situation: hence, if possible, to improve every situation" (ML 156). Writing in the middle of World War II, Brightman maintained that "the War is man’s revolt against the best. ... War threatens the very existence of values at any level both by destroying persons in whom alone the good can be realized and by menacing the ordered society and the institutions which support and cultivate values" (BPW 8). In Brightman’s view the cause of war can be traced to two sources: the failure of love and failure of reason. According to Brightman, "[C]o-operative, whole-hearted, universal love is the prime condition of the realization of the best possible world" (BPW 14-15), and this is a love which constantly contributes to the true welfare of all concerned, regardless of response.

Finally in Brightman’s formulation of the "Law of Altruism," he writes:

"Each person ought to respect all other persons as ends in themselves, and, as far as possible, to co-operate with others in the production and enjoyment of shared values" (ML 223). Here we see again a formulation of the principle of respect for personality" which is so central to Brightman’s position. The conditions of war make it extremely difficult to respect the enemy as ends in themselves; so much the case that Brightman feared that soldiers returning might need to undergo re-education and moral rehabilitation after the war in order to re-cultivate a rational love which is grounded in respect for personality (BPW 10).

In looking at Brightman’s moral laws and his position on pacifism, it becomes obvious that he had a more melioristic understanding of human nature than Hartshorne. Brightman is aware of the foes of love and reason in the world: e.g., our inhumanity to one another, racial hatred, economic exploitations, and wars (BPW 15). Perhaps it is this awareness which keeps him from describing himself as an absolute pacifist. But his focus is on the ability of persons to realize the best that is within them, and on the power of love to bring about reconciliation. If this type of unrelenting love were practiced in the years following World War I, perhaps the conditions which led to World War II would not have been created. We will never know, since the Treaty of Versailles and other post-World War I actions were not based on the rational love Brightman was advocating.

IV. Strengths and Weaknesses of Hartshorne’s and Brightman’s Views

Hartshorne’s recognition of the prevalence of human sin and the necessity of the use of coercive force in group relations is, I believe, both the strength and the weakness of his position. It is a strength because even in a world community, human sin would still be present, and coercive force would still be necessary, if only in the form of international policing. Hartshorne’s position seems to ring true in light of the tragedy of human existence in the world.

Hartshorne’s stress on sin and the necessity of coercive power becomes a weakness, however, because it tends to keep him from developing constructive programs for a peaceful world community.6 It is true that human beings have been sinful, are sinful and always will be sinful, but this can sometimes be overused as an excuse to avoid trying less coercive methods in societal and world relations. If we rely too heavily on forceful intervention to solve problems in world relations, we run the risk of simply continuing the cycle of violence by using violence as a solution to our problems, thereby making true reconciliation and mutual goodwill even more difficult to come by. Perhaps Hartshorne’s emphasis on the reality of sin and the need to check it by coercion made him unable to see the pacifists’ concern for long-term consequences, and the need to have a persistent minority calling the rest of us towards a more peaceful world community. Pacifists and non-pacifists often share a desire for the same ends, but they disagree on the best means for attaining their ends. Hartshorne’s failure to recognize the pacifists’ deep concern for consequences is perhaps the greatest weakness of his position,7 especially when he goes to the extent of blaming pacifism for contributing to the success of Hitler. A Hitler might not have been possible had more pacifist policies guided the leaders in the period directly following World War I.

Daniel Dombrowski points to this apparent weakness in Hartshorne’s view by arguing that although Hartshorne maintains that greater firmness in relation to Hitler and Germany would have been more appropriate in the Allies’ policy prior to World War II, he has not shown that greater conciliation after World War I might not also have been a better strategy than the policies attendant to the Treaty of Versailles (PHDT 342).8 Dombrowski writes:

"Greater firmness" would have been Churchill’s, and presumably Hartshorne’s approach. But Chamberlain’s approach, the one that failed, does not exhaust the possibilities. Appeasement is not the same as pacifism . . . [A] pacifist, if interpreted not only as an opponent to violence as a means of settling disputes, but also an opponent to violence, would never have been party to the treaty at Versailles in the first place. As Taylor suggests pacifism or "greater conciliation" may have succeeded as well as "greater firmness." (PHDT 343)

In the debate concerning "greater conciliation’ versus "greater firmness," Brightman falls clearly on the side of greater conciliation. The primary strength of Brightman’s position is his emphasis on reconciliation and on long-term consequences. I think he sees correctly that reconciliation is the principle upon which a lasting peace must rest. Otherwise the cycle of violence and war will continue. At the end of a time of open hostility the hatred does not disappear, and it often lies in wait for an opportunity to manifest itself anew in oftentimes more violent forms than in the past conflicts. Reconciliation is the only way to break this cycle.

In light of the modern situation and our possession of weapons of mass destruction, it is more pressing today than ever before to focus on a peaceful reconciliation of our differences. If wars continue to escalate, and the wrong weapons get into the wrong hands (one might argue that this is already the case), we may not have any long-term consequences to worry about. Brightman is right to see that the best possible long-term future belongs to a less violent world.

Hartshorne may be correct in surmising that one of the weaknesses in Brightman’s position is a tendency to underestimate the power of sin in the world and the need for the use of coercive force at times (PTEP-C 557). Brightman does seem to be dreaming of a fantasy "world community" at times, but it is not a dream divorced from an awareness of the challenges and difficulties of the pacifist approach. Brightman is aware that peace based on respect for personality is often more difficult than war, but he believes strongly that the consequences of peace are more favorable than those of war (PWC 23). One must still ask, however, "Is Brightman’s position tenable in the face of Hitler’s Germany?" Does not there come a time when the evil is so great that war is the lesser of the evils? We have to deal with the realities of the present, not with what might have been had the allies been more conciliatory following World War I.

V. Conclusion: The Synthesis of Martin Luther King, Jr.

As I have read through the disagreement in the correspondence and seen Hartshorne’s and Brightman’s positions clarified in some of their other writings, I have come to the conclusion that their "realistic" and "melioristic" positions should be mutually corrective to one another. At least in the expression of their positions concerning pacifism, Brightman could be more cognizant of the role of sin and power in group relations, and Hartshorne fails to be more aware that the best long-term consequences will come about through more peaceful and persuasive rather than coercive measures, with reconciliation being the guiding ideal for our actions.

The thought of Martin Luther King, Jr., can be a viewed as a synthesis of the strengths of these two positions, while for the most part leaving the weaknesses behind. King’s experience as a member of an oppressed minority In a violent and racist society, coupled with the intellectual influence of Reinhold Niebuhr’s "Christian Realism," led King to be painfully aware of the role of power and coercion in group relations. In this regard his thought is similar to Hartshorne’s. He was aware of the complexities of social and economic structures. King admits that Niebuhr helped him recognize "the complexity of man’s social involvement and the glaring reality of collective evil" (STF 98)9 But King did not despair of the possibilities for social improvement. The influence of Personalism on his thought during his studies at Boston University gave King a greater appreciation for the dignity of personality and a view that a personal God is working in the world so that this dignity might be enhanced. King was influenced by the moral laws with their stress on the respect for personality.10 He became convinced that the only possibility for improvement for black people in American society was through the reconciliation of whites and blacks based on justice and equality, the very ideals expressed in our Constitution, yet so inadequately expressed in our social structures.

King knew that injustices in society were not going to disappear magically, and he did not have a conception of God somehow miraculously curing the ills of racism, classism, and economic exploitation. He rejected the extremes of passive non-resistance on the one hand, and violent resistance on the other. Passive non-resistance did not meet the demands of the moral obligation to resist collective evil, and violence was an expression of despair that dimmed the hope for true reconciliation.11 King chose the path of "nonviolent resistance," which can be seen as a form of what Brightman calls rational love. Its goal is not the annihilation of one’s enemies, but rather their transformation and the transformation of unjust social structures so that injustice might increasingly be overcome within society.

As a strategy for justice for black Americans, I believe King’s non-violent approach to be more fruitful than both passive non-resistance and violent resistance. Hartshorne could not accuse King of not being concerned with the consequences of his non-violent actions. It was precisely King’s desire for a certain set of consequences that drove him in his non-violent struggle for justice. In the case of King and his non-violent movement, we are dealing with a minority group within a country that has practiced slavery both officially and unofficially. The majority peoples had already shown their willingness to commit violence against black Americans. From a strategic point of view, a violent revolution was not and still is not a fruitful option. Violent force could not have achieved the desired consequences.

But is not the situation of World War II different? In this case a minority of the people in the world, the Axis Powers, tried to force its will on the majority of the world, exterminating millions of people in the process. The majority of the world had the power to resist, and Hartshorne argues that violent resistance achieved better consequences than the nonviolent options. And here, though I often relate with the goals of pacifism, I must admit that I agree with Hartshorne. And I agree with the German theologian Dietrich Bonhoeffer’s agonizing choice to participate in the assassination attempt of Hitler. There are extreme cases when killing someone for the sake of the lives of others might be the most loving and fitting action. But I believe these cases are rarer than most people would concede. We must continually ask ourselves if forceful intervention is really contributing to a context for greater respect of personality, or are the issues of self-interest and other ulterior motives clouding our judgment? We must ask ourselves if we are hindering the chances for reconciliation and a lasting peace by too often and too hastily speaking in the language of war. Hopefully by wrestling with the issues that Hartshorne and Brightman were struggling with over a half century ago, we will be able to derive some lessons for the construction of a more peaceful world, where the language of war will be heard no more, or at least less often than is presently the case.12

 

Notes

1. The Edgar S. Brightman -- Charles Hartshorne correspondence can be found in the "Edgar S. Brightman Papers," which are held in the Special Collections division of the Mugar Memorial Library at Boston University.

2. Hartshorne, letter of January 22, i942 (edited and sent March 29, 1942). The last sentence quoted appears to have been added on March 29, 1942. Hartshorne refers in this passage to his essay A Philosophy of Democratic Defense," Science, Philosophy, and Religion Second Symposium (New York: Conference on Science, Philosophy, and Religion in their Relation to the Democratic Way of Life, Inc., 1942), 130-172.

3. The article referred to in this passage is Nels Ferré’s "Christianity and Compromise," Fellowship 8 (1942), 53-55.

4. The reader should note that the words ‘good and wise" were stricken with a pen mark before Hartshorne mailed the letter.

5. See also Alfred North Whitehead, Adventure of Ideas (New York: Macmillan, 1933), 381.

6. This criticism is not leveled at process theology in general. I agree with David Griffin that the widespread adoption of process theism would more likely "induce in persons a pacific spirituality through which they would become passionately committed to creating a new world order in which war would not seem necessary" (ER 157).

7. Cf. Randall C. Morris, Process Philosophy and Political Ideology: The Social and Political Though of Alfred North Whitehead and Charles Hartshorne (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1991), 167.

8. See also A.J.P. Taylor, The Origins of the Second World War (New York: Athenaeum, 1962), 278.

9. Quoted in Walter G. Muelder, "The America of Martin Luther King, Jr.," paper prepared for the Sophomore required course at Berea College, Spring 1973, 4-5; Special Collections, Boston University School of Theology Library.

10. For an excellent account of the influence of the moral laws on King’s thought, see Walter 0. Muelder’s, "Martin Luther King, Jr., and the Moral Law," Lecture given at Morehouse College, 1983; Special Collections, Boston University School of Theology Library, Boston.

11. John J. Ansbro elaborates on this point in his, Martin Luther King Jr. The Making of a Mind (Maryknoll: Orbis Books, 1982), especially chapters 4 and 6.

12. I would like to thank Randall Auxier and Andrew Irvine for their helpful comments on the various drafts of this paper.

References

BHC The Edgar S. Brightman-.Charles Hartshorne Correspondence, Special Collections division of the Mugar Memorial Library at Boston University.

BPW Edgar S. Brightman, "The Best Possible World," Journal of Bible and Religion 11 (1943), 7-15, 72.

ER David Ray Griffin, Evil Revisited: Responses and Reconsiderations, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1991.

HC David Basinger, "Human Coercion: A Fly in the Process Ointment?" Process Studies 15 (1986), 161-171.

HCSTP Charles Hartshorne, "How Christians Should Think about the Peace," a radio discussion by Edwin Aubrey, Charles Hartshorne, and Bernard Loomer. Pamphlet The University of Chicago Round Table (Chicago, April 9, 1944), 20 pages.

HT Barry L. Whitney, "Hartshorne and Theodicy," Hartshorne, Process Philosophy, and Theology, edited by Robert Kane and Stephen H. Phillips, Albany: State University of New York Press, 1989, 53-69. [A more recent discussion of Whitney’s understanding of divine persuasiveness in process theism will be published in his "Divine Power and the Anthropic Principle," The Personalist Forum (1998), forthcoming.]

ML Edgar S. Brightman, Moral Laws, New York: Abingdon Press, 1933.

MVG-R Edgar S. Brightman. review of Man’s Vision of God, by Charles Hartshorne, in The Journal of Religion 12 (1942), 96-99.

NRJ Martin Luther King, Jr., "Nonviolence and Racial Justice," A Testament of Hope. Edited by James M. Washington. San Francisco: Harper, 1986, 5-9.

PDD Charles Hartshorne, "A Philosophy of Democratic Defense," Science, Philosophy and Religion. Second Symposium. New York: Conference on Science, Philosophy, and Religion in Their Relation to the Democratic Way of Life, Inc., 1942, 130-172.

PHDT Daniel Dombrowski, "Pacifism and Hartshorne’s Dipolar Theism," Encounter 48 (1987), 337-350.

PIEP Edgar S. Brightman, "Philosophical Ideas and Enduring Peace," in Approaches to World Peace, Fourth Symposium, edited by Lyman Bryson, Louis Finkelstein, and Robert M. MacIver. New York: Harper and Bros., 1944, 542-556.

PIEP-C Charles Hartshorne, comment on "Philosophical Ideas and Enduring Peace," by Edgar S. Brightman, in Approaches to World Peace, Fourth Symposium, edited by Lyman Bryson, Louis Finkelstein, and Robert M. MacIver. New York: Harper and Bros., 1944, 557.

PWC Edgar S. Brightman, "The Philosophy of World Community," World Order, edited by F. Ernest Johnson. New York and London: Harper & Bros., 1945, 14-30.

STF Martin Luther King, Jr., Strive Toward Freedom: The Montgomery Story. New York: Harper & Row Publishers, 1958.

Explanation and Natural Philosophy: Or, The Rationalization of Mysticism

Every natural philosophy that aims to get something right about the world sooner or later comes up against a problem that Kant believed he had resolved when he distinguished between those concepts that he calls conceptus ratiocinati ("rightly inferred concepts") and those that he calls conceptus ratiocinantes ("pseudo-rational concepts") (GPR 309). But his failure to justify this distinction, by showing how to map a domain of rationality in which the elucidation of metaphysical concepts followed the secure path of a science ("in accordance with the example set by geometers and physicists") indicates a general limitation on natural philosophy. There is no way to determine exactly what sort of concepts are rightly inferred, nor any way to tell which concepts are indeed fundamental in metaphysics. As I argue in Myths of Reason, rationalistic thought is obliged always to "begin in the rough" with the assumption that certain "large" general ideas are just what is needed;1 ideas whose extreme vagueness reveals that the range of rational concepts is very broad indeed, so broad in fact that the vexed question of just where and how to begin doing natural philosophy becomes a primary and major worry. For unless one is prepared to endorse the (for some unquestionable) belief that an immersion in the separate disciplines of science is the proper approach to what used to be a single area of inquiry, attention must turn to topics that are normally thought to lie well outside the purview of natural science -- to myth and mysticism.

Myths are often consigned to a class of inferior or fictional forms of story-telling, while mysticism is banished to the dark cellars of the irrational. I want to argue, however, that both myth and mysticism are ineliminable from a comprehensive natural philosophy. Hence the truly rational first move for a natural philosopher is to acknowledge that he/she is obliged to speak, as it were, in two voices: one conscious of a mythopoeic element in even the most serious and systematic modes of discourse and the other conscious of an unavoidable mystical dimension in every interpretation of nature. The voices come together in a recognition of the centrality of imagination in dealing with the tension inherent in the nature-culture contrast.

Major sources of this tension are captured in the idea of repression, with E.A. Burtts’s classic discourse on The Metaphysical Foundations of Modern Science remaining highly relevant to the side of "nature." Searching for the source of the main current in modern philosophical thought, he focuses on the failure of early modern "naturalists" to address the anomalies in their metaphysical beliefs. He maintains that it was not only their early successes in the use of mathematical methods but also wishful thinking that fostered a tendency to make a metaphysics out of mathematical methods. For western thought also entrenched the assumption that nothing really exists outside the human mind that was not amenable to such methods. The upshot was that all sources of distraction, and in particular the "messy" qualitative characters of events, were either denied or removed from the world.

Burtt thus outlines what amounts to a philosophical type of repression. Repression can also be said to be the main concern of certain "postmodern" critiques of western conceptions of rationality (e.g., socio-theoretical, feminist, and historical critical studies). These critiques indicate that running parallel to a metaphysical repression related to beliefs about reason and rationality are a variety of suppressions or denials of crucial psycho-social factors. Thus a cultural analysis of scientific knowledge-making (on the model of psychoanalysis) may be more urgently required than further metaphysical analysis. But Burtt plays down the importance of "ethico-social" concepts (such as "progress," "control," and the like). He holds that "in the last analysis it is the ultimate picture which an age forms of the nature of its world that . . . is the final controlling factor in all thinking whatever."2

That this view is much too sanguine is evident from the power of what I shall call the myth of scientific superrationality -- the idea that scientific thought represents the epitome of rational thought. This myth comprises a number of lesser myths, one of which is that science is ideologically neutral. But as many "culturist" critics of science note, this belief is belied by the fact that apologists for science tend to defend their position by passionate appeals to the universality and immutability of the "laws of nature" that science progressively and objectively discovers: laws that it would be absurd to view as socially constructed.3 Such an objection, however, fails to take note of the fact that, as Whitehead puts it, "Nature is patient of interpretation in terms of Laws which happen to interest us" (AI 136). The plain and simple truth is that no compendium of laws, however comprehensive, could ever provide enough substance for an adequate discourse on nature. And the inescapability of vagueness in fundamental concepts also indicates that it is impossible to establish a perfectly objective mode of rationalistic inquiry. In other words, the necessity for interpretations in every instance of scientific story-telling indicates that science can never draw a sharp line between ontological and ideological commitments.

But if this is so, the natural philosopher cannot escape having to engage with the topic of myths, for as Northrop Frye points out, every ideology is an applied mythology." This means that myths precede ideologies and not, as is sometimes assumed, the other way round. The myths that underpin an ideology generally function as guides: they express what a society is trying to make of itself. Furthermore, there are at least two orders of myth, for "the mythology, good or bad, creates the ideology, good or bad" (WP 25). So the natural philosopher who aims for comprehensive explanations that do justice both to science and to ordinary experience is obliged to wrestle with the problem of the "goodness," or otherwise, of predominant mythologies, especially those that underpin the scientistic ideology.

Now, Whitehead’s writings on science can be read as a criticism of the myth of scientific superrationality. But in view of the power and tenacity of the scientistic ideology, which abhors the very idea of myth, it is not surprising that Whitehead has received so little attention from philosophers of science, despite his being one of the most original and creative thinkers of this century. No doubt one of his greatest heresies is to ascribe anti-rationalist views to orthodox rationalists.4 Whitehead’s own thinking seems to move inexorably toward the conclusion that only good myths can engender good understandings.5 The gist of his conclusion, that mythopoesis underpins natural philosophy, does not require a renunciation of logic, mathematics, and science. On the contrary, he proposes that a major, if not the principal, task in natural philosophy is to show how to reconcile systematic thinking with mythopoesis.

But before attempting such a task, a certain therapeutic exercise is required. For not only myth has been repressed in the framing of modern conceptions of rationality but also -- and equally -- imagination, a mysterious faculty that is intimately connected with, and by no means the enemy of, good reasoning. And in so far as imagination is fundamental to rational understanding, its systemic repression in western philosophy is another sign that the natural philosopher must be as deeply concerned with cultural analysis as with metaphysical analysis. Imagination may even count as the clearest indication why Whitehead is right to say that all the natural philosopher can ever hope to achieve is a "rationalization of mysticism" (MT 174).

I. The Mystery of Consciousness

The mere mention of mysticism often acts as a red flag to self-consciously rational minds, especially to those raised on the hope that metaphysics can somehow be pursued as a science. Yet this attitude may merely indicate that modern conceptions of rational thought grow out of a pervasive fear of mysticism. But in order to justify this fear and to show that, contra Whitehead, natural philosophy can be completely quarantined from myth and mysticism, it would be necessary to show, among other things, that there is no real mystery to consciousness itself. That this can be done is a presupposition of many areas of scientific inquiry ranging from neurobiology to computer technology. But not much in the way of specialized scientific training is needed to suspect that consciousness is simply not fully amenable to scientific explanation. That is to say, there is a mystery that can only be approached indirectly.

In a recent survey of research in this area, John Searle suggests that the task of banishing mystery from consciousness depends on finding a way to explain that aspect of subjective experience that he calls "qualitative feels." For he insists, as an empirical fact, on the presence of "a special qualitative feel to each type of conscious state" (MC 61). At the heart of the problem of consciousness, in other words, is the problem of qualia: to show how "brain processes, which are publicly observable, objective phenomena, could cause anything as peculiar as inner qualitative states of awareness or sentience, states which are in some sense ‘private’ to the possessor of the state (MC 60).6 Searle thus prompts an even more basic question: whether it is possible to distinguish clearly and distinctly between private and public aspects of perception.

Science suggests that there is no such thing as a purely private "percipient event" (to adopt Whitehead’s phrase) -- that is, one requiring nothing but algorithmic or mechanical material processes for its complete description. If one proposes to take science even a little seriously, some "percipient events" must involve "external" electromagnetic and electrochemical occurrences that elicit coordinated processings in multitudes of interconnected and interacting "internal" cells. A visual experience, for instance, lends itself to description as a complex semiotic process involving transmissions and integrations of signs, or bits of information, to a central organ, the brain, and more localized processes of selection, sorting, and evaluation (i.e., gradations as to relevance of various types of information) that sometimes issue in tentative (and often only vague) interpretations. In other words, rather than being a definite end-product of a singular, isolated process, a concrete image in a visual perception is the result of an essentially dynamic complex of semiotic processes requiring the coordinated, cooperative efforts of a network of socially organized communities of "interpreters" in the animal body.

If such a general description comes close to the truth, there is no reason in science, or anywhere else for that matter, to indicate that it is possible, in principle, to capture such a complex process as a visual perception with a systematic description that relies on a clear and definite distinction between the "insides" of a percipient event and its variously extended "outsides." The difficulty of drawing a line between the "inner" and "outer" physical aspects of perception is compounded by the fact that a percipient event, at least among "higher" organisms, is both forwardly and backwardly oriented. That is to say, most interpretations are influenced not only by the characters of events in the very recent past but also by those that may predominate in the very near future (e.g., the spatio-temporal configurations of possibly life. threatening developments in the immediate environment), to say nothing of the enveloping culture. This last consideration is far from being least, for when it is acknowledged as relevant, perception emerges as a series of intricately connected, extremely complex semiotic relationships connecting dynamic networks of interpretive beings and their extended environments. The ability of science to throw light on this complex business is probably very limited.

In so far as the orderly aspects of perception are essentially participatory-negotiary semiotic transactions, the laboratory where perception can be most fruitfully studied will be neither private nor public -- it will lie, mysteriously, somewhere in between. In other words, an elucidation of perception may get much further by using the metaphor of sign than by traditional means based on the idea of causality. It may be suspected that a causally-focused approach to consciousness merely proffers another illustration of the power of the myth of scientific superrationality. Searle, for instance, fuels this suspicion when he insists on the presence of qualia but fails to follow through with their "feeling" aspects. Consider also his claim that "the right way to think" about a visual experience is that "photons reflected off objects attack the photoreceptor cells of the retina and this sets up a series of neuronal processes (the retina being part of the brain), which eventually result, if all goes well, in a visual experience that is a perception of the very object that originally reflected the photons" (MC 64). If one grants that it is photons that are primarily carriers of information, the question arises how images with their special "qualitative feels" could possibly result from what might be called one-way leaps across a category gap"; that is to say, how entities that belong to the category of the actual (as feelings surely must) can be caused by entities that belong to the category of the potential (for photons, as carriers of information, merely convey "meanings in potentia").

Searle believes that the formation of ideas and images can be elucidated in terms of emergence: a conscious experience that involves a peculiar qualitative feel" is an emergent property of a system (a system of neurons). Hence he claims that consciousness is no more mysterious than other emergent properties of natural functioning -- it is a biological phenomenon (comparable with growth, digestion, or the secretion of bile), and "thus . . . part of the ordinary physical world" (MC 60). This abrupt turn from a causal theory of consciousness to talk about emergent properties not only leaves the puzzle about causality dangling, it compounds the mystery by evoking still more elementary puzzles about the meaning of emergence and evolution, as well as about how and where to locate sentience in an evolving "physical world." Lower-level neurological processes in the brain, says Searle, "cause my present state of consciousness, but that state is not a separate entity from my brain; rather it is just a feature of my brain at the present time" (MC 64). Yet he acknowledges that this move does not satisfy his aim to explain how "neural correlates cause the conscious feelings." Adding that we are a long way from knowing the form such an explanation might take," he puts his finger (albeit only for a moment) on the crux of the matter, which is the question of what form a rational explanation of matters relating to consciousness ought to take.

Searle’s account of consciousness, in short, merely throws doubt on the wisdom of his initial assumption -- that there are only two alternatives for tackling the problem of consciousness: either search for a causal theory or succumb to some sort of vicious Cartesian dualism. That this first step is an error is indicated by Searle himself in his allusion to the bipolar (private and public) character of conscious awareness, which prompts one to ask whether most scientific approaches to the problem of consciousness are vitiated at the outset by a failure to leave open the possibility of an indissociable bipolarity in key ideas (such as public-private, subjective-objective, and body-mind).

Although emergent material brains (and nervous systems) are evidently involved in emergent conscious experiences (such as "qualitative feels"), this fact only attests to the sentience of nature; indeed of the whole of nature if (as modern biology suggests) no clear division can be drawn between the organic and the non-organic. Furthermore, if nature is indeed evolutionary from bottom to top, human consciousness cannot claim to be the paradigmatic form of sentience for, as Whitehead points out, consciousness is a late, and relatively rare, aspect of evolving nature. There is no reason to think that it is not still evolving (as some thinkers, such as Rudolf Steiner, maintain). So even if science were able to prove that consciousness is impossible without brains, it would not follow that brains cause consciousness. Perhaps all that one can say confidently is that the brain is to consciousness as the eye is to seeing -- and without eyes there are manifestly no visual experiences. But because organs such as eyes and brains are only parts of whole functioning bodies, a body is evidently a necessary condition for the emergence of psychic activity, or at least for efficacious psychic activity. The point seems implicit in the very idea of "qualitative feels." Indeed, a feeling is first and foremost a subjective, concrete experience and not a property or attribute of some inert object, let alone something composed solely of abstract entities, whatever their degree of complexity and organization.7 In brief, then, a concrete percipient event is a feeling experience, which presupposes a body capable of experiencing feelings. For where would feelings be felt, if there were no bodies?

I am suggesting that only a myth of overweening power could succeed in relegating these very basic considerations to the distant background. When talk about sentience deploys the apparatus of causality and refers to bodies and their organs as "organic machines," language is forced to the brink of incoherence. Searle’s use of this metaphor to describe the brain (MC 62) is an indication that it is necessary, in order to do justice to "qualitative feels," to seek an imagery that can accommodate not only mechanical actions or reactions but also embodied sentient responses. For this metaphor pits "blind" or regulated modes of action and reaction against modes of response that exemplify a certain freedom, since a living organism is distinguishable from a dead machine to the extent that there is something unpredictable about its behavior. If the notion of an organic machine is not merely an abortive attempt to weld the incompatible ideas of spontaneous feeling and controlled behavior into one figure, it is a tacit admission of the need to find a rational explanation capable of reconciling these two contrasting types of activity.

II. Approaching Consciousness Indirectly

Searle’s account of the problem of consciousness thus shows that science was destined to run up against a blank wall when it could no longer deny the awkward fact that "inward" events (like qualitative feelings) can neither be ignored nor explained away in terms of "outward" appearances. Searle fails, however, to take the obvious next step and to note that since such events can only be inferred from outward appearances they must lie outside the scope of scientific methods, and can perhaps only be explained metaphorically. Such a step would be tantamount to renouncing the myth of scientific super-rationality. Were it not for this myth, it might be more widely acknowledged that every would-be rational explanation both presupposes a conceptual structure and privileges certain concepts that function as key interpretive metaphors. The myth of scientific superrationality thus emerges as the principal obstacle to seeing that the quality of its underlying metaphysical imaginary (the complex of metaphorics that roughly guide metaphysical reasoning about what there is and how it hangs together) is what ultimately provides a natural philosophy with whatever comprehensiveness and adequacy it can lay claim to.

In other words, the crucial and fundamental question about thinking is what type of imaginary could accommodate and reconcile complementary, closely intertwined but antagonistic ideas; for example, mechanical habit and free or spontaneous action. Current research in cognitive science notwithstanding, it seems a complete mistake to try to evade, or ignore, or try to eliminate the peculiar tensions involved in contrasting ideas. Here perhaps is the kernel of the repressions that vitiate a good deal of natural philosophy. The discovery of the ubiquity of such contrasts may even be one of the most significant events in the history of the study of consciousness. In any event, an awareness that certain polar contrasts (such as subjective-objective, public-private, body-mind, organism-machine, feeling-thought, and perhaps nature-culture) are indissoluble, yet fundamental, is one of the most important aspects of Whitehead’s philosophic thought. This aspect becomes prominent in his return to pre-Kantian philosophy.

With regard to Berkeley’s critique of materialism, a critique that the foregoing discussion shows is still highly relevant, Whitehead suggests that Berkeley’s challenge is to show how to reconcile matter and spirit. For Berkeley, Whitehead suggests, puts his finger on an ur-question of natural philosophy: "What do we mean by things being realized in the world of nature?" (SMW 67). In respect to human experience, Berkeley challenges us to explain "the complete concreteness of our intuitive experience," a phrase that is consonant with his insistence that concrete reality consists in just those ideas we do in fact have. Whitehead’s question can be rephrased in Berkeleyan terms thus: "What do we mean by ideas being realized in minds?" For Berkeley’s attack on matter as an adequate basis for explaining the genesis of ideas or mental phenomena is unequivocal. It is unintelligible, he holds, to say that insentient entities are capable of causing sentience. Neither can ideas themselves cause other ideas, for ideas are inert things. He thus invites his successors to face the question: If you insist on the existence of causal agency in nature, where else should this agency be located, if not in spirit?

Whitehead’s response to Berkeley is to grasp the nettle with both hands. Since he believes that Berkeley’s theological solution to the metaphysical problem of explaining experience is unsatisfactory, he concludes that it is necessary to find a niche in natural philosophy for both matter and spirit "as abstractions in terms of which much of our physical experience can be interpreted" (SMW 67). His development of Berkeley’s thought, however, takes a course that is radically different from that of Hume or Kant, a course that testifies indirectly to the truth of Whitehead’s heretical claim that an element of mysticism is unavoidable in rational explanations. This claim is tantamount to an assertion of the fundamental importance of the powers of imagination.

To learn more about these powers, it is helpful to turn to Kant, who is likewise influenced by Berkeley (by way of Hume). He too is exercised by the question of what we mean by things being realized in nature. Like Berkeley, Kant believes that our knowledge of reality is knowledge only of appearances and their relations, except in his case this knowledge is the result of variously conditioned subjective constructions. Yet Kant can also be read as starting from the fundamental assumption that cognition presupposes a synthesis of outer" and "inner" conditions of the possibility of knowledge, a synthesis that is dependent on a faculty of imagination. In the first edition of his Critique of Pure Reason, Kant stresses the indispensability of this faculty in the synthesis of the sensible and the intellectual -- a faculty he describes as "a blind but indispensable function of the soul, without which we should have no knowledge whatsoever" (CPR 112). Yet Kant retreated from the radical implications of this statement in the second edition of the Critique, with perhaps unfortunate consequences for subsequent philosophy in so far as he helped foster an "islanded consciousness."

Commenting upon this crucial moment in the history of metaphysics, John Rundell asks how Kant constructs the imagination in his account of the formation of knowledge. Although Kant insists that our knowledge is always of representations, and not of objects capable of existing outside our powers of representation, Rundell points out that the representations must themselves emerge from a synthesis of reason and imagination (CJ 91). In Kant’s analysis of this synthesis, imagination turns out not to be simply reproductive (that is, not simply to function in accordance with a priori principles in associating and reproducing appearances). It is also productive in an originative sense (that is, it is formative and creative in its own right). Thus a tension, indeed a chasm, opens up in the relation between reason and imagination, for the latter is only partly dependent upon the determinate concepts and rules of the understanding, it is itself "a creative force and source of reflexivity."

In sum, then, in his encounter with imagination, "Kant confronts an abyss, where, were he to fall into it, he would confront chaos and uncertainty. He pulls back onto the ground of certitude. In so doing he circumscribes the nature and role of the imagination, especially its synthesizing power, making it dependent on the understanding" (CJ 95).

While a distaste for chaos and uncertainty is understandable in an inquiry that aims for apodictic certainty, the image of an abyss suggests that a fear of or aversion to mysticism may partly explain Kant’s retreat. At any rate, it seems difficult to overestimate the importance of this confrontation between reason and imagination in western philosophy’s quest to understand the world. Not only is imagination one of the neglected areas of modern philosophy, it may be an ongoing victim of repression. Indeed, John Sallis, after examining the uneasy relation between metaphysics and imagination in a historical light, concludes that the very constitution of metaphysics involves a massive repression of imagination. Running from Aristotle to Hegel, he argues, is an interpretation of metaphysics as a drive to pure presence -- a telos that envisages a moment when all images and imagery are rendered otiose and the original truth stands revealed. Recent Continental thought has thoroughly criticized and undermined this drive, exposing the strategy by which imagination was finally repressed [in the so-called closure of metaphysics] as precisely that, a strategy. To counter this strategy does not require, says Sallis, a renunciation of metaphysics as a mode of inquiry but rather only a recognition of "the return of the repressed" – a "release of imagination into the entire field" (D 15). But if this is so, Kant may have been right in the first place, and only imagination has the power to synthesize the sensible and the intellectual. That is to say, imagination may well be the sine qua non for both knowledge and reason in so far as both are dependent on a prior unification of the "inner" and "outer" conditions of experiencing.

There is also reason to believe that the material and the immaterial (or spiritual) are very intimately intertwined. It may be that every rationalistic inquiry, which is committed to the belief that something intelligible and (at least partially) true can be said about the world as we find it, is obliged to acknowledge mysteries evoked by the notion of an imagination capable of overcoming the divisive effects of the distinction between the sensible and the intelligible that Plato introduced into metaphysics. So it is worth reviewing some of the basic considerations that seem indispensable to getting anywhere with the problem of consciousness.

Arguing as a philosopher and a psychoanalyst, Cornelius Castoriadis depicts the event of a visual perception concisely. He observes that both "primary" and "secondary" qualities are creations of the living body, i.e., "of the embodied psyche in humans, creations more or less permanent or transient, more or less generic or singular. These creations are often conditioned by an ‘external’ X -- not ‘caused’ by it. Light waves are not colored, and they do not cause the color qua color. They induce, under certain conditions, the subject to create an ‘image’ which, in many cases ... is generically and socially shared" (RE 140, emphasis in original).

Castoriadis’s emphasis on the word "condition," as well as his reference to both the biological and the cultural dimensions of perception, reinforces the claim that science, whenever it attempts to address the topic of mind, simply runs up against the limits of its own competency. This is partly because, as Castoriadis emphasizes, immaterial "things" like conscious images are not "in the mind." Rather, "they are just what they are: images." This line of thought suggests that the products of minds are best conceived as issuing from constructive acts performed by "embodied psyches," in which psyche and soma resolve their tensions and oppositions with the help of "radical imagination."

This last idea, according to Castoriadis, is neither new nor unexamined. What he terms "radical imagination" roughly corresponds to an idea introduced twenty -- three centuries ago by Aristotle, who discussed two completely different meanings for phantasia -- one of which (prime or primary imagination) is, says Castoriadis, that "without which there can be no thought and which possibly precedes any thought" (RI 136-137). But this idea has had little influence in the development of rationalistic thought, not surprisingly perhaps since it implies that the concepts of experience and reality are as intimately related as psyche and soma. Indeed, Castoriadis claims that radical imagination operates "before the distinction between ‘real’ and ‘fictitious’.... It is because the radical imagination exists that ‘reality’ exists for us -- exists tout court -- and exists as it exists" (RI 138, emphasis original). In this view, then, reality and experience are two poles of an indissoluble bipolarity that is perhaps only bridgeable by means of a variety of different kinds of imaginative acts. For the difficulty in explaining experience is not to be resolved simply by reversing Kant’s retreat from the idea of an intrinsically untamable, productive or creative faculty of imagination. Once the mysterious figure of imagination has been allowed to put its foot inside the door of philosophy, its presence can be felt in every room of the house. Since primary (or radical) imagination is prior to consciousness, secondary (e.g., poetic) imagination seems required to explain the creation of the concepts that discourse requires.

Tricky questions arise at this point, since the poetic creation of ideas is only more or less self-conscious and controlled. Perhaps just the "right" figurative imagery can on occasion, like the sensory imagery arising from acts of primary or radical imagination, spontaneously appear (in the form of intuitions, insights, or dreams). Furthermore, in so far as many (all?) of our most fundamental concepts (such as object and subject, matter and spirit, and so on) come as indissociable polarities, a philosophical imagination would seem to be indispensable for retaining the essential unities of merely apparent dualities. Yet another form of imagination (best called mythopoeic) may explain the genesis and power of the ideas that mediate between individuals and the groups they form. And as for the general character of thought -- patterns peculiar to such groups, a collective or social imagination, or what Castoriadis calls a "social instituting imaginary," may be needed to explain the differences between cultures and their peculiar destinies (RI 149).

Thus, although the notion of imagination is extremely vague, it is not on that account any less respectable than a good many other fundamental philosophical notions whose usefulness seems to be directly proportional to their degree of vagueness. In any case, the endemic vagueness of fundamental concepts points up the need for an essentially metaphorical treatment of the ideas they convey. Kant himself suggests that only more or less insightful acts of metaphoring can explain successful scientific attempts to render the world partially intelligible, despite his monumental attempt in his Critique of Pure Reason to banish all metaphors from the domain of speculative reason. Consider his use of the notion of representation, whose countless appearances in philosophical discourse implies a certain "rightness." Of course everything still hinges on how this metaphor is interpreted. Returning to visual perception, in which information carried by photons is somehow converted into images, one might say that these images are in a sense re-presentations of a something (or of some part of a something) that has been presented to the perceiver. But a representation is never simply given or directly caused, nor ever precisely replicated. It is subject to the vagaries of "internal" decisions (selections, modes of integration, and so on) that are not caused but rather conditioned by "external" influences (such as altered bodily states through fatigue, drugs, etc.). Thus it is better to think in terms of an ongoing unconscious activity of representing; that is to say, an activity of minding, where images (and intuitions, ideas, phenomena, etc.) emerge as the results of acts of representing.8

III. On Minding and Mysticism

We assume, then, a faculty of imagination, indispensable to sentient awareness, leads to a view of representing, or minding, in which all reasonings are bound up with interpretations of latent information as mere possibilities.9 Minding thus refers at bottom to . . . to nothing that can be positively identified as the fixed and palpable furniture of an enduring world-mansion. It is here, in other words, that one becomes aware of the mystical in its most unencumbered form -- not as something uncannily "other" to ordinary experience, but rather as something interwoven into all experiencing. What the mystical is most strikingly "other" to is mindings (usually wedded to materialistic imaginaries) that are mesmerized by the Cartesian myth that the world and world-makers can be sharply distinguished and analyzed separately and systematically. For a rough picture of the world has emerged in which thought, both conscious and unconscious, is an intimate interplay of only more or less focused and engaged acts of minding that result (mirabile dictu!) in a flux of only more or less well connected images, and more or less coherent concepts and beliefs.

No doubt most acts of minding are governed by habitual, or law-like, patterns of response whose different characters distinguish world-making capabilities across a wide organic spectrum. Since it is virtually a truism that no organism could create the world anew at every instant, it is hardly surprising that habits or customs or instincts predominate in the production of experience. Yet wherever habit or instinct does not dictate how reality is to be constructed, imagination enters into the making of reality-experience. Thus, complexity in types and relations between acts of minding may have grown exponentially with the evolution of "higher" organisms as the imaginative element in the construction of reality became more socially diffused; i.e. as the construction of reality became more participatory-negotiary in character. But this complexity is not what I mean by the mystical.

The mystical dimension in understanding seems to have been acknowledged at the very birth of philosophy, as is evident in two insights of Heraclitus. These are of interest here since they attest to the usefulness of semiotic metaphors for understanding thought. The first insight, that all is flux, manifestly informs Whitehead’s choice of process as a guiding metaphor (as a pivotal concept of his metaphysical imaginary). This choice bears witness to his conviction that "metaphoring," and hence imagination, are indispensable to philosophical understanding. While he does not mention the second insight explicitly, it is consonant with his elevation of creativity to the category of the ultimate. Whitehead observes, for instance, that the idea of process, or "passing on," is bound up with the meaning of creare ("to bring forth, beget, produce"). And Heraclitus can be read as commenting on the intimate connection between creativity and the perceptual aspects of process.10 Consider the famous fragment (Diels 101) which reads (according to Luigi Romeo): "The lord, who has the Oracle in Delphi, neither discloses nor hides his thought, but indicates it through signs."11 The significance of this observation for understanding cognition, says Romeo, lies in the implication that the intimate nature of things is hidden in all of us, so that "each person must analyze, himself on the basis of internal signs (as well as external ones that might act only as catalysts)." This means, in other words, that "each human being has his own built-in oracle as part of his mind," which a person discovers through intuitions.12

This may be the semiotic key to Whitehead’s cryptic remark, which he calls an "axiom of empiricism": that "all knowledge is derived from, and verified by, direct intuitive observation" (AI 177). This "axiom" is consonant with Berkeley’s emphasis on the direct apprehension of ideas as the principal basis of our knowledge of reality. But Whitehead’s response to the vexed question of the nature and genesis of our ideas and capacity for reason was bound to differ radically from that of both Berkeley and Kant, given that one of his overriding concerns was to observe the indissociability of conceptual bipolarities. For ideas in this view cannot be coherently conceived as stemming either from "out there" or "in here." Pursuing the semiotic hints of Heraclitus a little further, one is led to regard the "stuff" of mindings as arising from, or better perhaps precipitated out of, creative affective responses to potential influences. These are conveyed by "external" signs that prompt psychosomatic mediations (or embodied, usually habitual, but inherently imaginative syntheses of the sensible and conceptual).

This conclusion, that metaphor is indispensable for understanding consciousness as an ongoing, essentially imaginative precipitation of the meanings inherent in signs, is implicit in Whitehead’s theory of perception. Here he distinguishes between two modes -- causal efficacy and presentational immediacy -- linked by an active synthetic functioning which he terms "symbolic reference" (S 8). The mode of causal efficacy does justice to the consideration that Kant only half-acknowledged in the idea of noumena: there must be "external influences" that condition "inner" imaginative processes. The mode of presentational immediacy refers to the projection of images that results from an internal processing of "outside" influences.

Causal efficacy also meets Berkeley’s challenge to clarify the fundamental notion of causality. Without needing to deny the existence of "outer objects," Whitehead’s response to Berkeley is formulated as the principle of conformation whereby "what is already made becomes a determinant of what is in the making" (S 46). But since determinants that are actually relevant can only be inferred from concrete events, by arguing backwards to those factors in the past which have provided the conditions for the present, Whitehead’s interpretation of the notion of matter is not vulnerable to Berkeley’s objection that insentient matter could not possibly cause ideas and images. Every process of becoming must begin somewhere, before going on to new "things." So Whitehead’s reply to Berkeley is, in effect, that matter really does matter in the ordinary sense of the word, since whatever acquires material existence is always capable of influencing by means of signs the becomings of subsequent "things."

Perception in the mode of causal efficacy also points to the reason why there are bodies in the first place. Only bodies are capable of feeling feelings. Bodies and their various organs are the necessary primary receptors of the multifarious influences conveyed by signs qua possibilities, for that is what signs come down to.13 And signs in general have the power to arouse concrete feelings in embodied subjects; such as, for instance, the "qualitative feels" in conscious experiences.14

The function of symbolic reference is thus to bring harmony out of the meeting of the two modes of perception, one of which faces the "outer" world while the other is engaged in the "inward" constructive or projective tasks that result in sense-data. Functioning on the basis of the principle that "the how of our present experience must conform to the what of the past in us" (S 58), symbolic reference operates in the intersection of the two modes of perception, an intersection at which "a pair of such percepts must have elements of structure in common, whereby they are marked out for the action of symbolic reference" (S 49). Once again imagination appears to be the only faculty capable of performing such a "marking out."15 Moreover, Whitehead emphasizes that symbolic reference, at least in human symbolisms, is generally a two-way affair in which the symbol and the symbolized are frequently interchangeable, a situation that suggests a reciprocal interaction between secondary (poetic) imagination and the social or cultural aspect of symbolizing.16

Insisting on the imaginative factor in the projection of sense -- objects in no way implies that they are illusory -- a consideration that everyday life gainsays, since often fatal material consequences ensue from representing things wrongly. The possibility of error in imaginative activity also indicates that the mode of presentational immediacy, which gives rise to that vivid but sometimes hallucinatory play of symbols that constitutes the sensory world, is secondary to the mode of causal efficacy. Acts of representing that result from perception in the latter mode give rise to the projection of images as conditioned acts of becoming. And inasmuch as no act of becoming is ever completely determined, it must always involve an element of self-determination. In one of his most important insights, Whitehead holds that "self-determination is always imaginative in its origin" (PR 245). Hence in so far as perceptions can be called emergent features of a self-determining activity, images can be called real (primary) imaginings.17

To summarize, the theory of symbolic reference supports the view of a percipient event as a working through of various (potentially creative) imaginative interpretations. As such it is always subject to errors that can be controlled but not governed entirely by practical and/or socially established evaluative or critical methods.18 The indispensable factor of interpretation in the dynamic processes of semiosis even leads to the idea that there is a generic form of imagination in physical becoming, in addition to a primary or radical form in human perception, a consideration that would indeed justify calling creativity the category of the ultimate, just as Whitehead maintains. The field of imagination at any rate is broad, ranging from automatic, instinctual, or reflex actions (in which the problem of meaning is virtually, but not entirely, non-existent), to more or less habitual modes of response to "natural signs," and rising ultimately to sophisticated conceptual activity and various poetic or secondary forms of meaning -- making in cultural and social significations.19 In the higher reaches of semiotic activity an increase in imaginative freedom is accompanied by a greater risk of error. Thus the variety and complexity of human cognitive activity is scarcely surprising, since this sort of activity requires balancing a multitude of factors that stem partly from private (subjective) feelings and Intuitions and partly from public institutions that are the final arbiters of legitimate modes of symbolizing.

At this point it is possible to distinguish roughly between the mystical and the mythical dimensions of rational understanding. The mystical element belongs to the category of the private or personal, while the mythical element belongs to the public. For it is only in the private dimension of experiencing that the (usually fleeting) realization can occur-the apercu that, as Whitehead puts it, "we are in the world and the world is in us" (MT 165). Indeed, in the Heraclitean picture I have sketched the world is the scene of a restless play of signs and symbols that, for its more sentient creatures, speaks as much through embodied minds as to them.20 The emphasized words, it is important to note, do not imply that meaning dissolves into a random series of conventional modes of symbolization and interpretation. Semiotic activity in general aims to make meanings palpable, often in a literal sense. The world is a bath of signs, many of which carry practically useful, indeed vitally important, information about the spatiotemporal configurations of events in the immediate environment.

Referring to the relatively stable, common or garden "sense-data" which certain forms of minding produce (in their encounters with "nature-in-the-raw"), Whitehead observes that "We enjoy the symbol, but we also penetrate to the meaning. The symbols do not create their meaning: the meaning, in the form of actual effective beings reacting upon us, exists for us in its own right. But the symbols discover this meaning for us (S 57, emphasis added),21 a remark that recalls Wittgenstein’s famous conclusion of his Tractatus Logico-Philosophicus: "Not how the world is, is the mystical, but that it is"; except that the how of world-making, if it is ultimately dependent on imaginative interpretations of signs or symbolisms, becomes every bit as mysterious as the fact that it is. The putatively solid and objective display of "outward appearances," in which hard-headed empiricists place so much trust, is only a partly reliable compendium of more or less standardized interpretations of "natural" signs. But since human beings usually deal with symbols (i.e., signs that already bear the imprints of prior interpretations), empirical observations become more or less complete instances of symbolizings that are inherently subject to reinterpretations. Thus there is an intrinsic ambiguity in the categories of the mental and the physical and a certain arbitrariness, as well as mystery, in cognition. Indeed, "it is a matter of pure convention," says Whitehead, as to which of our experiential activities we term mental and which physical" (S 20).

Whitehead is often quoted as saying that western philosophy is a series of footnotes to Plato. Since Plato is often cited as the source of the sharp separation of the sensible and the intelligible that has preoccupied subsequent generations of philosophers, it is hard to overestimate the significance of Whitehead’s footnote. He helps show that a variety of forms of imagination is required to bridge the chasm opened up by Plato between the sensible and the intelligible, a bridging that must take into account a large number of fundamental polar contrasts involved in the contrast of physical-mental?22 Given the obscurity of imagination, it is not easy to see why natural philosophy could be anything but an attempt to rationalize mysticism.

IV. On "Naturing," "Culturing," and Myth

I have argued that a natural philosophy that begins with the assumption that certain fundamental bipolarities are indissociable at once demythologizes a badly mythologized rationality and opens the door to a mythopoeic component in the elucidation of experience. It also begins with what is almost a truism among non-philosophers: experience is inescapably "messy." Experience is always moulded by events, forces and symbolisms stemming from a variety of sources, including private and public histories, -- competitive and cooperative inclinations, natural and socio-cultural imperatives. Even our most seemingly direct encounters with nature cannot be excluded: that peculiar red in the sunset is neither part of the permanent outer" fixtures of the world nor a product of rule-governed "inner" constructions. Rather it is emblematic of what is manifestly possible in human experiencing; not imposed upon the world by minds so much as precipitated in embodied acts of minding.

That an animal body is first and foremost a society (as Whitehead reminds us) is a useful indicator that every rationalization of experience depends at bottom on a more or less happy conjunction of "naturing" and "culturing." For we have arrived at what appears to be the most general and indissociable of polarities. All acts of "naturing" (or "raw" sensing) and "culturing" involve an amalgam of (to use Castoriadis’s terms) "radical imagination" and "a social instituting imaginary." The latter notion provides the essential public or social counterweight to radical imagination since, as Castoriadis points out, the proper contrast to society is not the individual -- every individual is a product of social forces -- but rather the singular psyche.23 Thus the contrast of psyche-soma in the mindings of a singular individual evokes a parallel contrast of society-psyches. And analogous to the indissociable contrast of soma and psyche at personal levels of representing is a like indissociability in the contrast between the "body" or institutions of a culture and its "collective soul." Thus the functions of radical imagination and the radical social instituting imaginary are closely interdependent, which perhaps explains why the latter notion has been, says Castoriadis, "totally ignored throughout the whole history of philosophical, sociological, and political, thought" (RI 136).

Just as the radical imagination refers to the "substance" of singular psyches, a radical instituting imaginary refers to the peculiar "soul" of a culture. But here a recognition of an intermingling of the singular and the plural seems necessary since even the innovative mindings of a singular psyche are inevitably part of an enculturated struggle to formulate adequate symbolisms to express the relations between an "I" and a "We." The putatively unique "I" of a singular psyche, conceived as a dynamic sequence of private acts of representing, is in any case only a sequence of abstractions -- there is no such thing as a whole and completed "now" of an isolated Self. Singular psyches are better conceived, in the view I have been sketching, as fleeting nodes in a multi-layered semiotic network whose connectivities are both ensured and characterized by shared modes of symbolization, or signification, such as language supplies.24 Here the "We" often claims the last word, but so long as some vestige of radical imagination remains, singular psyches are not subservient to public customs, institutional definitions, entrained instincts, ingrained habits, and soon. As poets and artists continually remind us, many acts of representing are inherently creative and thus capable of transcending established modes of representing.

Transcendence is a tricky notion, however, and requires qualification, for the world is also partly at the mercy of its representing creatures whose activities, at least in the case of "higher" organisms, can have an integrative or a disintegrative effect. There is no lack of evidence in this century alone that imagination does not always lead to happy outcomes. This existential truth is re-acknowledged in every assertion that freedom goes hand in hand with responsibility.

Responsibility at the private level of minding belongs to the order of feelings, yet at the public or social level the topic of responsibility leads to that of myths, for every society is self-creating. Thus what Castoriadis calls "social imaginary significations" resonates with the idea of myth in the large sense of the word, since these significations, he notes, shape the society just because they shape the psyches of individuals. That is to say, they create "a ‘representation’ of the world, including the society itself and its place in this world . . . [which] is far from being an intellectual construct" (RI 152). They make a society a being for itself. So while societies are free creations, and thus creations ex nihilo, they are neither "creations in nihilo, nor cum nihilo... They are creations under constraints" (RI 149). This suggests that a culture is an evolving process in which primary modes of signification emerge under constraints and eventually become embodied (or perhaps ossified) in its institutions.

What powers, one wonders, more potent than myths could enforce constraints at the cultural level? In respect to social significations, meaning -- making and evaluative judging (in various art-forms, rituals, ceremonies, political organizations, and so on) are ultimately informed by all our attempts to understand. Myths, as Frye puts it, tell us "why we are here and where we are going" (WP 23). Thus myths express what a society is trying to make of itself, for better or for worse. It seems to follow that, just as a dominant philosophical imaginary governs the quality of understandings of the world, so the myths that inform a self-creating social imaginary must delimit what that society can as well as should make of itself, while leaving certain possibilities open. A social instituting imaginary may therefore be regarded as good and/or healthy (as well as free and responsible) just to the extent that it fosters the creation and preservation of myths incorporating "beneficial" insights in its processes of self-creation; that is, ideas that are "right" enough to enable long-term harmonies in its "naturings" and "culturings." Without doubt the meanings of "right" and "beneficial" are obscure and controversial, but it makes just as much sense to speak of better or worse social instituting imaginaries as it does to speak of better or worse metaphysical imaginaries.

My conclusion is that the natural philosopher must strive to become as much mythologist as (to use Whitehead’s phrase) "critic of abstractions" (SMW 87). The truly creative ones, like Whitehead, are also creators of mythopoeic concepts.25 This requires facing up to certain political responsibilities, assuming that the general aim is to improve our collective understanding of and attitudes towards each other and towards nature. As Whitehead maintains, the function of reason ideally is "to promote the art of life" (FR 8), a function whose dependence on a sense of responsibility becomes increasingly evident as human beings, the self-styled rational animal, become (with much help from science) ever more globally powerful. Hence the growing environmental crisis is reason enough to locate myth at the center of rationality. Yet this re-centering yields no paradox of rational thought, nor does it lead to a conflict with science. There can be no doubt that science is an impressive monument to the powers of human imagination. But uncritical proponents of the scientistic ideology (and the myth of scientific superrationality) steadily subvert our understanding of this world by ignoring the extent to which it is itself an ideology supported only by a dubious myth. Hence the aptness of another of Whitehead’s maxims: "As we think, we live" (MT 63), which could serve as a guide for natural philosophers bent on sailing into the stormy intersection of nature and culture – "As we think about the imaginative dimensions of our world-makings, so we will live."

 

Notes

1. Whitehead concisely sums up the situation: "we must grasp the topic in the rough, before we smooth it out and shape it" (MT 6). I examine this idea from a number of angles in my Myths of Reason: Vagueness, Rationality, and the Lure of Logic (Atlantic Highlands, NJ: Humanities Press International, 1995), and discuss the Kantian project to delimit a precise domain of rationality in my "On the Poverty of Scientism, Or: The Ineluctable Roughness of Rationality," Metaphilosophy 28 (1997), 102-122.

2. E.A. Burtt, The Metaphysical Foundations of Modern Science (Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1954), 16-17.

3. See Social Text 14 (1996) for a sample collection of essays on the so-called "Science Wars" the ongoing polemics between the critics of science and its apologists who think that "culturist" critiques of science are attempts to spread unreason.

4. See, e.g., 5MW 16: "Science has never shaken off the impress of its origin in the historical revolt of the later Renaissance. It has remained predominantly an anti-rationalist movement based upon a naive faith .... Science repudiates philosophy. In other words, it has never cared to justify its faith or to explain its meanings; and has remained blandly indifferent to its refutation by Hume."

5.He says, for instance, that "The father of European philosophy, in one of his many moods of thought, laid down the axiom that the deeper truths must be adumbrated by myths" (MT 10).

6.This primary empirical consideration, which affirms the importance of the mind-body distinction, is strongly contested, says Searle, by "the professionals in philosophy, psychology, artificial intelligence, neurobiology, and cognitive science" ("Consciousness and the Philosophers," The New York Review of Books [March 6,1997],43-50). Indeed, "the history of mind over the past one hundred years has been in large part an attempt to get rid of the mental by showing that no mental phenomena exist over and above physical phenomena" (43).

7.This consideration is systematically ignored in various attempts to link, for instance, the intricacies of quantum theory to conscious phenomena.

8.Cf. Charles S. Peirce who observes that "just as we say that a body is in motion, and not that motion is in a body, we ought to say that we are in thought and not that thought is in us" (CP 5.289). This remark is consonant with Whitehead’s observation that "mind is inside its images, not its images inside the mind…" (Quoted by W.E. Hocking, "Whitehead On Mind and Nature," The Philosophy of Alfred North Whitehead, edited by P.A. Schilpp [New York: Tudor, 1951],383-404, esp. 385). In so far as minding is not a direct confrontation with actualities, but is rather a process dealing with floods of possibilities, the semiotic imagery is highly appropriate since signs, as Peirce insists, belong to the order of possibilities. I explore these points in my Myths of Reason, especially Chapter 6.

9. The emphasis on possibility is important since even the "solid" objects of the world can be understood as (to adopt Mill’s phrase) "permanent possibilities of sensation."

10. Whitehead is explicit about his debt to Heraclitus in his choice of the pivotal metaphor of process. He remarks, for instance, that "the flux of things is one ultimate generalization around which we must weave our philosophical system" (PR 208). Furthermore, "no entity can be divorced from the notion of creativity" (PR 213).

11. Luigi Romeo, ‘Heraclitus and the Foundations of Semiotics," Frontiers in Semiotics, ed. By John Deely, Brooke Williams, and Felicia Kruse (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1986), 224-234, esp. 232.

12. Romeo, "Heraclitus and the Foundations of Semiotics," 233. Romeo links this fragment to Diels 116: "Every human being has the faculty not only of knowing himself but also of reasoning rightly."

13. Referring to an assumption held by both Hume and Kant, Whitehead observes that "what is already given for experience can only be derived from that natural potentiality which shapes a particular experience in the guise of causal efficacy" (S 50). Here he stresses the role of the body, for in the mode of causal efficacy, "the almost instantaneously precedent bodily organs" impose their characters on the experience in question.

14. Cf. Peirce who describes an interpretant of a sign as "a feeling produced by it," thus closely linking the interpretation of a sign qua possibility (or mere potentiality) to a peculiar quality of feeling that is, to what is simply felt. See, e.g., CP 5.475.

15. The description of the action of symbolic reference recalls the Kantian synthesis, for symbolic reference is a "synthetic activity" that "fuses" the two modes of perception into one perception to yield ‘what the actual world is for us" (S 18). In this process, appearances are mediated by "colors, sounds, tastes, etc., which can with equal truth be described as our sensations or as the qualities of the actual things which we perceive. These qualities are thus relational between the perceiving subject and the perceived things," where the perceived things "are actual in the same sense as we are" (S 21-22).

16. Whitehead remarks, for instance, that symbolism "is inherent in the very texture of human life" (S 61-62).

17. The point is consistent with the fact that imaging does not always require the stimulation of "external" influences, as is evidenced aplenty in dreaming.

18. Symbolizing ultimately refers to valuations: "The object of symbolism is the enhancement of the importance of what is symbolized" (S 63).

19. The importance of imagination throughout the organic realm is indicated wherever organisms manifest a capacity for error (as when a fish is deceived by an artificial fly). As Whitehead observes, "symbolic reference is still dominant in experience when ... mental analysis is at a low ebb" (S 19). But as we descend the organic scale there is less and less conceptual analysis. In regard to the most primitive forms of organization, Whitehead stresses the fact that a society "bends its individual members to function in conformity with its needs, so that symbolic reference gives way to vast systems of inherited symbolisms that result in automatic or reflex action" (S 73). Here we see why an ontology based on the metaphor of habit rather than law or mechanical action and reaction is superior for describing the order in nature.

20. Peirce usefully distinguishes between signs and symbols, the latter referring to the conventional side of the semiotic activities of human organisms. He also suggestively remarks that the entire universe "is perfused with signs, if it is not composed exclusively of signs" (CP 5.548n).

21. The emphasis is added. Thus images might well be called (to use Susanne Langer’s phrase) "the primitive symbols of ‘things’."

22. Given Whitehead’s concern to avoid what might be called the fallacy of polar divisions, his dismissal of S.T. Coleridge (in his references in Science and the Modern World to the revival of Berkeley’s protest by the romantic poets of the 19th century) is puzzling. Coleridge too believes it is essential to renounce the Cartesian temptation to divide (as opposed to distinguish) antithetical but interdependent fundamental notions, such as subject and object, and to insist that concrete experience demands that philosophy respect the unity of such polar distinctions. It is not hard to believe that Coleridge would have been highly sympathetic to, for instance, Whitehead’s remark that "In our direct apprehension of the world around us we find that curious habit of claiming a twofold unity with the observed data …. Our immediate occasion is in the society of occasions forming the soul, and our soul is in our present occasion. The body is ours, and we are an activity within our body" (MT 149). Such claims lend support to the notion of primary imagination, as well as to the importance of secondary imagination in philosophic understanding, and both ideas are urged by Coleridge in Biographia Literaria, especially Chapter XII.

23. "The true polarity is between society and the psyche (the psyche-soma)" (RI 148). There is therefore no avoiding the topic of society which is, as Castoriadis remarks, "an abysmal subject," an allusion that recalls the abyss from which Kant retreated.

24.According to Castoriadis, language provides the key to understanding how reason is able to connect the realms of "inner" and "outer." But a more semiotically oriented approach, which stresses not only the ability to verbalize but also the irrepressible human urge to symbolize in many different ways, is capable of accommodating the powers of words (as sophisticated, conventional symbols) to the powers of other, more universal, forms of symbolism, such as those of mathematics or art.

25. The natural philosopher’s mythopoeic task is perhaps best expressed by Emily Dickinson who enjoins poets to "Tell all the truth/but tell it slant." For it is just at the point where telling how things really are in this world is obliged to forgo descriptions in terms of material relations and begin to deal with the "inward" spiritual dimension that Frye’s observations become especially pertinent. He remarks, for instance, that ‘the spiritually conceptual is the ‘underthought’, or progression of metaphors underneath the explicit or ideological meaning . . . [since] every system of conceptual thought has a metaphorical and diagrammatic skeleton beneath it" (WP 120).

 

References

CJ John Rundell, "Creativity and Judgement: Kant on Reason and Imagination." Rethinking Imaginations: Culture and Creativity, edited by Gillian Robinson and John Rundell. London: Routledge, 1994, 87117.

CP Charles S. Peirce, Collected Papers of Charles Sanders Peirce. Volumes 1-6, edited by Charles Hartshorne and Paul Weiss; Volumes 7-8, edited by Arthur W. Burks. Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1960.

CPR Immanuel Kant Critique of Pure Reason, translated by Norman Kemp Smith. New York: Macmillan, 1965.

D John Sallis, Deliminitations: Phenomenology and the End of Metaphysics. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, second edition, 1995.

MC John R. Searle, "The Mystery of Consciousness," The New York Review of Books (November 2, 1995), 60-66. See also John R. Searle, "The Mystery of Consciousness: Part II," The New York Review of Books (November 16, 1995), 54-61.

RI Cornelius Castoriadis, ‘Radical Imagination and the Social Instituting Imaginary," Rethinking Imaginations Culture and Creativity, edited by Gillian Robinson and John Rundell. London: Routledge, 1994, 136-154.

WP Northrop Frye, Words With Power. Toronto: Penguin Books, 1992.

Influence as Confluence: Bergson and Whitehead

 

"Prior to the science of geometry, there is a natural geometry whose clearness and evidence surpass the clearness and evidence of other deductions."1

In this paper I take it as prima facie established that Professor Gunter is correct. Bergson placed a high importance on the role of the calculus for grounding contemporary science in an intuitive but rational way. Gunter is also correct, I think, is holding that what Bergson meant by "intuition" includes both qualitative and quantitative aspects. I take it as established that, for Bergson, calculus is more than just a handy metaphor or analogy, but rather, he indeed aimed at framing an approach to the organicist world hypothesis that employs the calculus as its actual method of discovery (i.e., differentiation) and explanation (i.e., integration), and that every discovery is the inverse of an explanation and every explanation the derivative of a discovery. And I take it as established that Hausman has shown a means whereby we can understand Bergson’s approach as both metaphorical and rational2 As I am certain the reader does, I have questions I would like answered in light of their important insights and these interpretations of Bergson, but the issue I will examine presently is how Gunter’s thesis and Hausman’s elaboration might affect our understanding of Bergson’s influence on Whitehead.3 The view of Bergson Gunter seeks to supplant is very widely held, and indeed was held, (if not really defended) until recently even by Professor Hausman (see the "Dialogue" below). In this regard Hausman found himself in good company: Mead, Whitehead, Russell (if that is good company), Santayana and Henry Nelson Wieman to name only a few, also saw Bergson as having sold out, to some degree, the conceptual, structural and/or rational element of thought for a more immediate and fluid grasp of pure becoming.4

I will expand upon Gunter’s investigation, then, specifically by posing and partially answering the question as to whether and how Bergson’s views on creativity and other related subjects have been taken up into Whitehead’s philosophy, and how the connection to the calculus helps us grasp something that was so obvious to Whitehead that he left it unstated. 5 I would then like to show how Gunter’s interpretation makes a difference to our usual way of approaching the relationship between the two thinkers. Along the way it will be necessary to gore a familiar ox or two; however, since my analysis points to the conclusion that Victor Lowe and those who follow him have understood the questions surrounding Whitehead and Bergson in terms too narrow to accommodate the whole truth in this matter, including Gunter’s thesis. It is time, I will argue, to revise Lowe’s thesis about Bergson’s "influence" on Whitehead.

I. Historiographical Levels

Taking an ordinary historiographical approach (and I want to question later whether this is wise for process philosophers), there are at least four lines we might take regarding Bergson’s influence on Whitehead’s philosophy each with increasingly less historical authority, in the traditional sense. Victor Lowe, who has written more about this issue than anyone else, insisted from the beginning that a very high standard of evidence ought to be adopted in investigating this question of historical influence. A vague similarity of ideas fails to establish "influence" of any kind, for Lowe. Indeed, Lowe insisted that if we wish to attribute a "decisive influence" of Bergson upon Whitehead (as many early interpreters of Whitehead did), this "requires evidence that [Whitehead] derived from [Bergson] either some of his problems or some of his essential solutions."6 Even though I do not agree that this standard of evidence is appropriate to the outlook of process philosophy I will indeed suggest some very specific problems and essential solutions that Whitehead almost surely "derived" from Bergson’s philosophy I am interested more in the issue of creativity than other ideas, but I think Lowe’s careful and valuable life’s work warrants a more thorough answer than a treatment of one counter-example. Naturally, the question about creativity is a special instance of the more general account which can be given of Bergson’s influence on Whitehead. I will focus on creativity to some degree, but as Gunter’s essay clearly illustrates, one cannot speak of Bergson’s account of creativity without bringing in the other central ideas related to it.

Initially, we can discuss matters at these three levels: (1) what Whitehead said himself about Bergson; (2) what those who knew Whitehead said on this matter; and, (3) what other well-informed scholars have said since. Actually a fourth and least authoritative line of inquiry might be added, consisting of (4) "Mere Rumors and Things Said by Bertrand Russell on this Subject" postmodernist readers may wish employ the same four lines of inquiry, and simply reverse the amount of attention given to each, and they might also add an account of the telling things that no one said or thought about Bergson and Whitehead. There is also a fifth, more detached, philosophical way of looking at these issues without appealing to "direct historical influence" as if it were some sort of causal connection as Lowe claims it is.7 Of course the fourth line and fifth lines are outside ordinary present-day historiographical research, excepting undergraduates in general education courses (who seem inevitably to find, in spite of the odds in a fair-sized library, Russell’s History of Western Philosophy first, and then cite it liberally). But the fifth line is highly controversial. Virtually all historians these days acknowledge the primacy of interpretation, and the role of philosophical assumptions in historiography, but many are (perhaps wisely) unwilling to give themselves over to philosophy as if history just is a sort of philosophy. I think no serious historian since Ranke has sincerely claimed to be able to translate "true history" directly onto the page, giving all the definitive causes of the events. But in spite of the intractable controversy over it, this fifth line may turn out to be the most fruitful approach of all for process thought (admittedly giving philosophy rather than history the central voice), even though some will say it is "unhistorical." I would assert that this last line may not turn out to be unhistorical if history is understood from a process perspective, rather than from a perspective embracing most of what was mistaken in the Enlightenment’s overly optimistic view of the power of human reason. In any case, leaving aside the fourth for future studies by undergraduates, let us examine each of these levels in turn and see what might be said for them.

II. In Whitehead’s Words

Whitehead says some remarkable things about Bergson, and a handful of Whitehead’s most important ideas are linked directly to Bergson’s philosophy explicitly. I want to mention here two of these ideas that are of a critical nature -- tools for criticizing the tradition -- and another that is more constructive. The critical ideas come first in Science and the Modern World when Whitehead is expressing his basic agreement with Bergson regarding the fallacy of simple location, and in that context he also introduces his notion of the fallacy of misplaced concreteness. He simply attributes the former idea to Bergson.8 With respect to the latter, Whitehead senses that there may be some disagreement between him and Bergson, in that Whitehead thinks Bergson believes that "such distortion [as results from the intellect abstracting] is a vice necessary to the intellectual apprehension of nature."9 Hence, while Whitehead and Bergson share a suspicion about the over-intellectualization of reality Whitehead thinks Bergson is committed to some sort of necessity about this "built-in" to the nature of the human intellect. Whitehead later made his view about this even clearer (quoted below), and it suggests a criticism that Bergson has been burdened with ever since he wrote Creative Evolution that the intellect necessarily distorts reality by spatializing it -- precisely the criticism Gunter and Hausman have now laid to rest. This is not exactly what Whitehead said above, but it is what he means.

Beyond what Gunter and Hausman have already said, what may be said in Bergson’s defense, explicitly as it applies to Whitehead’s version of the criticism? This is actually important to understanding Bergson’s influence on Whitehead. A standard approach to historical influence would almost certainly take the view that if Whitehead misunderstood Bergson regarding certain points, as I think he did, then how can Bergson have "influenced" Whitehead regarding those points? If the two thinkers end up to be actually advancing the same ideas, even when the latter believes he is disagreeing with the former, is this "influence"? But this question presupposes a very narrow sense of "influence." Provocation, even if it is based on misunderstanding, is a defensible sense of the term "influence," although it is not, taken alone, the meaning best suited to process thought. It is clear that "divine lure" is also an important sense of the term "influence" that interpreters like Lowe seem unwilling to entertain at all in their accounts.10 But I think another sense of the term is most appropriate and useful here. Let me answer Whitehead’s charge against Bergson, and in the course of this, and the ensuing discussion, I think I can suggest a sense of the term "influence" that is not only appropriate to this case, but to many process-oriented histories.

Did Bergson hold that the intellect "necessarily" spatializes and thereby distorts all that it "knows"? Gunter and Hausman have already done much to suggest that spatializing is not to be equated strictly with distortion and falsification of reality, but they said nothing about "necessity." For Bergson, like many process thinkers (Peirce, James and Dewey come particularly to mind), the entire concept of "necessity" only makes sense when applied internally to abstractions the intellect has already devised.11 Of course, one can tell an evolutionary story about how the human intellect came to be a separable function of consciousness that emphasizes abstraction (indeed, that is what Bergson does in Creative Evolution), but if one were to say that the course of development described in that story had to occur (i.e., necessarily) as it did, then one would be very far from Bergson’s view (CE 218, 236, 270). Not only is the development of consciousness into intellect contingent in the evolution of the cosmos, the precise form it took was utterly unforeseeable, and the story one tells about it is always revisable in light of future emergences (as Hausman has so effectively argued). And if there is no metaphysical necessity in the process by which intellect came into concrete existence, and none in the story one tells about that process, then how can any of the features or modes of the intellect (e.g., that it distorts reality) be treated as having any greater necessity? Granted, we might say that the proposition "if x is an intellect, then x distorts reality by spatializing it" is an analytical truth akin to "if x is a bachelor, then x is unmarried," and Bergson would even accept this (CE 270), so long as we are simply drawing implications about things we have already defined.12 But Bergson does not treat any definition as unrevisable, absolute or permanent. The necessity in the analytical formulation above is merely internal and logical and derives from the way the intellect has already defined the concepts it is using. Are those definitions the only possible ones? No, not for Bergson. Are any terms and definitions adequate to the phenomena they strive to capture? Logically adequate perhaps, when viewed as internal to a system the intellect has already devised, but never metaphysically adequate. And logical adequacy seems to depend on something like integration and differentiation. Metaphysics for Bergson strives to minimize the mediation of all symbols (like words and concepts), and although metaphysics "claims to dispense with symbols," it cannot dispense with them entirely.13 Hence, since it requires reflection and articulation (in spite of being based on intuition) metaphysics will always be required to genuflect at the door to the sanctuary of the intellect (even though the immediacy of Being, analogous to the Holy Spirit in a Christian sanctuary is supposed to be present in intuition), and it is in the moment of genuflection that the idea of logical necessity infiltrates metaphysics and becomes an unhappy resident alien. But there is no such thing as pure metaphysical necessity for Bergson; only instances of people forgetfully importing logical necessity into our discussions of metaphysics. The whole notion of descriptive metaphysics, such as we find worked out in Whitehead, Dewey, and Bergson is an effort at the deportation of that resident alien.

Yet, one must assume that the claim we are considering -- that the intellect necessarily distorts reality by spatializing it -- is supposed to say more than "intellect is defined as a mode of consciousness that distorts reality by spatializing it." The point I think Bergson’s critics are trying to make is "Bergson holds that the cosmos is such that necessarily nothing recognizable as intellect can ever grasp anything real without distorting it through spatialization." But as we have seen, Bergson denies (at least in the works that could have influenced Whitehead) that there is any metaphysical necessity like this. He is describing the intellect, not prescribing first principles when he says the things that have led to this misinterpretation. If we ask whether there could be a sort of intellect that abstracts without at least partially distorting, I think Bergson would reply that we have no experience of anything like that, and any such idea would be highly speculative and would risk missing the meaning of the terms "intellect," and "abstraction," since these terms are employed based on an experience we really have. Would an intellect that can abstract without partializing still be recognizable as an intellect? "Who knows?" That would be Bergson’s measured response, I am confident. Gunter and Hausman have already defended Bergson against this sort of charge, but for the moment I simply take Whitehead to be mistaken in thinking that he and Bergson disagree regarding "necessity" in the intellect’s distortion of what it apprehends. Beneath this apparent difference is agreement between Bergson and Whitehead that all products of the mind are partial and do distort the wholes (to which they correspond) by presenting a part for the whole.14 Abstraction is just such a useful distortion.)15 And indeed, we may say this for all mental activity for Whitehead, since it is a "reversion" that is the undoing of the synthesis exhibited in the ground.

Thus in the birth of the mental occasion the consequent of ideal novelty enters into reality and possesses an analytic force over against the synthetic ground. Ideal forms thus synthesized into a mental occasion are termed concepts. Concepts meet blind experience with analytic force. Their synthesis with a physical occasion, as ground, is the perceptive analysis of the blind physical occasion in respect to its degree of relevance to the concepts. 16

In any case, at least the fallacy of simple location, and in part the fallacy of misplaced concreteness, two of Whitehead’s most important critical ideas, arise from and are explicitly attributed to Whitehead’s reading of and engagement with Bergson’s philosophy.17 Indeed, these two critical ideas about failings in the history of philosophy are addressed by both Bergson and Whitehead with the same twofold strategy: (1) a common method designed to minimize the distortion that enters into our metaphysical descriptions while allowing us still to generalize (extensive abstraction); and (2) a common descriptive postulate or tool (the epochal occasion). We shall have occasion to say more about these later, when we examine Victor Lowe’s claim that Bergson had no epochal theory and the method of extensive abstraction was alien to Bergson’s thinking, but for the moment, we must concede that Whitehead does not explicitly credit as a source Bergson for these two features of his philosophy. Indeed, one finds in others whom Whitehead read, such as James Ward, similar ideas about epochal occasions. But extensive abstraction seems peculiar to Bergson and Whitehead, and a moment’s pause ought to convince the reader that the only sort of metaphysician who needs something like extensive abstraction as a method is one who wants to retain the operations of the intellect in the extended (i.e., concrete) world. I remind the reader of a passage from Gunter’s essay above:

Bergson believes that the chemicals, energies, and physical principles without which life could not exist are misconstrued by us as being perfectly spatial, not as possessing degrees of spatiality (i.e., as characterized by their "extensity"). It is thus easy to understand the extent to which these factors, extensive and durational, could be believed by Bergson to be brought together into forms possessing broader durations. (283-284)

The broader the duration, the more an entity can take account of its history in its unfolding, and the more its history is taken account of in its present, the more "conscious" a concrete entity can be. As Gunter says:

Matter possesses a kind of history. But it is the history of an unbecoming:

. . . changes that are visible and heterogeneous will be more and more diluted into changes that are invisible and homogeneous, and . . . the instability to which we owe the richness and variety of the changes taking place in our solar system will gradually give way to the relative stability of vibrations continually and perpetually repeated (CE 243). (272)

This process results in a continual extension of matter into space (CE 203), a process never completed. There are, therefore, "degrees of spatiality" (CE 205) in nature. As matter descends towards space, it becomes more homogeneous, its successive moments become less mutually continuous, its stability increases. But if matter "stretches itself out in the direction of space (CE 207), it never reaches this limit.

Thus, extensive abstraction for Bergson (although Bergson did not call it this), as for Whitehead, is an effort to describe how consciousness is concretely in the physical world and is taking account of it in its "route." The spatialization of the things a mind is thinking about and the actual concrete process by which a mind does what it does have to be kept distinct, and yet the process of conscious thinking does give rise to the product, i.e., thought. Mind has thus a spatial aspect which distorts the real in spatializing it, and an aspect which is part of the real, i.e., extended in both space and time. So extension is not to be identified with space in Bergson and Whitehead.

Although Whitehead never credits Bergson explicitly with these insights, it is clear that thinkers within a process framework are the ones who are obliged to come up with a solution to this sort of problem, while more traditional thinkers do not often or ever worry about the ways in which the intellect distorts reality by subsuming it in a spatialized conceptual scheme, or how the concrete process of thinking is distinct from thought. In short, one must decide that simple location and misplaced concreteness really are fallacies before such a method as extensive abstraction or a metaphysics of epochal occasions will recommend themselves. As I have suggested, Whitehead says he takes the critical ideas from Bergson. Does it not make sense to suppose that the ordered pair of the criticism and its solution are both plausibly due to Bergson’s influence? But since it is apparent that Whitehead did not realize he and Bergson agreed on this point about the spatializing effects of intellect, the sense of the term "influence" will have to be broader than "conscious, causal imitation of an idea." So much for a discussion of the two critical ideas.

The constructive idea Whitehead says he has taken from Bergson is even more central to his project. It is the idea of "process" itself. In The Concept of Nature, Whitehead writes:

It is an exhibition of the process of nature that each duration happens and passes. The process of nature can also be termed the passage of nature. I definitely refrain at this stage from using the word "time," since the measurable time of science and of civilized life generally merely exhibits some aspects of the more fundamental fact of the passage of nature. I believe that in this doctrine I am in full accord with Bergson, though he uses "time" for the fundamental fact which I call the "passage of nature."18

Hence, in a very- real sense, even though Whitehead popularized the term "process philosophy," Bergson is closer to being its source.19 This key acknowledgment of direct historical "influence" seems difficult to evade, and one would play it down only if one had serious reasons. And indeed, when Lowe set out to refute the idea that Whitehead was a Bergsonian, I think Lowe had serious reasons. Lowe wrote his major work on Bergson’s influence on Whitehead at a time (1949, right after Whitehead’s death) when Whitehead’s originality as a thinker was not taken for granted, as it is today. Indeed, Lowe contributed significantly to establishing the reputation of "original thinker" for Whitehead. Bergson on the other hand had come to he seen as yesterday’s news in 1949, his "vitalism" (never a good name for his view, in my thinking) was out of favor, and was held by many to have been discredited by later developments. In science, Lowe may have even held some of these negative views about Bergson himself, but without seeking to divine his motives, it is safe to say that a reasonable person might well have come to believe, under such circumstances, that the survival of Whitehead’s thought might depend on getting some distance between Whitehead and Bergson. And who knows? Maybe that was true.

Yet, subsequent science has not been nearly as unkind to Bergson as the positivism of the mid-20th century was.20 And today we no longer need to throw the passengers and cargo overboard to save the ship of Whitehead’s thought from the stormy vicissitudes of history. Thus, we no longer need to adopt a strategy of dismissing what Whitehead says in print about his own "influences" for his own good. If we were going to be responsible historiographers of the contemporary sort, we might be far more suspicious of Lowe dismissals of Bergson than of Whitehead’s acknowledgments of Bergson influence (see below). Methinks Professor Lowe protesteth too much.

Furthermore, given the centrality of the concept of "process" to Whitehead’s view of creativity; the appropriate procedure for discovering its provenance seems to recommend that a philosopher or intellectual historian would do better to assume similarity in viewpoint except where explicit differences can be made out between the two thinkers. This notion of influence as confluence is a process notion, and traceable to Bergson. The idea is clearer In French, where a reflexive verb form may be employed. Judith A. Jones has noticed this in comparing Bergson and Whitehead on the matter of the "psychical" experience of duration. In that context she quotes a helpful passage from Sartre’s L’Etre et le neant:

. . . cette durée psychique qui ne saurait être par soi doir perpétuellement être etée. Pérpetuellement oscillante entre la mutiplicité de juxtaposition et la cohésion absolue du pour-soi ek-statique, cette temporalité est composée de <maintenant>, qui out gui demeurent i La place qui leur est assign&, mais gui s’influencent à distance dans leur totalité; cest ce qui la rend assez semblable à la durée magique du bergsonisme.21

Jones goes on to comment:

. . . the individual atomic actuality is a temporally reiterated subject-object whose locations cohere as "one" despite their physical "distance" from one another as absorbed in other things. The way in which the reflexive verb is presented in the French suggests a tighter, internal immediacy than what we may be tempted to read into the English . . . "s’influencent" sounds much less like an actual multiplicity than does the phrase "influence each other."22

If we generalize Jones’ insight here, recalling such familiar process phrases as "mutual immanence," we recognize that issues of "influence" are also issues of "confluence," which is the English word I would choose for "s’influencent." It is a more immediate relation than causation, and yet immediacy is not to be confused with physical contiguity. Confluence has to do with a simultaneity of mutual influence, and I suspect it has much in common with what the Jungians mean by "synchronicity," but without the air of self-important mysticism. This notion of "influence" profoundly affects our efforts at historical interpretation. Lewis Ford summarized nicely what will result from treating influence as confluence, although I confess to appropriating his words to ends and views he has not endorsed: ". . . we should begin with the retention of everything past, and then explain what has been excluded. For example, it is not remembering that needs to be explained, but forgetting."23 By the same token, those who see influence as confluence are not so much expecting to explain how an influence occurred, since influence is the norm. Interesting questions surrounding modes of influence could be addressed here, but the real difficulty in addressing a problem of "influence" in my sense of the word would lie in trying to account for the absence of such influence in a given case. We assume Bergson and Whitehead’s "inluencent" and we would only have a problem were it otherwise. Then the important questions are all questions of modes and means of "s’influencent." The reverse procedure of assuming Whitehead and Bergson differ except where similarity’ is explicitly acknowledged, and perhaps not admitting influence even then (as Lowe argues) would seem to be a failure not only to take Whitehead’s explicit statements with adequate seriousness, but a failure to grasp something fairly basic about how process philosophy differs from previous philosophies, and how its historiography ought to proceed. I take Jones to be making a sound assertion, for example, in the following:

The quantitative aspect of intensity, whereby pattern is the primitive feature of existents, receives elaboration in regard to perception by Alexander and Bergson, in a manner that may certainly have influenced Whitehead, inspiring him at the same time to devise a revisionist scheme in which unnecessary distinctions between quantitative and qualitative patterns could be maintained by a firmer metaphysical grasp of the nature of intensity per se (particularly its ontological rescuability from infection by the notion of measurable extensive quanta).24

However, the question of "influence," even on this first level of what Whitehead explicitly says, is far more complicated than I can indicate here.

One of the many complications comes in the realization that, apparently, Whitehead did not understand Bergson as well as he might have, and thus, may have believed he was further from or closer to Bergson than he really was.25 In fact, Gunter’s thesis depends on this latter conclusion, since Whitehead’s stated view of Bergson is contrary to Gunter’s thesis about Bergson; hence, Gunter is wrong if Whitehead is right. And, if Whitehead is right, then he differs fundamentally’ from Bergson on this crucial point. However, if Gunter is right, then Whitehead has misunderstood Bergson, and may be closer to Bergson’s views than he realizes.

If the latter is the case, and I think it is, then it may be possible to reconcile many of the differences between the two thinkers with some creative interpretation, such that, whether they realized it themselves, Whitehead and Bergson were profoundly similar in basic philosophical outlook. But, in either case, assuming similarity of viewpoint where there is no stated difference is not to be taken lightly. Even the important, explicitly acknowledged similarities must be investigated and justified, and in turn, explicitly acknowledged differences might in fact be profound similarities. We now begin to see something of the true complexity of this issue, and the unstated implications of Gunter’s view. I do not believe Whitehead was so deeply enthralled by Bergson’s thought as to be extremely careful about getting the details right. At least one clear example of this carelessness about detail is evident above in the passage from The Concept of Nature where Whitehead say’s that he means by "the passage of nature" what Bergson means by "time." This cannot be correct because it is not sufficiently specific; what he probably means is "lived time," since the context makes it clear that he cannot mean "clock time." Still, it seems clear to me that Whitehead speaks in a more objective mode than is appropriate to any notion of time or duration one finds in Bergson (excepting clock time, which isn’t really time at all, but rather space). Yet Whitehead thinks he agrees with Bergson. This is a significant clue.

Another very significant clue is in Process and Reality, where Whitehead says that "Bergson’s ‘intuition’ has the same meaning as ‘physical purpose’ in Part III of these lectures."26 This is not a comfortable match at all since, as Sherburne puts it, "physical purposes tend to be terminal -- they inhibit further integration, are devoid of consciousness, and characterize the primitive sorts of actual entities that are members of the kinds of societies we term inanimate objects."27 This is hardly what Bergson means by intuition -- it is closer to the opposite of intuition -- and the fact that Whitehead says otherwise indicates a fair gap in his grasp of Bergson. While some might think at this point that a strenuous argument that Whitehead does not understand Bergson on certain key points is ipso facto damaging to the other claim I am defending (that Bergson’s "influence" on Whitehead was very significant). But again, I remind the reader that "influence" is not a simple idea, and provocation (even the provocation that comes from misunderstanding) is an important sense of the word "influence."

In addition to giving great praise,28 Whitehead also say’s very critical things about specific aspects of Bergson’s philosophy; and he sometimes seeks to distance himself from "Bergsonism" in general. Using Whitehead’s statements alone, however, we get no clear answer to the question of where he stands relative to Bergson, since Whitehead said different things at different times. Perhaps it would be best at this point, then, to examine the views of other philosophers who were close by -- those who knew Whitehead and were his contemporaries.

III. In the Words of Whitehead’s Contemporaries

Among Whitehead’s contemporaries we find two conflicting views. On the one hand, Victor Lowe (who was close by towards the end of Whitehead’s life, after all) represents those who held that Bergson and Whitehead really are very different in viewpoint, while F. S. C. Northrop represents those who held that Bergson’s influence on Whitehead was so great that it can hardly be exaggerated.29

Looking at Northrop first, he claims that the heaviest Bergsonian influence on Whitehead came through H. Wildon Carr, and the suggestion is that Whitehead may have been getting "Bergsonized" through a sort of historico-intellectual osmosis, rather than by a studied effort. Indeed, such "osmosis," as long as it is not made into a full-blown metaphysical being like an Hegelian Zeitgeist is a sounder metaphor with which to approach the idea of "influence" in process philosophy than the stricter causal account Lowe sought. I cannot offer any’ causal historical verification of this claim about "osmotic Bergsonization" of Whitehead, other than Northrop’s own admirable credibility and keen observation, and that of his contemporaries, but "verification" of the sort that assumes a causal interpretation of the concept of "influence" is not relevant to my thesis (if I am correct). What is called for is a description of the confluence of historical consciousness regarding certain ideas.

Northrop observed such a confluence, and held that Whitehead and Berg-son differed only on one major point of doctrine: he alleges that, for Bergson, spatialization in science constitutes a falsification of experience, while he thinks this is not the case for Whitehead.30 There are two problems with this claim by Northrop. We have visited this territory already in discussing Whitehead’s early interpretation of Bergson’s view of the intellect, which turns out to be not a difference of doctrine, but a misunderstanding on Whitehead’s part of Bergson’s view. And this point is also relevant to the charge made by Hartshorne and others that, unlike Whitehead, Bergson’s attachment in continuity leads him unwittingly to deny any definite units of reality.31 And second, Whitehead does hold that spatialization, such as conceptualization and quantification require, falsifies experience. So, in being generally right about the relation of Bergson and Whitehead, Northrop mistakes a similarity for a difference, and misinterprets Whitehead. But let me address each in turn, the latter first.

Whitehead’s mature statement on the matter of whether spatialization is a sort of falsification seems to equate all merely partial accounts of reality (e.g., spatializations) with distortions. Whitehead says: "To know the truth partially is to distort the Universe. For example, the savage who can only count up to ten enormously exaggerates the importance of the small numbers, and so do we, whose imaginations fail when we come to millions."32 I think it is fortunate under the circumstances that Whitehead chose to illustrate his point with a numerical example, since he certainly does not deny that numbers are abstract and that they spatialize our experience. And numbers do distort reality by partializing it. In Process and Reality Whitehead says:

On the whole, the history of philosophy supports Bergson’s charge that the intellect spatializes the universe; that is to say, that it tends to ignore the fluency, and to analyze the world in terms of static categories. Indeed Bergson went further and conceived this tendency as an inherent necessity of the intellect. I do not believe this accusation; but I do hold that spatialization is the shortest route to a clear-cut philosophy expressed in reasonably familiar language.33

At least three things are worth noting about this passage. The first is that Whitehead repeats the charge he made ten years earlier, and which I have answered above. Second is the affirmation of Bergson’s charge that spatialization is a partialization of experience. What seems to differ is the attitude the two men take towards this phenomenon. Whitehead thinks that Bergson believes spatialization is a really bad thing, which is wrong; an understandable conclusion, perhaps, but not accurate, as Gunter and Hausman argue, and I will further demonstrate below. The third noteworthy thing is that Whitehead misses something absolutely crucial about Bergson’s account of the intellect -- that intellect is an indispensable contributing factor in the development of intuition (the other needed condition being instinct), and that either one of these taken wholly alone would fail to produce knowledge of any sort.34 Only an intelligent being has any need of intuition.

Given that intuition is Bergson’s favored approach to knowledge, it would be very surprising indeed if we were to learn that Bergson despised one of its founding conditions, i.e., intellect, as a source of knowledge. If Whitehead had been cognizant of this he would have realized that Bergson does not condemn the intellect wholesale, nor the activity of spatialization. In fact, Bergson and Whitehead have very similar orientations and attitudes towards the activity of spatialization. Take the following passage from Creative Evolution:

To act and know that we are acting, to come into touch with reality and even to live it, . . . such is the function of human intelligence . . . From the ocean of life, in which we are immersed, we are continually drawing something, and we feel that our being, or at least the intellect that guides it, has been formed therein by a kind of local concentration. Philosophy can only bean effort to dissolve again into the Whole. Intelligence, reabsorbed into its principle, may’ thus live back again its own genesis. But the enterprise cannot be achieved in one stroke. . . .35

This is hardly the sort of talk one would expect from an enemy of intelligence (the product of the intellect). It is certainly true that, insofar as intelligence and its operations constitute only a partial reabsorption of life within its own genesis, to the extent it is partial, it distorts the actual process in trying to comprehend it. This is hardly an evil in Bergson’s views given that the operation of such intellectual forces is also a condition for acting freely; in the complete sense.

This brings us to the second problem with Northrop’s claim that Whitehead and Bergson differ on the matter of whether spatialization constitutes a distortion of our experience. Not only does Whitehead himself reiterate Bergson’s critical claim that the intellect over-spatializes, he also uses it as a principle of construction in his own philosophy. Whitehead agrees that partializations and distortions are a significant factor in all philosophizing, especially systematic philosophizing. Before laying out his own categoreal scheme he warns the reader that all such formal schemes are strictly speaking false, due to an irremediable partiality of formulation.36 He explains in the same context that the only’ reason a categoreal scheme is even needed is to prevent philosophers from thinking too much like mathematicians regarding the clarity; completeness and certainty of their activities.37 Bergson would heartily agree. A bit of critical distance on the amount we can expect to accomplish with our spatializations is the least we should require of ourselves as philosophers. Bergson and Whitehead are both fallibilists, who choose descriptive metaphysics over prescriptive or transcendental metaphysics, and if there is a disagreement between them on the question of how spatialization distorts our experience, it is a difference of degree, not of kind. I would support this claim by calling attention to a short piece Whitehead delivered before the Aristotelian Society in 1922:

What I really doubt is whether there is any term sufficiently comprehensive to embrace the ultimate concrete fact. It seems impossible to obtain a term with positive content which does not thereby exclude. Our analysis is always by way of abstraction, thus we have Bergson’s urge of life, Haldane’s knowledge, Berkeley’s mind, and so on. Some of these terms are better than otters as being less misleading, but they are all too narrow. Against the background of the becomingness of existence we can only project various abstractions which are the product of the differing modes of analysis.

The ages pass with splendid fires

Trailing along their shadowy tread.

Behind the curtain of the dead

Life sits alone and still desires.38

A more profoundly Bergsonian sentiment can hardly be imagined, even though it is here stated in Whitehead’s idiom. This also confirms the way that partializing the truth (as we find in science’s quantification of experience) is for both Whitehead and Bergson a kind of falsehood, albeit useful and needed.

Therefore, in light of this and Gunter’s arguments, I see no irreconcilable, or even significant difference between Whitehead and Bergson on the point raised by Northrop regarding spatialization and distortion. Aside from this point, Northrop is willing to embrace an almost total philosophical companionship between Whitehead and Bergson. This I take to support Gunter’s general position also, which tells of a more Whiteheadian Bergson than we are wont to think about (or is it just the Bergson who always was, and a Whitehead who was more akin than he realized?).

The story is quite the contrary in the case of Victor Lowe, however. In his much read study Understanding Whitehead, Lowe undertakes an abbreviated version of his earlier systematic contrast of Whitehead and Bergson in which he aims "to make it impossible . . . to look upon Whitehead as Bergson’s mathematically trained alter ego."39 Since few people read Lowe’s entire 1949 article in which the details of his argument are really presented, I will select a few of the key contrasts Lowe reprinted in Understanding Whitehead, which contains an abridgement of the 1949 article, in an effort to show that Gunter has really answered them already rendering Whitehead not so much Bergson’s mathematical alter ego,40 as something more approaching his philosophical blood brother 41 According to Lowe, however, "it is fatal to the understanding of Whitehead’s constructive metaphysical effort to define it in Bergsonian terms."42 I believe that many of Whitehead’s second and third generation followers may have used this statement and the seemingly authoritative argument which follows it as an excuse not to read Bergson closely, or in a few cases, to ignore him altogether.43

In contrast to Whitehead, Lowe accuses Bergson of coming close to "swab lowing Cartesian natural science whole."44 This statement exhibits an mischaracterization of Bergson so extreme it defies words; if ever there was a more persistent opponent of Descartes’ conception of natural science than Bergson, I do not know who it might be -- with the possible exception of Bergson’s process blood brothers -- Peirce, Dewey, James, Whitehead and Hartshorne.45 In Lowe’s defense it might be said that the eight or ten books that do the most to establish just how non-Cartesian, and indeed revolutionary Bergson’s view of science was were all published after Understanding Whitehead. But Lowe’s effort to characterize Bergson as a Cartesian (something even Lowe admitted was a bit unfair.46) is not to be taken seriously by those who wish to be faithful to the text.

Lowe goes on in this context to make the following statement: "Whitehead comes to metaphysics as a Plato-loving theorist who wishes to construct an all-inclusive cosmological scheme; Bergson as a half-Cartesian intuitionist cleanly and systematically setting off his own meditation from other types and areas of thought."47 This is almost Rorty-esque in its cavalier vacuity, especially given that if one removes the questionable rhetorical epithets "half-Cartesian" and "Plato-loving," one could then switch the names of the two thinkers and still have a more or less accurate statement of their respective views. Lowe’s intense and laudable desire to save Whitehead’s originality overruns his sober historical judgment here.

In his argument, Lowe repeatedly makes the same point about spatialization that Northrop made, and which I will not treat again. But Lowe also claims that Whitehead’s treatment of teleology is "un-Bergsonian." However, if one examines what Whitehead says on this matter in Process and Reality, one finds something rather near to Bergson’s expressed view in Creative Evolution. Bergson says that "finality" (choosing this word over "teleology") is one of the two kinds of "order" -- the kind that, while it "oscillates around finality," still cannot be strictly defined as "finality." He continues:

In its highest forms [this kind of order] is more than finality, for a free action . . . may. . . show a perfect order, and yet . . . can only be expressed in terms of ideas approximately, and after the event. Life in its entirety, regarded as a creative evolution, is something analogous; it transcends finality, if we understand by finality the realization of an idea conceived or conceivable in advance. The category of finality is therefore too narrow for life in its entirety.48

Whitehead says in Process and Reality that:

There are two species of process, macroscopic process, and microscopic process. . . . The former process is efficient; the latter process is teleological. The future is merely real without being actual; whereas the past is a nexus of actualities. . . . The present is the immediacy of teleological process whereby reality’ becomes actual. The former process provides the conditions which really govern attainment; whereas the latter process provides the ends actually attained.49

The vocabulary is different, but the analogy being set up (microcosm/macrocosm) has the same essential feature: the inadequately narrow scope of microcosmic teleological processes due to their dependence upon macrocosmic conditions which were not of their own making. Unless one regards Bergson as some sort of absolute enemy of finality (which is another common misperception -- unsupportable in the text),50 then one is not tempted to suppose that he makes no place for it in his view; perhaps as ample a place as Whitehead makes for teleology in his own view.

Lowe further claims that Whitehead’s and Bergson’s views of order and disorder are at odds. As evidence he cites a few pages from Creative Evolution saying that "Bergson repudiates the notion of disorder, and divides order into two kinds, vital and geometrical."51 With this statement he leads us to think that Bergson does not believe there is any such thing as disorder at all. All that Bergson really says is that we cannot know disorder without making it into an order of some sort first, and points out that the relation between the "two directions of order" is really a continuum that we distinguish on the basis of its extremes (completely free activity and geometrical mechanism, or integration and differentiation, to use the terms Gunter recommends) for the purposes of talking about this issue. After distinguishing the two directions of order in our thought, Bergson says:

Now, whether experience seems to us to adopt the first direction, or whether it is drawn in the direction of the second, in both cases we say there is order, for in the two processes the mind finds itself again. The confusion between them is therefore natural. To escape it, different names would have to be given to the two kinds of order, and that is nor easy, because of the variety and variability of forms they take. The order of the second kind may be defined as geometry, which is its extreme limit. . . . As to the first kind of order, it oscillates no doubt around finality; and yet we cannot define it as finality; for it is sometimes above, sometimes below.52

Whitehead would not disagree with this obvious epistemological point, and indeed, it is hard not to see in this Whitehead’s own distinction between causal efficacy’ and presentational immediacy. But interestingly, I think Gunter may have really provided the mater key to this difficult issue by seeing at its core the complementary processes of integration and differentiation. These are ways of speaking about processes, not the processes themselves, for both Whitehead and Bergson. While it is certainly true that Whitehead spends more energy on the metaphysical status of disorder than Bergson does, this hardly establishes a profound difference of viewpoint. And with a bit less rigid posture for reading the two thinkers, it seems fair to suggest an instance of influence as confluence here, and to remind the reader that one would really only need a historical explanation of this similarity if one were to claim that is not a case of influence.

Lowe’s next charge is that Bergson denies the intellect any access to "metaphysical penetration," completely ignoring the fact that intelligence is one of the necessary conditions for the advent of intuitive thinking (from which all metaphysics proceeds).53 This charge has been answered by Gunter, by Hausman, and earlier in this essay by me. We need no longer take this charge seriously.

Lowe claims that "Whitehead, by means of the method of extensive abstraction which he had invented, constructed the scientific concepts of space and time. The term refers to the observed extending of one event over another which is part of it."54 Lowe claims that Whitehead "had adopted a very’ un-Bergsonian approach: extension was to express the interconnectedness (both spatial and temporal) of nature, rather than -- as in the classical materialism which Bergson took to be correct in its own sphere -- disconnection only."55 Lowe claims Bergson has nothing like the method of extensive abstraction, which I have suggested earlier is not only false, but chances are Whitehead even took the idea for extensive abstraction from Bergson, apparently both having been "influenced" (in my sense of the term) by one of William James’ insights. Gunter says:

Thus, in Creative Evolution Bergson develops a theory already proposed in Mailer and Memory; namely, that matter is (a term proposed by William James) "extensive." It does not have pure spatial extension: it is neither as extended as geometrical space nor, simply, extra-spatial. "Extensity" is used to described nor only matter, but mind. Bergson denies that mind is entirely unextended, thus denying a Cartesian dogma which has dominated modern philosophy. Rather, Bergson argues, mind is dipolar.

This ought to lay to rest Lowe’s contention. But Gunter continues:

From the viewpoint of applied mathematics [Bergson’s] theory has obvious advantages As noted above, it gives an objective basis to counting (since there is a real aspect of discreteness to the epochs or rhythms). It also provides such a basis for measuring temporal breadths (e.g., frequencies), so long as these are taken not as absolutes but as quasi-discrete. Temporal boundaries would have also been taken as approximative, that is, as limits. The same would hold for spatial location and extent, and for motion. But for Bergson, these limits are strictly ideal. Taken in themselves (as mathematical points and instants) they do not exist.

This brings to mind Whitehead’s explicit embracing of Bergson’s notion of "limit" as "canalization" in The Principle of Relativity.56 Gunter continues:

This account of systematically approximative character of mathematical descriptions will doubtless appear familiar to readers of Whitehead. Both Bergson and the early Whitehead conclude that, to quote Whitehead, ". . . an abstractive set as we pass along it converges to the ideal of all nature with no temporal extension, namely, to the ideal of all nature at an instant. But this ideal is in fact the ideal of a nonentity."57 Though Bergson did not develop an elaborate theory’ of extensive abstraction, it is not surprising that he should have viewed Whiteheads The Concept of Nature, in which this theory’ is given its classic formulation, as "one of the most profound (works) ever written on the philosophy of nature."58 (279)

The issue of extensive abstraction is also tied up in the epochal theory of occasions, which was discussed earlier in this essay’. Lowe asks "What is there in Bergson’s thought that corresponds to the three conceptions -- of actual entity, prehension, and nexus -- with which Whitehead tries to assure the correctness of his own?" The fact is that Bergson does not hesitate to speak of matter as "elementary vibrations, the shortest of which are of very’ slight duration, almost vanishing, but not nothing."59 If that may pass as analogous to an actual entity; Gunter has supplied us earlier with the quotation which answers the remainder of Lowe’s rhetorical inquiry. There is a progression from these elementary vibrations, these ". . . beings that vibrate almost in unison with the oscillations of the ether, up to those that embrace trillions of these in the shortest of their simple perceptions."60 Here we have a prehending nexus of actual entities in mutual immanence if ever I saw one. I do not claim that Whitehead got the ideas of prehension and nexus from Bergson, but only influence as confluence -- the ideas are so closely analogous as to warrant the assumption of influence unless an account can be given that excludes the possibility’ of influence. Clearly Whitehead is more focussed on the pluralistic (i.e., differential) side of process, and Bergson more focussed on the monistic (i.e., integral) side, when it comes to some questions. Yet, just as Whitehead included both the Many and the One (along with Creativity, or in Bergson’s terms, elan vital) as the three "notions" which "complete" the Category of the Ultimate, Bergson answers with the same insight about categories:

Thus, intuition may bring the intellect to recognize that life does not quite go into the category of the many nor yet into that of the one; that neither. . can give a sufficient interpretation of the vital process . . . By the expansion of consciousness [intuition] brings about, it introduces us into life’s own domain, which is reciprocal interpenetration, endlessly continued creation.61

Here we have the one and the many treated as necessary but not sufficient conditions for understanding the vital. The extra condition needed for sufficiency is on-going creation, and if one adds that the vital is for Bergson the Ultimate, then the analogy with Whitehead’s first category is quite clean.62

Gunter spent his energy attempting to counter the charge that Bergson is hostile to the Many and is a mere apologist for the Eleatic One. In my estimation, he succeeds because in fact Bergson is no enemy of the Many; nor does Bergson fail to appreciate the influence of the Many upon Creativity. On this point, the failure of philosophers to understand Bergson thoroughly and sympathetically seems almost universal. It may seem at this point that I must have answered every charge Lowe made, but I have not. However, I believe the important charges have been answered, and although I expected to concede some things to Lowe’s position when I began researching this topic, I now believe every single charge can be answered, and that even without altering the concept of "influence" as I have done, the account I have given is more historically plausible than Lowe’s. I do not see a single argument Lowe has made regarding Bergson’s influence on Whitehead as beyond dispute, but I grant that Lowe’s work on Whitehead has been a great service to thinkers everywhere. Whitehead’s followers, who should (in my estimation) genuflect humbly before Bergson’s portrait and should deeply study his works, habitually do nothing of the sort. I do not claim that there are not important differences between the two thinkers, but understanding their differences is more complex than Victor Lowe thought. The best treatment of the differences between Whitehead and Bergson of which I am aware is one that acknowledges the full weight of Bergson’s influence, and then goes on to ask how and where these ideas were modified in the philosophy of the organism.63 Hartshorne, the author of that article, eventually concludes that "synthetic psychical creativity" is Whitehead’s most original insight; one not to be found in Bergson. Hartshorne does not, however, go on to make out systematically where Bergson might stand on this idea, and perhaps even here there is room for influence as confluence. That would be a worthwhile undertaking which unfortunately must be put off until another time. Hartshorne does, however, leave us with a statement of commanding authority about the relationship between Bergson and Whitehead on creativity:

. . .prehension is a radically one-way dependence of an actuality upon "antecedent" conditions, that is, temporally prior actualities prehending is a form of including, whereby reality is enriched, "increased" in multiplicity of factors. "The many become one and are increased by one." Reality is protean and cumulative, as Bergson said. If any Whiteheadian statement conflicts with this, then I think it is to be discarded. For the formula just quoted is said to characterize the "ultimate" principle. And if this principle goes, then I see nor much need for Whitehead.64

Still, my conclusion is that creativity for Whitehead is likely to be shallowly understood until creativity in Bergson is more deeply understood -- which it presently is not.65 Indeed, if Judith Jones is correct, Whitehead has left us without some of what we needed in order to give the full story; in particular:

. . . thought must ask itself: In what sense is something discriminated in any given method of abstraction (or, more importantly, any verbal designation) being conceived as possessing a mode of conceivable individuality or particularity that it has only because of its selection in thought as a numerically single item of consideration? This is the question Whitehead’s satisfactory completion of the conception of the commensurability of the two modes of analysis would have helped address. As it is, his own discussions are replete with references to things in the realm of the actual as individuated or individually conceivable in a manner that undermines his more careful recognition of the merely derivative status of numerical unity from forms of intensive unification. Thought not only tends to "spatialize," to use Bergson’s terms, it more fundamentally tends to treat its subject matters as numerically distinct in a manner that cannot help but distort the intensive character of unity as it is ontologically. Numerical unity is an abstract (i.e., it eliminates aspects of actuality) form of quantity that tends to infect any statement, because every sentence requires a subject that thereby purports to have an individual status that it may or may not. Whitehead’s exceedingly strong distinctions between subjective and objective dimensions of the transmission of feelings, and the final and efficient causality therein involved, fall into the category of this infection of thought by modes of discrimination between individually conceivable things or elements of things.66

Ironically, this would mean that, in fact, Whitehead is actually guilty of the error everyone associates with Bergson, while Bergson is a help to prevent the error, and what Whitehead left undone regarding "the commensurability of the two modes of analysis," Bergson may have accomplished in creating a version of the calculus neither committed to strictly quantitative nor strictly qualitative notions of unity, a method to be used in metaphysics. We have already seen that Whitehead did not grasp what Bergson was doing on this front, but it is at least debatable whether Bergson surpassed Whitehead regarding these issues, and Whitehead never caught up. 67

IV. Constructive Suggestions

Perhaps some writers would have the good sense to stop with what has been said, count themselves victorious and move onto the next victim. I cannot, however, justify to myself this exercise in criticism without making some constructive progress out of the effort. It is far easier to criticize than to create, and still easier to criticize a critic than to create a criticism of one’s own. If the reader will indulge me for a few pages more, I would like to offer some insights I have come upon as a result of this opportunity to ponder the thoughts of Gunter and Hausman, and to look with some systematicity at the relation of Bergson and Whitehead to science and mathematics. In many way’s the crux of what Gunter, Hausman and I have all been discussing boils down to what is to follow. When Dorothy Emmet considered the problem (and make no mistake, this is the problem with interpreting Bergson), she went back to A. E. Taylor’s formulation of it. Taylor formulates understandably the very problem regarding the relation of space and time that Bergson’s use of the calculus had answered, but fails to see how Bergson’s philosophy addresses it (precisely the issue Gunter has resolved). This is an extended quote, but addresses so perfectly the issue that it is worth reproducing in full. I ask the reader to bear in mind that in the development of calculus, the x and y axes of the Cartesian co-ordinate system are allowed to represent space and time respectively,68 and that the phrase "angular measurement" is simply used as synonymous with one of the major functions of the calculus:

. . . it seems a subordinate falsification of the facts to say, as Bergson apparently does, that the whole "distortion" effected by the intellect in its attempts to deal with time arises from the dependence of all measurement on the primary measurement of segments of straight lines. All measurement is not measurement of lengths on a straight line; there is a second most important measurement of intervals, independent of such measurement of lengths, the estimation of angles, or, what comes to the same thing, of ratios and arcs of circles to the whole circumference, In point of fact, it is by angular measurement that we habitually estimate temporal intervals, whenever we appeal to a watch or clock, and in the prehistoric past the first rough estimates of intervals within the natural day must presumably’ have been made, independently of measurement of lengths, by this same method, with the sky for clock-face. Measurement of temporal intervals is thus primarily angular measurement, and angular measurement Is, in its origin, independent of measurement of straight lines.69 It is true, of course, that when we come to the construction of a complete metrical theory, we find ourselves driven to establish a correlation between these two, originally independent, systems of measurement. For in practice I can only assure myself that two angular measurements are equal by reference to the circle, the one plane curve of constant curvature, and I satisfy myself that my curve of reference is a circle by’ ascertaining the equality of length of its diameters, and this is done by the rotation of the measuring-rod. This consideration suggests two observations. One is that the problem which has attracted Bergson’s special attention is not tightly conceived when it is spoken of as the translation of temporal into spatial magnitude, or the imposing of spatial form on the non-spatial. It is only’ one case of the more general problem of the "rectification of the circular arc," which, of course, meets us in metrical geometry itself, independently of any application to the estimation of temporal intervals. The only inevitable "deformation" which arises in connection with measurement, so far as I can see, is the element of approximation and error introduced when we attempt to find an expression for the length of an arc of a curve, and this "deformation," as I say, has no necessary- correlation with time. The difference between durée réelle and "mathematical" time must therefore be due to some other cause than the alleged artificial establishment of a correlation between temporal intervals and intervals on a straight line, It must come in already in the first attempt to apply angular measurement to temporal lapses, if it comes at all.70

Taylor at this point takes himself to be disagreeing with Bergson, but as Gunter has shown, he is making a point Bergson well appreciates and has addressed in his method itself. Taylor continues:

It should be further observed that the estimation of linear intervals themselves, apparently assumed by Bergson to be the special function of the intellect, and therefore to involve no difficulty or mystery, presents a real problem on its own account.72

We know now that Bergson does recognize the problem presented in suggesting that intuition is already involved in conceptual or reflective activity when it endeavors to grasp a time-span or an interval of duration, or lived-time. Taylor formulates the problem thus:

Measurements made with different straight lines as axes can only be compared if we presuppose that the rotation of a measuring-stick, or its transference from one point of application to another, either makes no difference to its length, or affects it in a way which we can precisely determine. If our measuring-rods can change length as they are turned through an angle, or carried from one place to another, and that to an unknown extent, there is an end of all comparison between segments of different straight lines. We have to postulate that our measuring-stick either remains of a constant length during the process of transference from one position to another, or, at any rate, that if it changes its length during the process, it does so in accord with some knowable law of functional dependence.73 For this reason, some reference to time would appear to be involved in any set of postulates of spatial measurement, The complication of space with time is thus more intimate than it would be on Bergson’s assumption that measurements primarily form an exclusively spatial framework into which duration is subsequently and, in fact, accidentally inserted, with a good deal of deformation, by the misguided "surface" intellect. This is what I had in mind in saying above that Bergson’s doctrine seems to me, after all, nor to get to the heart of the real problem.74

Taylor in fact expresses Bergson’s actual view as a criticism of the view he wrongly believes Bergson holds. But the important thing is Taylor’s solution to the dilemma:

It is just here, as I think, that the broad philosophical implications of the theory of Relativity come to our aid, and would still be forced upon us as metaphysicians, even if there were not well-known specific difficulties in the details of physical science, which seem to be most readily disposed of by the theory. The general implications of which I am thinking are, so far as I can see, independent of the divergences between the versions of "Relativity" advocated by individual physicists; their value as I think, is that they enable us to formulate the problem to which Bergson has the eminent merit of making the first approach in a clear and definite way, and to escape what I should call the impossible dualism to which Bergson’s own proposed solution commits him. So long as you think, as Bergson does, on the one hand, of an actual experience which is sheer qualitative flux and variety, and on the other of a geometrical ready-made framework of sheer non-qualitative abidingness, there seems to be no possible answer to the question how such a "matter" comes to be forced into the strait-waistcoat of so inappropriate a "form," except to lay the blame on some willful culpa originis of the intellect.75

We now know that Bergson does not dichotomize as Taylor believes, and does not try to solve the problem in the way Taylor claims. As Emmet notes, while surveying Taylor’s formulation of the problem, Taylor

. . . suggests that Bergson’s problem is answered by the theory of relativity, showing that it is impossible to locate an experience in time without reference to space. So the "geometrising" of the intellect consists in the cutting loose of location in time and space from each other, when in actual fact they are given together; though such separation in thought is necessary for communication. I do not feel certain that Bergson would accept this solution, or whether he would say that the time which is wedded to space is simply mathematical, spatialized time.76

Emmet’s hesitations are warranted, but this leaves us still with the question "how is space time and time space?" Or, otherwise put, "how is matter made vital in a process?" The question has two aspects, only one of which I want to address. The first aspect deals with the givenness to consciousness of spacetime and how thinking separates them. This is a question phenomenologists took on, and with reference to Bergson, especially what he says in Time and Free Will and Mailer and Memory. Both Sartre and Merleau-Ponty build on Bergsonian along with Husserlian foundations and succeed in answering, to a significant degree the questions surrounding this first concern.77 The second aspect is the metaphysical issue of the concrete relation of the vital and the inert (or being and non-being, if you prefer a traditional vocabulary), including the role of consciousness treated as "a substance spread out through the universe," to use Merleau-Ponty’s description of Bergson.78 In the first aspect we ask what consciousness does and what it experiences or "knows" as a result, while in the second we ask about the relationship between what consciousness is (in relationship to everything else that is) and what that has to do with what it does.79

On this second front I have a suggestion for thought and further study, a principle I propose to call "metaphysical divisibility" which I take to be an application of the insight about the inverse relation of integrals and derivatives articulated by Gunter. I will say more about this momentarily, when I have defined more rigorously the problem to which this is offered as a solution. Bergson argues that life is essentially a process of becoming, which involves three different movements: qualitative, evolutionary and extensive.80 As we have seen, all three are grasped intuitively and articulated intellectually. The process of articulating these movements places limits on the accuracy of the account, but a method of articulation that follows the example of the calculus is more adequate to the task than one that follows either a strictly geometrical and determinate method, or a strictly "active" or creative method. But how does this method help? What does it look like in use?81 I think "metaphysical divisibility" helps here.

Bergson illustrates in some of his most famous passages how the mechanism of our ordinary knowledge is a "cinematographical" one. Moving pictures create the illusion that actually stationary things (the individual pictures on the reel) are in spontaneous motion, and hence appear to be alive -- to partake in or be a part of the vital order. According to Bergson, the intellect, taken alone (i.e., apart from its connection to intuition and qualitative immediacy) gets knowledge from an analogous process, turning a series it treats as static mental data (analogous to the pictures on the reel) into an apparently living stream of consciousness that, following James, is really islands in a not wholly continuous stream, in terms of its being. Some therefore ask something like the following questions: "Bergson believes that the continuity of each event and each sequence of events in our concrete lives overlap(s) with others and are thus continuous, in the sense of their existence or being, while in our knowing or experiencing there is actual discontinuity -- some gap between the "frames" in the moving picture show of our intellectual processes, or something that makes the individual bits of data actually discrete; so does the nature of "continuity" somehow contain the vital energy and/or matter that creates the gaps or discontinuities in our experience? Surely one cannot create something that is not. But if there are no gaps in being, then even the discontinuities in our experience must have being, so what is that being? Is it matter or vital energy or something else?"

This question is important for Whiteheadians also, since they regard actual entities as discontinuous at least insofar as they are discrete entities. And indeed, this is a really difficult question for all process thinkers. Hartshorne has spent the better part of seventy years criticizing Peirce for giving the "wrong" answer to the question, for choosing continuity. The reason this question is so difficult for Bergson’s interpreters is that it depends on how one interprets what Bergson finally means by "matter," "vital energy," and "continuity." I am not certain that Bergson is entirely consistent in his accounts of these concepts or in his use of the terms, but I do think a basically consistent account can be given that aligns itself with the "spirit of Bergson," if not with every single sentence he wrote.

By "matter" Bergson means two main things. First, metaphysically speaking, he means whatever exists that is dead or inert. Second, epistemologically speaking, Bergson means by "matter" the way in which the intellect approaches all things (whether vital or inert) as if they were simply the sums of their parts -- parts that are subject to being disassembled and re-assembled in any order whatsoever to serve the abstract ends of the intellect itself or the purposes of the organism that intellect serves. "Matter" in this sense exists as the intellect’s infinitely malleable servant. In the epistemological sense, all things (living or dead) are reduced to their material aspect by an act of the intellect. Thus, "matter" has an epistemological and a metaphysical meaning; the latter is what it is, and the former is what we know of it by thinking about it. Note that the epistemological sense of the word aims to include by reference both that which metaphysically is matter, and anything that might be matter (and that means everything there is, unless something exists that cannot be matter), so the epistemological sense aims to encompass the metaphysical sense of the term. This is a strictly verbal feature of the terms and their use, not of the phenomenon they are intended to describe. And I think that not everything that might be matter really is matter (see my exception to the Principle of the Conservation of Energy, where matter is energy; below), and so knowing actual matter involves sorting out what is matter from what only’ might be matter, but is not. Perfect knowledge in this domain would involve carrying out this activity for all times and places, and is obviously an ideal to be pursued. But if knowledge is real and the universe is finite, as Bergson holds, then every advance in knowledge at least brings us closer to the ideal (which we may regard as actual and ideal simultaneously -- Peirce’s notion of truth ought to be invoked here, just as Hausman suspects).

"Vital energy;" on the other hand, is what happens when the élan vital enters into matter. When this occurs, matter is "energized," which is to say that for a finite time interval, two opposed natures are contained in the same entity, its material nature and its vital nature. This composite is what we call "energy." You, dear reader, are such a composite, as am I, and the desk, and the floor and the moon, and the sun, and everything else you ever encountered in your sensory awareness, and everything you ever could encounter, in all probability. Finite existence is energy. Neither pure élan vital nor prime matter "exist" alone. It would require us to use a sense of the word "exist" we cannot at all imagine or define to assert that they do "exist" apart. This is the issue that so vexed Aristotle (and his interpreters revisited), but the notion that the composite of élan vital (not form) and "matter" (in the senses defined above) is "energy"’ is not an idea Aristotle explored. For Bergson, as for Whitehead, there are various overlapping levels of organization in these entities, and only the more richly ordered are capable of imparting the vital aspect of their energy to other beings in reflective fashion, which is what we humans do when we create works of art, crafts, tools, artifacts of any kind. But these things do not subsequently grow. They deteriorate and the vital impetus is spent, diffused throughout "matter" in such evenly dispersed and minute quantities as to become ineffectual in propagating new forms of order. There is a gradual loss of complexity in the organizational form until they descend entirely into inert matter, with no energy (recalling that energy is the composite, not the élan vital). I say this in full awareness that anyone who defines matter as energy will claim I am contradicting the laws of thermodynamics. I do not take this lightly, but I refer such critics to the definition of matter above, remind them that I am trying to summarize a Bergsonian view (not entirely my own), and ask them to consider another law of thermodynamics, the law of entropy; and ask why (unless there is something dead or inert that resists the development of higher forms of complexity) should systems tend towards an equalized distribution of energy in spacetime? Why shouldn’t systems tend in precisely the opposite direction, towards a build-up and concentration of energy in greater and greater forms of complexity?83 This is not a scientific question; it is a metaphysical question. Such questions cannot be addressed by appealing to empirical evidence or empirically derived laws, and rearranging evidence and laws until they all seem to describe the phenomena. This procedure is inappropriate since the phenomena have nor been inquired after individually or in relation to one another; rather, all phenomena as a whole are placed in question when one asks a metaphysical question. The possibility of gathering evidence is only tangentially relevant, let alone specific evidence.

Following Bergson, the élan vital is obliged to interact with dead matter in order to actualize itself in the various finite forms it "wants to take" (I grant that speaking of the élan vital as if it has desires is a gratuitous personification, but it is difficult to avoid this manner of speaking, since the élan vital is the ground of all actual desire). The metaphysical cost of this interaction with matter to the élan vital is that it will dissipate itself in trying to vivify’ all this dead matter, and indeed, the élan vital (which Bergson insists is finite) will eventually’ burn itself out, exhaust itself.

The élan vital taken alone (i.e., abstractly’), is perfectly continuous; indeed, it is continuity itself, and the ground of all possible continuity. That is its form of "being." It suffers ruptures in its being when it enters into matter, but imparts a measure of continuity to the things it energizes, and thereby "creates." So we might say that there is Continuity’ (the being of the élan vital itself, conceived abstractly), and continuity (that which renders finitely existing entities continuous with one another in duration, or concrete, lived time). The question with which we began was "what is the being of the discontinuities in concrete existence?" I have to recast the question a bit in order not to mix epistemological issues (i.e., how does continuity affect our process of knowing what is?) with metaphysical ones (what is the relationship among continuity, matter and energy?). I have addressed the metaphysical issue to some degree, but let me make explicit how the things I have said point to an answer. Discontinuities in the being of concretely existing entities are due to the descending "pull" of matter. Matter pulls things down into less complex and more homogeneous forms. The homogeneity of less complex entities is commensurate with continuity, and hence, closer to the being of the élan vital Therefore, we should not be surprised that the simpler a life form is, the more prolific and ubiquitous it is.84 This point brings us to the principle of "metaphysical divisibility" I mentioned above that the more homogeneous a concrete form of existence is, the more divisible it becomes (in the sense that it can be divided without altering its form). I have already mentioned the proliferation of simpler forms of life, but let us consider something still less "organic." For example, cake is more divisible than, say, a houseplant. No matter how much I cut a cake, it is still cake (both linguistically and actually) until it is divided below the level of "crumbs." But houseplants, while divisible, are not nearly as divisible without altering their form (and here form is understood as the concrete, dynamic, and energized entity). Houseplants are divisible without a change of form, under particular circumstances -- if I carefully take a cutting, I can get it to grow, and the same thing happens in nature without intentional planning.

The circumstances required for sexual reproduction (different in kind from what I mean by "metaphysical division," although a different branch on the same path of interaction between matter and the élan vital) by more complex entities is of course still more particular (and improbable without the intentional element). But usually if I divide a plant the result will be an alteration of form describable as "simplification" or "homogenization" (from "plant" to a loose collection of less integrated entities for which their corporate past is more important than their combined individual futures, and memory is almost entirely rudimentary). With still less organic things like "elements" (e.g., lead or aluminum) one can divide them down to the molecular level without changing their form in this way. Those who accept traditional physics and thermodynamics look upon this sort of dividing as "releasing energy", although they are using the term "energy" equivocally here, in my’ view, since in part they mean "matter" (the energy’ retained in the parts), and in part they’ mean the difference between the energy required to maintain the integrity of the form (or "system") before it was divided, and the energy left in the parts. We have discovered the gap between the frames in our cinematographical film, and that gap is reflected in the principle of "metaphysical divisibility." It is not at all obvious that these two senses of "energy" -- even if they are commensurable with one another (which is debatable) -- taken together can exhaust what the entirety and integrity of the entity was prior to its division.

The result of metaphysical division is a derivative (in the sense of Gunter’s calculus) of the actual entity, which is its inverse. The question about whether the derivative or the integral is fundamental is moot. Every derivative is the derivative of some integral, and every integral has infinitely many derivatives. But the thing left out of the relation is that metaphysical division requires time in some sense. There is a metaphysical analogue to the operations of integration and derivation, and that is that no concrete entity can exist in the same time-lapse as its derivatives, and vice versa. A lapse of duration is requisite for the development of entities into a system, or of a system into derivative entities, and this duration is not nothing, but it is not something in particular, either. Something further than time is needed also to account for the ways in which energized matter, actual entities come together in some ways rather than others, but to consider this would take beyond the scope of this essay. Still, the idea of "God" is the one most frequently invoked by process thinkers to account for the general trajectory’ of creative synthesis.

Returning then, to the question of continuity and divisibility, at the molecular level, the principle of metaphysical divisibility -- that less complex entities are more divisible without changing form -- still holds, since more complex molecules are less divisible without changing forms than simpler molecules. Even supposing we could say without equivocating that the act of dividing the molecules "releases energy," the "energy released" is contributing to the integration of the entity’, and now contributes equally to its dissolution. Releasing it changes the form, or more precisely’, the release is the change of form. It is the act of metaphysical division, and it is an act, analogous to the operations in calculus. A Bergsonian would say this division diffuses and impedes the élan vital obliging it to find other opportunities for expression. Hydrogen is the simplest atom, and "releasing energy" in hydrogen atoms sets off a chain reaction in which all entities in the immediate spacetime region are obliged to undergo metaphysical division, and all more complex entities change their forms. The "releasing of energy" in the structure of hydrogen is so violent that we are inclined to see it emotionally as ripping a hole in the very fabric of being, but that is the élan vital perhaps. Analogous to Leopold’s biotic pyramid, the undermining of the less complex entities in the universe entails ipso facto the undermining of the more complex. Yet, we need not conclude that all the "released energy"’ was potentially contained in the individual hydrogen atom or the system of such atoms. We can also recognize that some continuities are more fundamental than others in terms of their required presence in holding together complex entities. The introduction of discontinuity at the more basic levels is catastrophic to the drive of the élan vital in its quest to create more complex life forms, to express vitality. I can see smirks spreading across the faces of unbelievers and confess to having invoked the other principle process philosophers so often use: the "god" principle. My sentence must seem like an incantation to them. So be it. They may be able to bring themselves only to take seriously what their intellects tell them, but I am doing metaphysics, and it is an intuitive activity. No intellect will affirm this idea. Those with greater intuitive powers may also smile, but it will be in agreement.

Below the level of atoms it becomes increasingly difficult to devise methods of dividing things, but anything that has mass (i.e., in Bergson’s language, all energy, all composites of matter and élan vital) can in principle be divided in principle be divided, and the principle of metaphysical divisibility should apply. Scientists until recently believed neutrinos had no mass (Bergson would regard this as a contradiction, I think), but recently’ it was discovered that neutrinos do have mass, which means they should be divisible in principle. At subatomic levels we find particles that are more functions than things, and I am not committed to saying that functions are subject to metaphysical divisibility, and I would point out that our language about these "forces" is highly metaphorical. The difference between energy’ in the form of a neutrino and energy in the form of a "z" particle is a fairly negligible difference of being; it is a difference of function. Both come close to being "pure energy," but as we have said, that is an ideal, not something that can he actual. At the subatomic level we may speak of tiny bits of mass and various forces (e.g., electromagnetism, gravity’, the strong force), but Bergson is betting that insofar as these forces really’ are forces, they are one force, and insofar as they’ are composites of matter and élan vital they are energy. In metaphysics the Grand Unified Theory has been achieved many times over (from Hebraic monotheism to Aristotle’s prime mover), but the issue is: "what are the features and characteristics of the thing that is in the strictest sense?" Bergson, like Aristotle, does not think scientific evidence (from the special sciences) can lead us to an understanding of this. We can now understand what it may mean to say’ that energy is the composite of matter and the élan vital in this sense.

I have suggested that divisibility without a change of form is potentiality for a sort of discontinuity that has positive existence. That is, as we move to simpler and simpler forms, the potential for positive discontinuity increases, and the simpler entities are obliged to rely less on continuity in order to retain their forms. Continuity becomes less relevant to the maintenance of form as existences become simpler, and more relevant to maintenance of form as complexity increases. At simpler levels, the parts refer to the form of the whole self-sufficiently, while in more complex forms the parts carry reference to the whole in an interdependent fashion. Thus, the idea of continuity as a vital principle is most meaningful where the form of a whole is not sustainable without strong (i.e., continuous) organic connectedness among the parts, all of which contribute in some way to the preservation of the form of the whole. Parts that do not so contribute are not "parts" of that organic whole in the fullest sense. Each true part has its connection to the whole and through it sustains its own form. Even though the whole is immanent in the part and the part contributes to sustaining the whole, these relations are not self-sufficient or a closed system. This is merely an interdependent set of relations, defined as relations which without continuity cannot exist (although they can be conceived).

Therefore, continuity, as it exists (as opposed to continuity as it is known), does not "contain" energy along with matter or coeval with its matter. Rather, continuity sustains a relation between matter and the élan vital a certain locus of energy in a certain pattern, arrangement or form. It requires an enormous amount of cumulative "work" by the élan vital to create forms as complex as those presently existing (this is what Bergson’s concept of creative evolution is about). As far as the little discontinuities in the being of things is concerned, they must be attributed to the tendency of matter to lose energy. Matter resists the élan vital. Eventually the élan vital exhausts itself. Bergson does not believe those who claim the amount of energy in the universe is constant, and he does not believe that energy can neither be created nor destroyed. Those are handy scientific abstractions, but even if they were provable in the terms science allows, it would not show that no broader set of truths about the universe would not render these proofs a special case of themselves. Bergson thinks that the élan vital is finite, and is using itself up in the creation of finite existences. Its candle burns at both ends and will not last the night, but to its friends and foes it gives a lovely light. Therefore energy is finite also. The "discontinuities" in being, then, are due to the infinite divisibility of matter and its resistance to the élan vital. That is the metaphysical situation as we draw to the end of the story.

Yet, now an answer to the epistemological side of this question is also available (or at least a perspective on it). The space between the frames in the cinematographical show that plays before the mind is always already filled in by the metaphysical continuities of concrete existence. There is no necessity in this continuity that bridges distinguishable frames or episodes of knowing (or "being conscious of"), only contingent being. But when we try to give an account of those episodes, the need for metaphysical continuity forces itself upon us as an epistemological necessity, and we often misinterpret that epistemological requirement as if it were a metaphysical requirement. The universe looks back at our efforts to grasp it and says, "there is continuity for your use, but the continuity you use in your act of being conscious was not there yesterday, and will be gone tomorrow; today it is my gift to you."

Even if one’s intellect is unaware (or even incapable of being aware) of the actual continuity at the ground of one’s experience, that experience is nevertheless actually continuous. The "frames" themselves are only a tiny part of the story that has to be told about out lived experience. All we have to do in order to be respectably’ humble philosophers is to avoid identifying our lived experience with our knowledge of our experience. But so many would-be philosophers (and, more forgivably, psychologists and scientists) make this identification that it is disheartening. The Freudians and Jungians are good at convincing people that there is a distinction between conscious and unconscious experience, but they are of precious little help when it comes to discussing the metaphysical ground of that difference (the former growing reductionist and the latter mystical). Bergson, on the other hand, is quite good at discussing that issue, and Bergson offers us some hope of knowing (and even cultivating our ability to know further) what comes between the "frames" of our conscious awareness. If there is something there (and there is), why shouldn’t we be able to find a way, directly or indirectly to "know" it in some sense? Bergson’s account of intuition and his method of intuitive calculus provide us a way of experiencing and describing what is there between the frames.85

 

Notes

  1. Henri Bergson, Creative Evolution, auth. trans. Arthur Mitchell, intro. Pete A. Y. Gunter (Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1983 [1911]), 211.
  2. Christopher Perricone has provided an account of Bergson’s influence on philosophy through his use of non-rational metaphor in "Poetic Philosophy: The Bergson-Whitman Connection," in The Journal of Speculative Philosophy’, 10/1 (1996) 41-61. Bergson’s influence on literature (often through writers who misunderstood him) is well-documented. See for example, Shiv K. Kumar’s Bergson and the Stream of Consciousness Novel (London: Blackie and Son, Ltd.), 1962.

3. The term "influence" is problematic, and will be discussed below.

4. See G.H. Mead, On Social Psychology, ed. Anselm Strauss (Chicago: University’ of Chicago Press, 1964), 308-315. In spite of Mead’s deep admiration of Bergson, and notwithstanding Mead’s liberal use of Bergson’s insights in his own philosophy, Mead calls Bergson an irrationalist on (315). Cf. also Henry Nelson Wieman, The Source of Human Good (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1946), 194, where Wieman, while praising Bergson, feels obliged to disagree with him that "creativity has no structure and creates no structure" Cf. also Whitehead, Essay’s in Science and Philosophy (New York: Philosophical Library, 1948), 88.

5.This was Gunter’s own suggestion to me and it has proved a fruitful one, for which I offer him thanks.

6 Victor Lowe, "The Influence of Bergson, James, and Alexander on Whitehead," Journal of the History of Ideas 10 (1949), 267.

7. See Victor Lowe, Alfred North Whitehead: The Man and His Work, 2 vols. (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University’ Press, 1985, 1990), vol. 2, 178.

8. In this attribution, at least one historian of the philosophy of science concurs. See Milic Capek, "Bergson’s Theory of Matter and Modern Physics," in Bergson and the Evolution of Physics (Knoxville: University’ of Tennessee Press, 1969), 302.

9. See Whitehead, Science and the Modern World (New York: Free Press, 1967 [19251), 50-51.

10. For a fuller discussion of the importance of divine lure, see the two articles by Barry L. Whitney, "Process Theism: Does a Persuasive God Coerce?" in The Southern Journal of Philosophy, 17, 1(1979), 133-143; and "An Aesthetic Solution to the Problem of Evil," in International Journal for Philosophy of Religion, 35 (1994), 21-37.

11. In this regard we must be careful to distinguish abstract necessity’ from vital "need" (CE 261), but I should also admit that Bergson did not always consistently reserve the terra "necessity"’ for abstract necessity. As far as I can tell he did use the term this way in the books Whitehead read, but in The Two Sources of Morality and Religion, trans. R. Ashley Audra and Cloudesley Brereton (New York: Henry’ Holt & Co., 1935), 92-93, for example, Bergson does use the term "necessity"’ in the way Whitehead used it. This inconsistency is unfortunate, but Bergson just is not as systematic in his employment of terminology as his interpreters would like.

12.1 have argued elsewhere that all definitions, and indeed all deductive forms of logic, are circular for process philosophy, and particularly I give examples from Bergson, Dewey and Peirce. I no longer agree with all I said in this article, but the point about logic and definition I would still defend. See my "Concentric Circles: And Exploration of Three Concepts in Process Metaphysics," Southwest Philosophy Review 8/1 (Winter 1991), 151-172.

13. See Bergson, An Introduction to Metaphysics, auth. trans. T. E. Hulme (New York: Macmillan, 1913), 24.

14. See Whitehead, Adventures of Ideas (New York: Free Press, 1967 [1933]), 242, for a discussion by Whitehead of "abstraction" that is congruent with Bergson’s actual view.

15. See Whitehead, Religion in the Making (New York: Fordham University Press, 1996 [1926]), 78.

16. Whitehead, Religion the Making , 116.

17. I remind the reader of Gunter’s point above: "Throughout the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries matter had been conceived as comprised of passive, simply-located particles whose most fundamental character is their imperviousness to change. Bergson takes a contrasting view, conceiving matter as ‘. . . modifications, perturbations, changes of tension or of energy, and nothing else’ (MM 266)."

18. Whitehead, The Concept of Nature (London: Cambridge University Press, 1964[1920]), 54. Lowe dismisses the idea that Whitehead really got his idea of process from Bergson, basically without an argument (Sec ANW, vol.2, 176-177). However, it seems that Whitehead’s own account should be taken as more authoritative. Lowe reports having asked Whitehead in 1937 about Theodore de Laguna’s review of The Principles of Natural Knowledge in which much was made of Bergson’s influence (see Philosophical Review, 29 [1920], 269). According to Lowe, Whitehead replied that "he had read Bergson but was not much worried by him" (177; this same conversation is also reported by Lowe in his article for Whitehead’s volume in Library of Living Philosophers, and in his article for Journal of the History of Ideas). However, what ‘Whitehead said could mean a number of things, not the least of which is that he is not worried by Bergson because Whitehead is in more or less full agreement with him, just as he reported in 1919, and as Laguna said in print. Even if Lowe was right to take this remark as downplaying Bergson’s influence, it is the sort of question one gets from graduate students who may be overly eager to trace down connections instead of dealing with ideas, and Whitehead was never much for worrying about these sorts of things either. Perhaps this was a teacher’s way of saying to Lowe "you should deal with the idea of process (or whatever) and leave the historians to worry about details like who got it from whom." Another possibility Lowe does nor even consider is whether Whitehead’s own sense of his influences would be the same eighteen years later as it was in 1919, and whether he might not have gotten a significantly more enthusiastic discussion of Bergson from Whitehead at the earlier date. My own experience of professors of philosophy suggests to me that if Whitehead was at all typical of professors, the last book he read was foremost in his thinking, and the ones he read twenty years before had become a bit pale in comparison.

19. I am preceded in this conclusion by a number of scholars, such as Milic Capek in Bergson and Modern Physics (Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Reidel, 1971), 215, 307; and F. Bradford Wallack in The Epochal Nature of Process in Whitehead’s Metaphysics (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1980), 207:

Whitehead undoubtedly owes his conception of a becoming and perishing occasion to quantum physics; but he equally undoubtedly owes his conception of becoming and perishing as a process to Bergson. Bergson is really the pioneer for Whitehead’s conception of reality as a process of the very nature of which is the prehension of its origination. For process philosophy’, no quantum, no particle no material body no instance of actual concrete existence whatsoever is a permanently enduring body in absolute spacetime, simply located such that it is describable without reference to anything else, any time or place else.

20. A general review of the endnotes from Gunter’s paper reveals a fair number of sources who will corroborate the claim that Bergson’s scientific views are nor only not outdated, but go very’ much to the heart of current scientific methods and insights, but particularly, see A. C. Papanicolaou and Pete A. N. Gunter, eds., Bergson in Modern Thought Towards a Unified Science (New York: Harwood Academic Publishers, 1987), and for important background on how Bergson came to be seen as dated when he was not, see also, Milic Capek, Bergson and Modern Physics, (cited above) and The Philosophical Impact of Contemporary Physics (Princeton, NJ: Van Nostrand, 1961), and the volume edited by Gunter, Bergson and the Evolution of Physics (cited above). It is distressing, however, to see how deeply ingrained the misunderstanding of Bergson is among contemporary scientists --the all too few who know his work. Many more simply throw around half developed versions of Bergsonian ideas without enough historical understanding to realize these ideas have been thoroughly worked out before the present day. Even in this journal in a piece by a scientist I recently read said that "Bergson and others were right to emphasize biological events as inherently life-affirming, but wrong in mythologizing them." If Bergson can he cavalierly dismissed like this in Process Studies, what hope is there for an accurate statement of his views in less sympathetic contexts? The author continues: "In addition, Bergson did not emphasize the important sense of laboring in the natural world" (Jay Schulkin, "Evolving Sensibilities," in PS 27/3-4 [1998],246). This impression Schulkin reports, as if it were fact, must be something he learned out of a textbook (and written during the era of Bergson’s disfavor -- roughly 1945-1970). No one who has actually read Creative Evolution would say this, except perhaps Bertrand Russell, who was too literal minded to grasp the book at all.

21. Jean-Paul Sartre, L’Etre et le neant (Paris: Editions Gallimard, 1943), 210. For the translation, refer to Being and Nothingness trans. hazel E. Barnes (New York: Philosophical library, 1956), 170.

22. Judith A. Jones, Intensity: An Essay in Whiteheadian Ontology (Nashville: Vanderbilt University Press, 1998), 72.

23. Lewis S. Ford, The Emergence of Whitehead’s Metaphysics, 1925-1929 (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1984), 47. See Bergson, The Creative Mind 153, for the passages Ford is summarizing.

24. Jones, Intensity: An Essay in Whiteheadian Ontology, 158.

25. I do not take myself to be impious towards the Master here, since as late as his seventieth birthday, Whitehead himself confessed that his knowledge of Bergson was "thin." See Whitehead, Essays in Science and Philosophy (New York: Philosophical Library’, 1948), 88-89. This may have simply been an example of the excessive modesty Whitehead was famous for, but I incline to think it may be true. Whitehead obviously read Bergson, as he said in the conversation Victor Lowe so often reports from 1937 (see Lowe, Understanding Whitehead [Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1962], 193), but that does not mean he made a systematic and close study. Bergson is nor the sort of thinker one fully understands in a first reading, and in some cases, ant even after repeated readings.

26. Whitehead, Process and Reality, corrected edition, ed. David Ray Griffin and Donald W. Sherburne (New York: Free Press, 1979), 33.

27. Donald W. Sherburne, A Key to Whitehead ‘Process and Reality’ (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981), 234-235.

28. See for example Whitehead’s Process and Reality, xii, 209; and, The Interpretation of Science: Selected Essays, ed. A. H. Johnson (Indianapolis: Bobbs-Merrill, 1961), 217.

29. F. S. C. Northrop, "Whitehead’s Philosophy of Science," in The Philosophy of Alfred North Whitehead, ed. Paul Schilpp, 2nd ed. (New York: Tudor Publishing Co., 1951), 169. Northrop has a good bit of company among Whitehead’s contemporaries in making this claim of Bergson’s profound influence on Whitehead. I cannot discuss them all here, but the following references are a start: Theodore de Laguna, review of The Principles of Natural Knowledge in Philosophical Review, 29 (1920), 269; Bertrand Russell, review of Science and the Modern World in Nation and Athenaeum, 39 (May 29,1926), 207; Charles Hartshorne, Creativity in American Philosophy (New York: Paragon House, 1984), 5,32,279-280; and even though Stephen Pepper believes both Whitehead and Bergson are mistaken in their views, he believes they are extremely similar: see Pepper, Concept and Quality: A World Hypothesis (LaSalle: Open Court, 1967), 340-341. Add to this impressive list the list given by Victor Lowe: W. M. Urban, D. H. Parker, W. T. Stace, and A. H. Taylor in "The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead," 269-270, 284. And more recently Richard Rorty has indicated sympathy with the idea that Bergson’s influence on Whitehead deserves our notice. See his "Matter and Event" in Explorations in Whitehead’s Philosophy, eds. Lewis S. Ford and George I. Kline (New York: Fordham University, 1983), 69-70. It is surprising that against such figures Lowe’s interpretation has prevailed, but it has.

30. Northrop, "Whitehead’s Philosophy of Science," 169.

31. Hartshorne, "Whitehead’s Novel Intuition," in George I.. Kline, Alfred North Whitehead: Essays on his Philosophy (Engelwood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1963 [1961]), 19.

32. Whitehead, Adventures of Ideas, 243.

33. Whitehead, Process and Reality, 209. In claiming that spatialization is the shortest route to clarity and familiarity, Whitehead cannot, however, be accepting this route as the best one for a philosopher. Along with Bergson, he agrees that the deepest view is nor the shortest, nor the one which uses "familiar language." Hence, Whitehead does try to avoid spatialization as well, except insofar as it is necessary. In Religion in the Making Whitehead explicitly states that in metaphysics, theology and science there is really "no short cut to truth," 79.

34. See Bergson, Creative Evolution, 178.

35. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 191.

36. Whitehead, Process and Reality, 8.

37. It is important to note that Whitehead thinks even mathematicians are nor always justified in assuming that their abstractions are clear (8).

38. Whitehead, "The Idealistic Implication of Einstein’s Theory’," in The Interpretation of Science, 148.

39. Lowe, Understanding Whitehead, 262. In the 1949 article, Lowe said "I hope to make it really impossible to look upon Whitehead as Bergson’s mathematically trained alter ego" (283) whereas in 1962 he says "My concern has been to make it impossible then to look upon Whitehead as Bergson’s mathematically trained alter ego" (262). This shift in wording underscores the shift in Lowe’s confidence in his thesis, a confidence that had apparently waned in his last years (see below).

40. In a number of remarks Lowe tries to suggest that Bergson really was nor up to par in mathematics, reporting for instance Whitehead’s remark that Bergson "was not a mathematician or mathematical physicist" ("The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead," 272). This insinuation that Bergson was not adequate in mathematics is almost so petty as to be beneath a response. But since it matters to some people, let me repeat what even a little bit of research into Bergson’s life and work shows. Bergson had in fact won the prize in mathematics (and in English, Latin, Greek and philosophy’) at the Lycee Condorcet in Paris, and as Gunter reports:

For a time [Bergson] considered a degree in mathematics. His mathematics professor, Adolphe Desboves, admired Bergson’s solution to the problem of the three circles, first posed by Pascal in a letter to Fermat, and published it in his Etude sur Pascal et les géomètres contemporaines (1878). The same year Bergson won a national prize in mathematics and saw his work published in the Annales de mathematiques. Elated by the facility with which his young scholar solved demanding problems, Desboves predicted for him an outstanding career in the sciences. Bergson, however, remained dissatisfied; he found mathematics "too absorbing" and chose a career m philosophy’ instead. "You might have been a mathematician," said the disgruntled Desboves, "but you will only be a philosopher." (Bergson and the Evolution of Physics, 3-4)

With a Professor like Desboves, who evidently was dismissive of philosophers and their concerns, it is no wonder Bergson chose to leave mathematics. Perhaps Whitehead had a better teacher in Thomson, and felt less confined. But Whitehead still left mathematics, later, and for reasons not altogether different from Bergson’s. Was Bergson a mathematician of Whitehead’s caliber? Of course nor (not five people in the 20th century were on that level), but it is quite possible Bergson had that level of greatness in him and chose nor to pursue it, in spire of Lowe’s groundless insinuations to the contrary. It is clear from Gunter’s essay in this focus section, and from Bergson’s work in Duration and Simultaneity that Bergson never underestimated the value of mathematical rigor in demonstration, in philosophic method, and in the achievement of knowledge (indeed, it was Spencer’s lack of mathematical rigor that inspired Bergson to attack him, see Gunter, Bergson and the Evolution of Physics, 6). One might as well try to say ducks know nothing of water as impugn Bergson’s mathematical understanding.

41. Unfortunately the 1962 abridged version of the 1949 article omits numerous concessions Lowe made about Bergson’s influence on Whitehead (see, 274, 277-278, 280-281, 284, 286). It is interesting how Lowe’s view of his own work on this topic progressed. In 1949, he regarded his article "The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead" as a first rather than a definitive examination" (268). In Understanding Whitehead, Lowe essentially reprinted an abridged and subtly altered version of the longer article that he now regarded as quite definitive (262), but by the time Lowe wrote Alfred North Whitehead, The Man and His Work, it was the 1949 study he referred readers to (II, 178-179), and reminded them of the tentativeness of the conclusions. Unfortunately, it is Lowe’s 1962 book that most Interested people have read, and his more confident disposition there tends to show up in the secondary’ literature now as definitive intellectual history.

42. Lowe, Understanding Whitehead, 257.

43. For example, Paul Schmidt’s book, Perception and Cosmology in Whitehead’s Philosophy. (New Brunswick: Rutgers University Press, 1967) makes no mention of Bergson at all, and on a topic where it would be difficult to avoid him. Other examples include excellent book length studies by Jorge Nobo, John Berthrong, and John Lango. This is not so much a criticism of these writers as an indication of the influence of Lowe’s argument on Whitehead scholarship -- all four of these authors do refer to Lowe.

44. Lowe, Understanding Whitehead, 258.

45. This list is virtually the table of contents for Doug Browning’s and William T. Myers Philosophers of Process, 2nd ed. (New York: Fordham University Press, 1998).

46. Lowe, "The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead," 288-289n; Understanding Whitehead 262n.

47. Lowe, Understanding Whitehead, 258.

48. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 223-224.

49. Whitehead, Process and Reality, 214.

50. See for example Creative Evolution, 40, where Bergson twice affirms that he intends to incorporate finalism into his view.

51. Lowe, Understanding Whitehead, 259.

52. Bergson, Creative Evolution. 223. my italics.

53. In speaking of intuition Bergson says: "But though it transcends intelligence, it is from intelligence that has come the push that has made it rise to the point it has reached. Without intelligence, it would have remained in the form of instinct. . . ." (Creative Evolution, 178).

54. Lowe, "The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead," 276. This is a fairly hopeless over-simplification of what extensive abstraction is, but in Lowe’s defense, it was not his aim to give a full account here. For the fullest account, see Jorge Nobo, Whitehead’s Metaphysics of Extension and Solidarity (Albany: State University’ of New York Press, 1986), 205-250.

55. Lowe, "The Influence of Bergson, James and Alexander on Whitehead," 277.

56. See Whitehead, The Principle of Relativity with Applications to Physical Science (Cambridge: Cambridge University’ Press, 1922), 16.

57. Alfred North Whitehead, The Concept of Nature (Cambridge: Cambridge University’ Press, 1955 [1919]), 61.

58. Bergson, Duration and Simultaneity, 62n. It would seem that influence as confluence is at least a two-way’ street.

59. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 201. A fair number of Whitehead scholars have noticed the resonance (pun intended) between Bergson’s theory’ of duration and Whitehead’s theory’ of events, and have (rightly.) taken for granted influence as confluence. Included on that list are Charles Hartshorne, Dorothy Emmet, Lewis S. Ford, Elizabeth M. Kraus, and F. Bradford Wallack.

60. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 301.

61. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 177-178. Bergson also later makes the following informative point:

I am then (we must adopt the language of the understanding, since only the understanding has a language) a unity that is multiple and a multiplicity that is one; but unity and multiplicity are only view’s of my personality taken by an understanding that dictates its categories at me. . . .(258)

62. This fundamental agreement has been previously noted by Milic Capek in "Bergson’s Theory of Matter and Modern Physics," 316.

63. See Charles Hartshorne, "Whitehead’s Novel Intuition," in Whitehead’s Philosophy, Selected Essays, 1935-1970 (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1972), 161-170.

64. Charles Hartshorne, "Ontological Primacy: A Reply to Buchler," in Explorations in Whitehead’s Philosophy, 299.

65. The most extensive comparison of Whitehead and Bergson on creativity is Newton P. Stallknechr’s Studies in the Philosophy of Creation with Especial Reference to Bergson and Whitehead (Princeton: Princeton University Press. 1934). I considered the idea of treating this hook in derail, but unfortunately it really is nor a yen’ good book. It has had little impact on subsequent scholarship, and for goon reason, so I have left it aside intentionally here. However, to Stallknechr’s credit he does recognize that Whitehead is (in his words) "rationalizing" Bergson (132), or as Don Sherburne more accurately put it, systematizing Bergson’s view. See Sherburne, A Whiteheadian Aesthetic. Some Implications of Whitehead’s Metaphysical Speculation (New Haven: Yale University’ Press, 1961), 10-24. Aside from Stallknechr, he most extensive treatment of Bergson’s view of creativity I have found in the literature is in the book by Ralph Tyler Flewelling, Bergson and Personal Realism (New York: Abingdon Press, 1920), 150-173. Flewelling is concerned here to reconcile Bergson’s view of creativity with the personalist conception of God, and does as well as one could expect from such a premise. Still, this is nor a substantive contribution to our current understanding of the derailed issue of creativity or influence. A goodly number of similarities between Whitehead and Bergson have been compiled (but nor analyzed) in the admirable notes of a book by J. M. Burgess entitled Experience and Conceptual Activity (Cambridge: M.I.T. Press 1965), 21 1-267. Edward Pols has pointed out the similarity in the two accounts of creativity, but has nor treated it extensively in his book Whitehead’s Metaphysics: A Critical Examination of ‘Process and Reality’ (Carbondale: S.I.U. Press, 1967), 132 ff. A similar notice is taken by Steve Odin in his book Process Metaphysics and Hua-yen Buddhism (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1982), 95. This is nor an exhaustive list by any means, but it indicates the need for still further study, since this is an issue a lot of people have noticed, but no one has really tackled.

66. Jones, Intensity: An Essay in Whiteheadian Ontology, 168.

67. James Bradley makes a valiant attempt to solve within Whitehead’s basic terms the problem Jones has suggested needed a solution, but there is little doubt Jones would regard Bradley’s solution as too heavily’ reliant upon numerical unity’, and therefore abstract. Nevertheless, it is worth the effort to those vexed by these questions to consult Bradley’s work on this front. See ‘Act, Event, Series: Metaphysics, Mathematics and Whitehead," The Journal of Speculative Philosophy 10/4 (1996), 233-248. Also contrary to Jones’ conclusion is Richard L. Brougham’s recent attempt to save Whitehead from this dilemma by accusing Bergson of over-emphasizing continuity while Whitehead’s kinder, gentler notion of "simplification" could provide us with a thoughtful and pragmatic account of experience that did nor have to reduce discontinuities to "mere appearances." I will address the issue of continuity in Bergson in the final section of this essay, and it will answer Brougham’s charge. See Brougham, "Reality and Appearance in Bergson and Whitehead," Process Studies 24/1-4 (1995), 39-43.

68. See David Berlinsky, A Tour of the Calculus (New York: Vintage Books, 1995), 56ff.

69. This claim of Taylor’s can be disputed, but I suspect Bergson would agree.

70. A. E. Taylor, The Faith of a Moralist, Gifford Lectures 1926-1928 (London: Macmillan, 1930, 1937), ii, 341-42.

71. The always careful Taylor was wise to say "apparently" here, since it turns out nor to be true, as Gunter and Hausman have shown.

72. Taylor, The Faith of a Moralist, 342.

73. This dichotomy has been softened by later developments in mathematics, of course, and in way’s favorable to Bergson. This passage is of historical interest, not mathematical.

74. Taylor, The Faith of a Moralist, 342-343.

75. Taylor, The Faith of a Moralist, 343.

76. Dorothy Emmet, Whitehead’s Philosophy of Organism, 2nd ed. (London: Macmillan, 1966), 57.

77. Apart from the numerous explicit references to and discussions of Bergson in the works of Sartre and Merleau-Ponty, see especially in this regard Helmut R. Wagner (with Ilja Srubar), A Bergsonian Bridge to Phenomenological Psychology (Lanham, Md.: University Press of America, 1984), and Gilies Deleauze, Bergsonism, trans. Hugh Tomlinson and Barbara Habberjam (New York: Zone Books, 1988).

78. Maurice Merleau-Ponty’, In Praise of Philosophy and Other Essays, trans. Wild and Edie (Chicago: Northwestern University Press, 1988), 10-11. Cf. Bergson, Creative Evolution, 179. I do nor think there is any compelling reason for the word "substance" to be used in this context, and do not myself find it wholly appropriate, in that Bergion would have been more likely to call it an energeia as opposed to an ousia, a view which resonates deeply with Ernst Cassirer’s critique of substance which was being written at nearly the same time. Cf. Cassirer, Substance and Function, trans. Swabey and Swabey (New York: Dover Books, 1953). In any case the term does make it clear that we are posing a metaphysical question.

79. Heideggerians (and some Hegelians) would claim this is also a phenomenological question, but I reserve the term "phenomenology" for the narrower activity of the study of the givenness of experience to consciousness.

80. Bergion, Creative Evolution, 304=306.

81. Aside from what Gunter has suggested in his essay, I should point out that Deleuze, in his study Bergsonism (13-35) devoted a chapter to outlining some of the key principles of "Intuition as Method." This is helpful to some extent (although I would take exception to the dichotomy implied in his Third Rule- "State problems and solve them in terms of time rather than of space,"31), but Deleuze does not seek to integrate or interrelate the principles systematically.

82. I distinguish here the use of the term "epistemology"’ from "phenomenology"’ in the sense that phenomenology analyzes the givenness of objects to consciousness, an exercise that may be carried our ‘without particular metaphysical commitments (requiring only a hypothetical ontology), whereas epistemology seeks to analyze how we or any being can know what really is. Epistemology thus deals with knowing while phenomenology deals with experiencing. Obviously they are related, but how that relationship ought to he described is beyond my present purpose.

83. Whitehead says essentially the same thing in the FR.

84. This hearkens back to Aldo Leopold’s "biotic pyramid," wherein the amount of "life" requisite to give rise to and support increasingly complex forms of life must be vast at the base in order to be slender at the apex (of complexity). See Leopold, A Sand County Almanac: And Sketches Here and There (Oxford: Oxford University’ Press, 1949), 214-220.

85. I would like to thank Pete Gunter, Carl Hausman, Charles Sherover, Barry Whitney, David F. Steele, the Society for the Philosophy of Creativity, the late John Broyer, my colleague John Starkey, my former student Chang-kuo Hsieh, and my graduate seminar in Modernism at Oklahoma City University, fall 1998, for help with the ideas presented here.

Bergson and the Calculus of Intuition: Special Focus Introduction

The three papers and the dialogue contained in this focus section have been emerging for a number of years, since the three contributors began preparing their contributions for a gathering that took place on April 22,1993, a meeting of The Society for the Philosophy of Creativity (SPC) at the Central Division Meeting of the American Philosophical Association, Palmer House, Chicago. The papers have been greatly expanded and refined in the interim.

I will be so bold as to state at the outset that if these papers are given the attention I think they warrant, then the way Bergson is presently understood in the community of process thought will be permanently altered, and process philosophy will be better off for having done so. Gunter’s essay once and for all sets to rest the most popular criticism of Bergson that is made by process philosophers and repeated in textbooks and popular media by writers who do not bother to read Bergson for themselves. Even if these latter did apply themselves to the task, chances are they would fall victim to the same misunderstanding so widely held by process thinkers. Bergson is in part responsible himself for being misunderstood, for his language is in places loose, in places exaggerated, and in places vague. But Gunter has cut the Gordian knot, and the process community would do well to listen. Carl Hausman’s paper, and mine, amplify and give specific attention to aspects of Gunter’s thesis, and hopefully they may answer some of the questions readers of this journal will have. Hausman relates Gunter’s thesis to the Peircean framework, and I relate it to the Whiteheadian. More remains to be done in rectifying misconceptions about Bergson and putting his genuine ideas to work in the present, but hopefully the process will start and find considerable impetus here.

God, Process, and Persons: Charles Hartshorne and Personalism

It has been noted from time to time in the literature that the thought of Charles Hartshorne has a number of affinities with personalism, and this is a special case of the relationship between process and personalist thought. The latter is a tangled problem at best, but it is clear that among the important founders of the process perspective -- specifically I mean James, Peirce, Bergson, Whitehead, Dewey, and Hartshorne -- it is Hartshorne’s work which comes closest to being a kind of personalism.1 Whitehead explicitly sets aside the personalist perspective in Religion in the Making, considering its claims beyond the possibility of being established.2 On the other side, a number of personalists have been sympathetic to process thought, and Brightman is surely principal among them.3 Here I will not investigate the question of whether personalism in general, or even the idealistic type, is reconcilable with process thought. It will be enough if something can be established about the first question, Hartshorne’s "personalism."

The crux of this question emerges in the epistemological disagreements that Hartshorne and Brightman slugged out in their private correspondence between 1922 and 1945.4 But before getting to that, we should first contextualize the correspondence by surveying the history of personalist influences on Hartshorne. After that we will examine some of Hartshorne’s metaphysical commitments in relation to personalism. Then we will consider the differences between Hartshorne and Brightman regarding the nature and origin of knowledge. It will be necessary always to distinguish among three levels of discourse which are generally mixed together in the correspondence. These are: (1) metaphysical convictions; (2) methodological commitments; and (3) epistemological results (although obviously these are all related). Hartshorne and Brightman agree to a great extent about what there is. They agree less about what can be known, and have profound differences regarding how we know it. With respect to metaphysics, I will estimate the effects of these differences upon the notion of "person" at three existential levels: the monadic, the datum self and the divine. The discussions of knowledge and method must be carried out within the context of this metaphysical agreement. This will lead in the end to the more interesting question of what a personalist account of knowledge and method requires. From that standpoint we will be able to assess the extent to which it is accurate or fair to treat Hartshorne as a personalist.

I. Personalist Influences and Statements of Hartshorne

We must begin by noting that Borden Parker Bowne, largely regarded as the founder of personalism, was never an important influence in Hartshorne’s thinking. The only reference to Bowne in any of Hartshorne’s books appears in Philosophers Speak of God, and that occurs in an excerpt written by Brightman which is reprinted in the book. Further, Hartshorne identifies Brightman as "the principal founder of American personalism" in an article written in 1960, which suggests that he was practically oblivious to Bowne or to the other Boston personalists older than Brightman, such as Knudson and McConnell. G.H. Howison does occasionally appear in a reference, but Hartshorne never shows any awareness that Howison is considered a personalist. Nikolai Berdyaev was also an important influence upon Hartshorne, but Hartshorne does not associate Berdyaev’s thought with personalism. This does not mean that it would be fruitless to investigate the contribution Berdyaev’s personalism may have made to Hartshorne’s, but it will not be undertaken here.

This narrows down the historical question of Hartshorne’s personalism (or at least what Hartshorne calls personalism) to his debt to Brightman. This we will discuss. But it must also be added that a commitment to personalism is not dependent upon an historical connection to those who espoused it. There is also the matter of philosophical affinity with its viewpoint, which is far and away more important. Since Hartshorne’s entire notion of what personalism is derives from what Brightman says about it, these two questions may be fairly treated together, but with the reservation that there may be more to Hartshorne’s personalism than he himself would recognize, since he chooses to understand the perspective narrowly by identifying it almost exclusively with the views of Brightman.

Let us begin by looking at some of the reasons that Hartshorne might be called a personalist.

Sterling McMurrin has recently noted:

Hartshorne claims for his dipolar (absolute and relative) metaphysics that it overcomes the traditional antinomies 0f unity and plurality, being and becoming, the infinite and the finite, eternity and time, necessity and freedom. His attempt to justify this immodest claim by logical analysis is impressive. I find it rather surprising, however, considering his habit of frequently referring to the work of others, that in this and other connections he appears to make no references to the work of Borden Parker Bowne, whose personalistic world ground was intended to serve the same purpose -- the resolution of the metaphysical antinomies. He refers on occasion to the work of Bowne’s successor, Edgar S. Brightman, but usually in consideration of Brightman’s somewhat unique finitistic theology, Of course, Hartshorne gives considerable attention to the concept of God as personal, and he might well be regarded as a personalist, though he doesn’t fit the idealistic mode typical of American personalism. It would be interesting to have his comparative commentary on Bowne’s personalistic idealism which, though in a manner different from the influence of James or Hartshorne, has had, through Brightman and Ralph Tyler Flewelling, a considerable impact on the philosophy of religion. I can see marked similarities as well as differences in comparing Hartshorne with Bowne.5

The marked similarities and differences are what I will bring out here. Unfortunately, Hartshorne does not comment on McMurrin’s question about personalism in the "Reply" to it he wrote. But if there is a crucial similarity between Bowne and Hartshorne, it lies in their negative views on materialism. Hartshorne uses a refutation of materialism in his first book which Bowne himself could have written (except that if Bowne had written it, it would have been clearer).6

As McMurrin indicates, there is certainly prima facie reason to think of Hartshorne as a personalist. At the three metaphysical levels previously distinguished, the monadic, the datum self, and the divine, Hartshorne’s panentheism commits him to the existence of increasing degrees of consciousness at each level. If, as Brightman holds, the phenomenon of consciousness is really the key to understanding "persons," and the presence of consciousness can be identified with the presence of personhood, then Hartshorne is certainly a personalist as far as this goes. Acknowledging in one’s metaphysics that personality permeates the cosmos certainly seems an important step towards personalism.

A second important metaphysical commonality is that both Hartshorne and Brightman assert a certain passivity in God and in human selves.7 Brightman refers to this as the Given, and Hartshorne is willing to accept the reality of the Given, although the two thinkers disagree about what it is, and how it is known. As a metaphysical point, however, the Given exists for both. If the Given is an indispensable feature of consciousness and personality, as Brightman holds,8 then it is significant to analyzing Hartshorne’s "personalism" that Hartshorne accepts this point.

On the negative side of their agreement, both Brightman and Hartshorne make a strong distinction between the personhood of God and the anthropomorphic conception of God, denying any mutual implication between the two.9 Whatever it means to say that God is a person, it is clearly different from saying that the divine nature is adequately understood by simply generalizing upon human nature. If anything, human consciousness is understood by the two thinkers as a lesser, contingent -- or even fragmentary -- icon of divine consciousness.10 Not much more can univocally be said about the divine/human relation. Analogically, much can be said, but such assertion is always hypothetical for Brightman, while it is both abstract and literal for Hartshorne.11 We strive for logically consistent analogies among the three levels of being, but not identities. Hartshorne and Brightman agree, then, that humans are not identical to God, and that monads are not identical to God, which is to say that both reject pantheism.12 Brightman and Hartshorne both accept the reality of the monad, although Hartshorne is much more willing to speak about the experiences had by sub-human entities than was Brightman.13 This foreshadows their epistemological differences.

Another bit of prima facie evidence that might be considered in favor of Hartshorne’s "personalism" is that in Virgilius Ferm’s 1945 classic Encyclopedia of Religion, a work to which Brightman contributed forty articles,14 and in which Brightman had particular editorial input,15 the article on "God, as personal" was written by none other than Charles Hartshorne.16 This, along with Brightman’s review of me Divine Relativity (cited below), suggests that Brightman himself considered Hartshorne a personalist. Brightman never said outright that this was his view of Hartshorne, but the indications are persuasive that he did think in this way. This, if true, is a nice complement to the fact that Hartshorne considers Brightman a process philosopher.

But to focus the issue a bit more, when asked about his commitment to the personhood of God in a 1993 interview, Hartshorne said: "God is more personal than we are.... He is the ideal of personality. He is the most excellent person."17 This shows a basic continuity with Hartshorne’s position as developed almost fifty years before in The Divine Relativity, which is the most personalistic book Hartshorne has written to date. There, in a section entitled "Divine Personality," he says:

Maximizing relativity as well as absoluteness in God enables us to conceive him as a supreme person... but it is the divine Person that contains the Absolute, not vice versa.18

In short, "personhood" provides the broadest possible conception of God, containing all God’s relations, and even the part of God which is independent of all internal relations, God’s absoluteness. Personhood is God’s mode of existence, and since God’s mode of existence, in Hartshorne’s view, encompasses all possible and actual modes of existence,19 one would think that this commitment fairly well establishes Hartshorne as a personalist, at least in his metaphysics. He has certainly never retracted this view, or even expressed any doubts about it.

Yet, Hartshorne expressed privately in the correspondence his worry that "personalism is in danger of over generalizing the specifically human type of social relation" (Letter of May 8, 1939). The question becomes, then, in what does the divine personhood consist, and how is it similar to and different from on the one hand, the human datum self, and on the other hand, the monad? What can be known of this and how? It is in the light of these three levels of "selfhood" that we must approach the letters exchanged by Hartshorne and Brightman.

II. The Correspondence

Our focus now shifts to questions of knowledge and method. When Hartshorne and Brightman began pointedly to argue about the nature of the self in the correspondence (July 19,1935), the question was "how much and what is ‘given’ to the self?" Hartshorne refers Brightman to the following passage from The Philosophy and Psychology of Sensation in an effort to convince Brightman that there is more given to the self than just the datum self:20

He who thinks that the world, without any such unity of significance as constitutes an experience, would still have been or might be a real world, and who deduces this from the fact -- which spiritualism accepts -- that the world without a particular human personality, Mr. X is perfectly possible, must also be one who thinks that if from "himself" those qualities which make him Mr. X were to be subtracted, nothing of the nature of mind would remain -- in short, he is one who does not believe that other minds are members of himself. Such sheer privacy is the essence of what I call materialism.21

Brightman’s commitment to a particular interpretation of empirical method led him to resist this idea that more is given to the self than the datum self, and that other selves can be known as "members of himself." If other selves cannot be known as being members of ourselves, then for Brightman there is no warrant for saying that they are. He insists that Hartshorne is using abstractions (e.g., "experiences" of which we are unconscious) to build his epistemological case.22 One might, according to Brightman, infer or construct such "experiences," but only on the basis of what is truly given to the consciousness of the datum self, which is nothing more or less than the datum self. On this epistemological basis, Brightman opposes Hartshorne’s claim that selves literally participate in one another’s being. In Brightman’s view, one may, by a rational process (e.g., analogy) come to the conclusion that selves literally participate in one another’s being, as Hartshorne has done, but one cannot find conclusive evidence for it. This is Brightman’s fallibilism, and it points to Hartshorne’s over-willingness to have faith in the results of his deductions.

Here the monadic and divine levels become relevant. For Brightman the monad and God are constructed concepts, a rational extension of empirical method. For Hartshorne, monads and God are realities -- which make it possible for human consciousness to emerge and construct more or less adequate ideas and accounts of them. Hartshorne does not seem either to appreciate or understand the force of Brightman’s repeated point that monads, God, and other selves are not given in our conscious experience -- which is why Brightman thinks their existence must be inferred or constructed. Brightman also holds that, even though what is given to God -- and what God knows (which is everything which can be known) -- is vastly greater than what is given in our experience, a similar limitation applies to God. God must also make inferences and constructions in confronting the Given. God does not need a method as do we, but God must both remember the past and anticipate the future, which is to say that the past and future are not given to God in the same way as is the present. To deny this is to say that God is not temporal.23 Hartshorne concurs on the point about temporality, but not on the claim that God must make inferences in order to know the past. This latter point will be addressed in a moment.

For now the question is whether all of our present experience is also a part of God’s present experience. Or must it be constructed and/or inferred by God? Does God need imagination and the capacity to reason in order to know us as we are? For Hartshorne the answer to this is a qualified no: "If God knows all the universe, then God-and-the-universe contains no more items than God (as omniscient). Omniscience means immediacy, indirect knowledge cannot, I should suppose, be perfect" (Letter of January 22, 1942). God’s present awareness is sufficiently complete to encompass all of our experience and the way in which we experience it, and although God does not believe our erroneous beliefs, God does "suffer" them, and in that sense "contains" all of our experiences as we experience them. Still God does not have to infer or imagine us, for Hartshorne.24

But Brightman is less clear on this point. For him, our experience as we experience it is not given in God’s conscious experience, it is known indirectly by God, albeit perfectly (since God’s reasoning cannot fail), and God wants it that way; "When God intuits me, I am not a part of him, but he wills that I should be other than himself, yet known by him. May not his immanence be construed as reasonably in his purpose to maintain my otherness as in the theory that I am included within him?" (Letter of December 10, 1934). Thus, Brightman favors a sustaining God over a containing God. Brightman thinks that to deny this, as Hartshorne does, forces one’s viewpoint towards monism, since it leaves no difference (to us) between God’s experience of our experience, and our experience of our experience.25

The point for the present is this; we can see that while Brightman aims to start with an empirical epistemology and to allow it to guide his conclusions about what is metaphysically real, Hartshorne starts with metaphysical convictions about ultimate reality and a transcendental epistemology to support that metaphysical account (with logical rigor trusted to support our reasonings about the conditions for the possibility of our knowing anything at all, i.e., that God first knows us). The relationship between Hartshorne’s metaphysics and his epistemology is therefore the primary problem in Brightman’s view at this early stage in Hartshorne’s career. Hartshorne believes that his method is sufficiently empirical to support his claim to having an empirical epistemology, but he does not exclude transcendental argumentation from empirical method.

Brightman resists this approach in both the correspondence and in his published discussions of method,26 but the question is whether Brightman (or personalism) can maintain consistently such a narrow version of empiricism. In any case, Brightman attempted to maintain this position to the very end.27

An example of this problem might be helpful. In a single paragraph of his important article "A Temporalist View of God," Brightman makes the following assertions; "nothing real is timeless.... Eternity is a function of time... all things change except the logos of change .... God is not an abstraction, but a concrete, living reality." In the very next paragraph he says: "The only source of evidence for God is immediate experience, what I have elsewhere called the ‘datum self’.... All of the reasons for belief in God are but interpretations, more or less trustworthy, of this datum."28 How can empirical method and epistemology, narrowly defined, ever support such a prioristic claims?

Brightman, already in his maturity during the years of the correspondence, has his view well worked out, and endeavors to abide by the limitations this places upon him, even though he is willing to admit that a gray area exists between "what is given in experience" and "the definition of the Given." This is where Hartshorne could, and in some implicit ways does, drive a wedge in Brightman’s view, because Brightman is willing as a point of method to collapse metaphysical questions into epistemological questions.29 Hartshorne is not so willing, and thinks personalism must employ both inductive (empirical) and transcendental argumentation to support its own claims. This methodological point is the key to Hartshorne’s criticism of Brightman, since it later issues in an extreme epistemological problem for the latter.

Brightman’s unwillingness to acknowledge a kind of "literal participation" of selves in one another derives basically from his epistemological conviction that we experience the datum self as separate from other selves. From this he concludes that "monads have no windows through which existences or concrete realities may interact. Only purposes may interact" (Letter of May 12, 1939). Thus, our interaction with one another and with God is not literal participation, but a co-mingling of purposes. The question Hartshorne continues to press is not whether we do or do not experience other selves as a part of us, but whether other selves must be a part of us in order for us to experience them at all. Brightman will not go beyond an interaction of purposes.

An interesting question, then, which does not come up in the correspondence (but which is crucial to the case), would be "what is the being of purposes for Brightman?" On the one side, if purposes are a part of what is given in experience (and not merely a part of its definition), then would this not constitute a kind of literal participation, since "what is given" must certainly exist? In this case, even though purposes may be a part of what is given in experience, in order to be known they must still be inferred or constructed post hoc. Yet, how could we know whether they are mere constructions (abstractions) or truly reflect something given in experience? And the case is not even this simple, because on the other side Brightman sometimes speaks as though purposes are not given in experience. This is part of what he means by "the innocence of the given" -- that what is given is neither theory-laden nor value-laden, and it is not knowledge at all until it is reflected upon rightly, which is to say, until it has been analyzed according to the proper empirical method.30 So if purposes are given, then there is literal participation (whether it can be adequately known or not), while if purposes are not given, then what are they? Mere chimeras? How are they known? Do they exist?

This makes Brightman’s view of the given incoherent, in Hartshorne’s view. Too great an attachment to the datum self as a methodological starting point commits one unwittingly to solipsism, Hartshorne holds, since one could never achieve a sound epistemological basis for inferring the existence of anything beyond the datum self by this method.31 Further, if it is true that human beings are social all the way down, resistance to a literal participation in the being of a person by others (including their literal purposes) is also a form of impersonalism, according to Hartshorne’s analysis -- a charge from which Brightman would have reeled, had he realized that this was Hartshorne’s implication. The absence of literal participation would force one to assume that the human self is not essentially social, but is rather essentially alone and capable of existing without other selves. Thus, if it is true that the social nature of the self is ‘basic," as Hartshorne believes and Brightman agrees (Letter of January 31, 1943), then the denial of literal participation isolates what is most personal about persons, which then deprives them of their essentially personal (i.e., social) character -- i.e., No man is an island unto himself; To live alone is to be a beast or a God, etc. Ergo, it is impersonalism.32

Brightman seemed to realize that he was up against a genuine problem here, and that it would be necessary to work out the ontological status of purposes. Otherwise, his "privacy of method" might end in privacy of both knowledge and existence. He could not accept that result, and so set out to provide an account of the status of purposes in his last work.33 Had it not been for Hartshorne’s repeated challenges regarding this in the correspondence, I do not think Brightman would have ever addressed the problem in detail. This leads our discussion into very complex relationships, but if I may be permitted to summarize without doing full justice to the subtlety of Brightman’s view, his mature account goes something like the following. Purposes are associated with efficient and final causes, and with substance:

All cause is purposive. All substance is purposive. This does not mean that cause and purpose or substance and purpose are synonymous. What it means is that purpose is an essential and integral aspect of every efficient cause and of every substance -- namely of every person. The fundamental empirical basis for such a telic metaphysics is, of course, to be found in the shining present.... Every moment of the present includes (along with much else) a striving, a conation, a choice, a preference, or a purpose in some stage of development.34

Not content to stop with saying that purposes are given in all conscious experience, Brightman then extends himself beyond this to that which makes conscious experience possible:

It would seem strange indeed if all experience were purposive and truly real while the ‘illuminating absent" were devoid of purpose! Further, all that can rationally be said about that absent requires it to be viewed as interacting with human purpose, as itself conforming in all respects to the purpose of order and law, and also as exhibiting telic adaptations serving the ends of life and beauty and sublimity.35

From this we learn that purposes do indeed have being in Brightman’s view, and that they are given in experience (which seems at odds with value-free "innocence of the given’), and are a part of the "illuminating absent" (that which is not given to the datum self, but may be rationally inferred from what is given, e.g., the past) as well. Thus, there are purposes which have being in spite of the fact that they are not given in experience -- and since God has a datum self, or a shining present, as well as an illuminating absent (e.g., God’s past), then one may assume that there are purposes which are not given to God (ours for example). It does not follow that there are free-floating purposes out there, but it does follow that there is no unity of purpose in the sense of a place and time where all purposes are fully related to one another. This would seem to point to a thorough-going metaphysical and moral pluralism in Brightman, but he admits no such view.

Instead, Brightman goes still further in asserting that there is a total conformity of the nature of purposes beyond our experience to purposes given in our experience. But how can one know this on the basis of Brightman’s method?36

One may rephrase this question as follows: How are purposes given? Insofar as this question is addressed by Brightman, it is with a distinction he makes in the concept of "the given." Brightman distinguishes between the Given (with an upper case "G") and what is given in immediate experience (lower case "g"). This distinction is not explicit in the correspondence, perhaps because Brightman had not recognized the necessity of making it until after Hartshorne had shown him the difficulty. Brightman says in his last work that "the ‘shining present’ as a whole is given as immediate experience, while the past, the future, and the absent are inferred, postulated or believed in. The Given, however, is discovered by analysis as an aspect or constituent of every given experience. The Given is never given by itself."37 Thus, there is an identification of the shining present (i.e., the datum self) with the given (lower case "g"), while The Given is the given plus all our hypotheses, analyses, inferences and abstractions tacked on, along with whatever else toward which we are passive.

Clearly, this has an effect upon the question of whether purposes are given; since purposes are an essential aspect of all causes and substances, and since all causes and substances are persons, and at least one person is given in the shining present, then purposes are given.38 But they are not recognized as a part of The Given without inference and construction. When given purposes come to be known, they are known only abstractly and indirectly, in spite of their immediacy in a given experience. Thus, the purposes of others may be experienced as given, but only known as Given.

Those familiar with Hartshorne may immediately notice that Brightman’s distinction between the given and The Given precisely parallels Hartshorne’s distinction between relative and absolute -- and the whole host of phenomena which may be distinguished as either externally or internally related to one another.39 In Hartshorne’s language, The Given is only externally related to the given, while the given is internally related to The Given. I do not believe that Brightman was aware of this parallel, and I have seen no evidence that Hartshorne is either. But if this is an accurate accounting of Brightman’s mature view of givenness, then he has added something significant to Hartshorne’s view of this period, in that he has shown how not only God but we (and whatever sub-human persons there are) have a dipolar nature analogous to God’s. This provides a very important point of contact between Brightman and Hartshorne, and between personalism and process thought.

In any case, this distinction between the given and The Given is anticipated in the correspondence, as seen in Brightman’s willingness to admit some degree of "faintness" in the given.40 The real difference may lie in Brightman’s methodological desire to have the self (and what is given to and as the self, the shining present) clearly defined, while Hartshorne insists that not only the self, but also the given "is more or less vague," and must be so. Brightman in turn is willing to allow distinctions of faintness and clarity in the given as experienced, but not in the definition of The Given or in the datum self. Consider the following passage from Brightman’s letter of January 1,1939:

My view must indeed take as a postulate that there is a faint givenness, so faint that it is for the most part totally absent from the given -- a given that is not given. I see no contradiction in my postulate; yours seems to play on the term given in such a way as to assert that the very faint is both given and not given. I wish you would pull [my] criticism to pieces, for I am deeply interested in the problem and in your ideas.

Insisting upon clarity in the definition of The Given and the datum self is not the same as insisting upon clarity in the given phenomena of experience, and Brightman is again charging Hartshorne with mistaking abstractions (definitions) for concrete realities -- of misplaced concreteness. In Person and Reality, Brightman takes up this problem of "the given that is not given" in tremendous detail,41 and I think it quite likely that Hartshorne’s criticisms provide one of the primary the motivations for this undertaking.

Hartshorne answers Brightman’s invitation to cut his criticism to pieces both in the correspondence, and in the 1960 essay on Brightman.42 In the essay, Hartshorne attempts to show the incoherence of Brightman’s final statement of the nature of the self in Person and Reality. He never does address the difference between The Given and the given, however. Hartshorne’s criticisms in the correspondence and the review essay are quite technical and difficult to summarize. Perhaps the best way to present them is by looking at a test case -- the question of whether the past is or is not a part of The Given. As will be seen, this has an effect upon the matter of the ontological status of purposes.

III. The Past as a Test Case

In further elucidating this view of the self, Hartshorne believes that Brightman is cutting off the datum self, the shining present, from its own past. He points out that Brightman logically must allow the past self to be given to the present self immediately:

one’s past self is not merely inferred but is given, & ... this givenness of past in present is an essential aspect of what is meant by the endurance of the identical" self.... The specious present includes all preceding presents 0f the self, but the succeeding only in the vague or outline form constitutive of futurity. (This vagueness is not merely in the givenness but in its object, though subjective & objective sides coincide only for God since our foresight is much less definite than the laws of nature, which themselves are, however, not absolutely definite.) Though past specious presents are still given they are nevertheless past, because they are the less definite parts of the present. Thus my youthful aspirations & plans are less definite than my actual accomplishments since, even to absolute (divine) memory. (Letter of July 19, 1935)

Brightman responds, some eight years later (since this remains a point of contention between them throughout the correspondence):

Of course I’d not suppose that we know the past without inferring, The specious present -- the datum self -- contains a time-span 0f present, past, future, which, by acquaintance, gives us clues to pastness, otherness, and inferential reason. Knowledge (in memory or otherwise) is an elaboration of those clues. (Letter of July 12, 1943)

Hence, for Hartshorne, the past remains vague not only as given, but as Given (i.e., reflected upon, analyzed, and known to the extent humans are capable), whereas for Brightman, the past may be vague as given, but not as Given. Not even our most heroic acts of analysis of the past can make it as definite as the present for either. Hartshorne is willing to concede that "the own-self is the only individual distinctly given. All our difference of opinion concerns vague givens" (Letter of July 19, 1935). The argument turns upon the status of what is not distinctly given to the datum self -- in this case, the past, which both thinkers agree is not distinctly given.

But if Brightman admits some vagueness or faintness of either the past self or other selves, then he abandons the clean lines of his empirical methodology and begins ranging into its metaphysical presuppositions. The Given is no longer adequate to or exhaustive of the given, nor is the definition of the Given, or some parts of it, necessarily derived from the given. Hartshorne wants Brightman to recognize and admit that empirical methodology is always based upon metaphysical convictions, and that we cannot evade talking about them, even though we must use abstractions to do so.

Thus, using the vagueness of the past self as a test case, we can also see that there is a difference of "distinctness" in the way the datum self is given as opposed to other selves.43 Yet, literal participation of the one in the other is maintained, for Hartshorne, since the present self must at least literally participate in its own past self -- otherwise, personal identity is problematic, and this threatens personalism with precisely the sort of solipsism Hartshorne indicated from the beginning. For Hartshorne, the self is continuous with its earlier states, but even the present self, although given, is still vague to some degree (for instance, the experiences of each of my cells is not distinctly given). The self is made more definite through inference and imagination, Hartshorne and Brightman agree, but the past self is constructed entirely out of the shining present for Brightman, while Hartshorne thinks that the only reason that any such construction is possible is due to the literal participation of the present self in its past states. For Hartshorne, the difference between a self and its past (and other selves) is understood as a matter of degree, and known by how much inference and imagination is required in order to make the idea of that other self distinct.

Nevertheless, what inference and imagination accomplish for Hartshorne is identical with the object to be known, insofar as they accurately represent what is truly given (albeit vaguely). Under the best epistemological circumstances (i.e., God’s) there is an identity of knowledge and givenness, when knowledge is truly knowledge, for Hartshorne; on this point he departs from Brightman who maintains a firm distinction between knowledge of the given and the given -- this is a part of the general thesis about the "innocence of the given." For Brightman, even God confronts this difference. Hartshorne is quite willing to accept the distinction, but does not see in it the same limitations as Brightman, especially regarding God. It is our limitation, as Hartshorne says:

the seeming absence 0f other selves within experience is what my theory implies would characterize human experience, since a self on that level could not conveniently manage other selves as clearly and distinctly manifest to it, but only selves on such a low level that only vague mass awareness of them would reach full consciousness, for individually taken they are too trivial to notice. (Only God notes everything consciously, however trivial44

But Brightman holds firm to his empirical method when faced with such assertions: for him knowledge must be knowledge of something; otherwise it is not knowledge at all. In Brightman’s view, that is always knowledge of the given; for Hartshorne only God can know the given with complete clarity, and the rest of us cannot be certain (due to the vagueness of the given to our consciousness) what we know when we reflect upon, imagine, and infer things from the given. Inference and imagination can go astray, but the laws of nature and logic are reliable enough, in Hartshorne’s view, to guide us in making inferences and imagining "the other" as it really is; otherwise the knowledge of nature, God, and the self could not increase through history, as Hartshorne is convinced it does. Hartshorne concludes then that "all selves are identical as well as different, and thus the cosmic identity of God (and of being) is accounted for. All real questions, as Peirce said, are questions of degree, on this view" (Letter of July 19, 1935). This may seem paradoxical unless one realizes that for Hartshorne the question of truth (and true knowledge) and the question of the existence of God are the same question. In an interview in 1993 Hartshorne gave the following analysis:

Isn’t it true that the American Indians (which have been in the Americas for at least ten thousand years, maybe a good deal longer) -- each one of those Indians must have had his or her own personal experiences? Rut what makes it true that they had these experiences? There’s nothing that you could find now in the universe that could tell you what they were. And how could there ever be anything that could tell you what they were? So the idea of truth gives you the same problem that the idea of God does, and that, to me, is the reason why I believe in God. I don’t see how without God there can be any truth. How can it be truth that they didn’t have their own personal experiences? They were persons, but the whole question of what history is about comes in. . . . Is history only about what there are present proofs of? Then it isn’t about very much of what must have happened. That’s one of my reasons for believing in God, the problem 0f God is the same as the problem of truth. How can there be truth about the past when there’s nothing in the present world which seems to tell anything about them?45

Aside from being an excellent example of Hartshorne’s commitment to transcendental argumentation, this shows the relationship between the question of the self and the nature of God for Hartshorne, and how the question of the past ties them together. Coming to an adequate view of God is a condition for properly understanding the human self, and also the monad, for whatever the truth of the lesser beings may be, it is a vague and specialized case of what the supreme being knows. This is a peculiar epistemological stance, but Hartshorne insists that it is empirical; it is merely abstract, which is not the same thing as a priori.

The tie with the past is seen in the related issue of literal participation in the being of the creator by the creatures -- which is the only way Hartshorne can make sense of the idea of creation.46 Yet, Hartshorne is at pains to distinguish his sense of "participation" from Plato’s methexis. Hartshorne later says that real creativity "is not content with actualizing ‘images’ which are antecedently, or eternally, in being, but rather produces ‘new images’, sheer additions to the ‘forms of definiteness.’"47 Both the questions of creativity and truth are modes of God’s givenness to human experience, and it is through the problem of relating to our past selves, the past selves of others, and the past of the universe that this question becomes focused.

Hartshorne insists to Brightman the following:

unless God is given I do not see how he could be inferred, for the foundation of inference beyond immediacy seems to me necessarily the reality of God as the ground of world order. If God were not given could he be constructed? Is the idea of God the expression of what is directly apprehended, though vaguely, or is it a pure hypothesis to explain data in an experience which has no immanent transcendence, which experiences only its experience? (Letter of July 31, 1937)

Hartshorne thinks this difference on the nature of the self and the nature of God is a mostly verbal dispute, and that he and Brightman do indeed share the same view. Brightman is less sure, and it is now his turn to charge Hartshorne with inviting solipsism:

The given surely does not mean my given, does it? If so, it sounds solipsistic, in spite of mutual immanence; it would have to be at least "our given." Yet the belief that any aspect of my given is also ours would be an additional postulate, akin to the postulate that what is totally absent from consciousness is really faintly given. If I were to grant that all principles of explanation are capable of illustration in someone’s given sometime, and were allowed to locate the principle of interaction in the given of God, I could follow this principle. Otherwise, not. It seems to me that my postdates are less arbitrary than the ungiven given, my absolute less absolute than yours! (Letter of January 1, 1939)

But for Hartshorne, this amounts to saying that, so far as we can know, there is no God, and no other selves, and thus Brightman is really the solipsist -- for our experience cannot just spontaneously occur; it is made possible by what is not our present selves (and this includes our past selves), whether all that is distinctly given or not. Brightman is saying, in effect, that the experience of the datum self is (or can be) knowledge, but only of what is given to the datum self. For Hartshorne this would imply knowledge of something which can (and perhaps even must) exist independently, without us, and without our knowledge of the things upon which its existence depends. Hence, Hartshorne is claiming that Brightman’s account presupposes knowledge (of independent, ungiven existences, e.g., the past) of a sort his method cannot provide -- and therefore, it requires us to know what we cannot know. That is the contradiction Hartshorne sees in Brightman’s view.

IV. Where Metaphysics and Epistemology Touch

The key may lie in understanding Brightman’s statement that "My heart is dualistic, yours monistic. For me, I am directly aware only of my own experience" (Letter of May 12, 1939). Hartshorne is willing to begin with the metaphysical reality of God and other selves (not just as a postulate, but as concrete existences), and then to use inference and imagination to provide an account of their nature and relations -- an account which can he more or less adequate to its object, given the limitations of our form of consciousness. Brightman insists that we must start with our own human experience and infer the metaphysical reality only of what reasonably follows from that experience, and the contents of these inferences will never be more than hypothetical -- and it is difficult to be certain how adequate they are to the phenomena, since those phenomena are not given as they are in themselves.

Hartshorne’ s reasoning is from the "outside in" or transcendental (metaphysical reality makes certain experiences possible) regarding metaphysics, and from the "inside out" (empirical) in epistemology (that metaphysical reality is inferred and imagined upon the basis of what is experienced, abstractly, but literally). Brightman’s reasoning is from the "inside out" (empirical) in both cases; in this regard he calls himself an "empiricist of consciousness,48 which also explains his willingness, evidently motivated by a fondness for his method, to collapse epistemological and metaphysical questions. Brightman is more Humean, then, while Hartshorne is more Kantian, methodologically speaking. Both are fallibilists, but by all rights Brightman should be more of a skeptic and naturalist than Hartshorne. Interestingly, Brightman is the one professing idealism, and Hartshorne naturalism.

In a very real sense, Brightman’s metaphysics has been reduced to his epistemology49 which he then, ignoring Hume’s skeptical warnings, tries to extend out into the metaphysical world -- building a bridge over the river of doubt with an abutment on only one side. This is why Brightman is a "dualist at heart"; he recognizes the difficulty, nay, the near impossibility of safely gaining the other side, while being convinced (for no clear reason) that there is another side. In Humean fashion, Brightman does not expect to complete this bridge, given the tools he has to build it, but what was skepticism in Hume becomes fallibilism in Brightman, and in direct proportion to their willingness to trust philosophic method -- a matter regarding which Hume had a more thorough suspicion. Hume would perhaps say that the other bank is more a useful habit of our thinking than a real bank while Brightman is not so diffident.

Meanwhile, Hartshorne’s has two starting places: he is building a bridge over the river of doubt in his epistemology, while digging a tunnel under it from the other side with his metaphysics. This is why Brightman calls Hartshorne a monist, and an absolutist -- Hartshorne is adequately convinced of the organic unity of reality as to think that such a dual strategy operates upon the same unified reality; in short, he expects to finish both the bridge and tunnel, and to be able to have conquered the river of doubt in the human way -- it remains a river, but one which can be negotiated without getting (overly) wet. We might suppose that James and Dewey are willing to try their luck at wading across the thing, while Peirce is busily building a ferry out of the somewhat flimsy materials of language. The classical pragmatists have a closer relation to doubt than do the personalists and more speculative process thinkers like Whitehead, Bergson and Hartshorne.

But Hartshorne uses his tunnel to gain an abutment on both sides of the river for his bridge, and his bridge to do the needed surveying for his tunnel. His conviction that this can be accomplished rests upon his faith in God on the one side and logical rigor on the other -- his belief that his tools are indeed adequate (for humans to have the kind of knowledge humans can have); that our knowledge of God, although partial, is really knowledge of God as God is. Hartshorne affirms neither a narrow empiricism nor wholly unempirical a priorism; yet, neither can he abide a narrow rationalism or absolutism. He says "if there is no a priori metaphysical knowledge, then I think agnosticism is the right conclusion,"50 and of course he rejects agnosticism. Yet, he also makes it abundantly clear that all a priori knowledge must be based on some kind of empirical experience.51

Brightman has serious reservations about Hartshorne’s tunnel, and the tools he is using to dig it (transcendental arguments as applied to given experience about what must be in order for us to be what we are), and he is also dubious regarding the bridge, although he sanctions the tools (reason, inference and imagination) in a more limited way. Hartshorne acknowledges that his tools are not perfect,52 but is unconvinced that the fact that probability" enters into all deduction means that we should seriously doubt the conclusions of those deductions -- any more than we should doubt the conclusions of deductive mathematics. Here it is clear that Hartshorne is working with a Peircean idea of "genuine doubt," while Brightman is taking seriously the broader hyperbolic doubt of the Cartesian tradition. In this regard, Hartshorne is probably more truly an empiricist than Brightman, and Brightman’s professed epistemological dualism was bound to expose its Cartesian heritage at some point. This is that point.

There is some measure of resolution of this issue in that the two thinkers can agree upon the fact of mutual immanence among selves, monads, and of God in relation to both. However, what they mean by this at first appears quite different. For Hartshorne this "mutual immanence is literal participation in one another’s being. For Brightman it is only mutual immanence of purpose.53 This brings us back to the all important question of the status of purpose for Brightman, for it is here that Brightman is willing to acknowledge some real interaction among the three metaphysical levels of personhood. Brightman perhaps concedes Hartshorne’s point in the following:

Starting with my actual experience, which is the datum self, I am led to distinguish between ... hypothetical entities which were once or which may become my actual experience (and which as a whole history are my total self) and those other hypothetical entities which constitute the environing universe, interacting with me yet never a part of me. Among such entities I should count my body, my subconscious, society, the natural order, and God. My fundamental category is purpose. I can understand my universe only in terms of the purpose that there shall be otherness. Hence, I deny windows through which parts of anything else can come in or go out, but not windows through which purposes may interact. (Letter of May 12, 1939)

Hence, monads, other selves, and God all have windows -- there is a positive relation between purposes on the one side and selves on the other. What then are "purposes"? We are back to the question of whether they are given to the datum self. We have seen that Brightman answers this question in the affirmative. Clearly, the datum self’s own purposes are given to it, but this cannot contain the "otherness" of which Brightman spoke, nor can it exhaust the positive relationship between God’s purposes and the datum self. In order to understand the simultaneous givenness and otherness of purpose, one may have two options: first, sometimes my own purposes conflict and I am at odds with myself, and sometimes this conflict cannot be resolved except by giving up one purpose or the other. Is this how I learn about otherness of purpose? That seems untrue to experience, and I think Brightman would have to reject it. Rather, we learn about otherness of purpose by the brute resistance of the other to our purposes – whether this is a child who has been told no, or a plant that is thwarted in its effort to grow towards the light by a pair of pruning shears, otherness of purpose is, at its ground, metaphysically other at the outset, and epistemologically other only emergently. We reflect upon what thwarts our purposes only because we have in fact been thwarted in what is given -- and this is how we come to the abstract idea of the Given -- our reflective account of our own passivity in the face of otherness. But if we are concretely impeded by something in what is immediately given, the otherness of purpose, then is this otherness the purpose of some being beyond what is immediately given? Or is it simply free-floating otherness of purpose? We have already seen that Brightman rejected the idea that we ourselves are the source of the given and of otherness of purpose. What further alternatives have we besides saying either that the otherness of purpose I experience has its source in the purposes of another being, or that purposes other than mine are somehow just loose in the universe? Brightman acknowledges that at least some of the other purposes I experience are God’s. But in this case, God must be more than inferred or constructed -- God is given in the otherness of purposes, and our awareness of the discrepancies between divine purposes and our own (the common words for this are sin, fallenness, guilt, conscience, or the moral sense). This requires that there be a moral God as a transcendental condition of my experience, and Brightman’s method cannot give warrant to such a claim.

Thus, by construing otherness of purpose as basic to his philosophy, Brightman is digging a metaphysical tunnel of his own under the river of doubt; but he digs only at night, and wearing a blindfold, and does not remember doing so in the light of day. This boils down to saying that Brightman has a metaphysical theory of providence or purpose which is not grounded in his experiential method, except post hoc, abstractly. He is caught in a vicious epistemological circle, not unlike the Cartesian circle. Furthermore, for him, God has the same epistemological problem as we do. God knows us only by inference and construction, and our purposes only as an otherness of purpose in what is given to God -- in their disvalue, their fallenness. Hartshorne says as much of Brightman in discussing him in Man’s Vision of God:

[Brightman’s] notion of the Given as an intrinsic limitation of God’s power, a passive element in his activity, analogous to sensation and emotion in us, can be defined and defended only in the context of an adequate analysis of what is or can be meant by "passivity," "sensation," etc.; and the exploration of such concepts taken in their most fundamental or general senses, as they here must be, can only amount to a metaphysical system whose defense is not merely empirical, since the very meaning of "experience," "facts," etc., will have to be grounded in this system.54

Regarding God’s part in this, Hartshorne says: "I hold that the experience of God as the principle of interaction is useless as explanation unless we can reach God on the basis of what we experience, and on this basis must rest also the knowledge of interaction between us and God which enables us to conceive Him" (Letter of January 30, 1939). This is why Anselm’s version of the ontological proof for the existence of God is so vital to Hartshorne’s thought, while Brightman never placed much stock in it (but perhaps should have). Brightman basically concurs with the point about God’s Importance, but objects to the necessitarian phrasing, and adds that

any God must confront a given. However, the nature 0f such a given must always be deduced from experience. In general, any God (as creative will) must confront within the total unity of his consciousness a twofold Given, consisting of Form (logic, mathematics, Platonic ideas) and Matter (brute fact content, a "receptacle"). What amazes me about the traditional view of God is that it admits the eternal nature of form, but will not admit this as a given. (Letter of May 12, 1939)

Hartshorne agrees:

Your notion of the ‘given’ to God seems close to what I think of as the dependence of God upon the past as the sum of acts of more or less free beings, to whose activity God is passive, since otherwise it would not be real activity. Since the past never began, as I take it, God never at any moment, or in any act, for all his acts were at a moment, had a clean slate to just make a world out of the realm of logical possibilities, but always had to make the best of a world that could have been better. (Letter of January 30, 1939)

Note that the two thinkers have emerged on the far side of their epistemological differences here, and are finding agreement on metaphysical issues.

V. Hartshorne’s Personalism?

The question this leaves is whether this epistemological dispute places Hartshorne outside of personalism in any important way. In Hartshorne’s own view it does, but I think that conclusion rests upon Hartshorne’s willingness to treat Brightman’s version of personalism as being the only real or important version of that philosophy. On the contrary, however, ought we not ask ourselves whether Brightman’s commitment to a narrow version of empirical method, his subsequent willingness to collapse metaphysical and epistemological issues, and his account of the datum self are crucial parts of personalist philosophy? These are the ideas to which Hartshorne objected. My response is that not only are these not important elements of a personalist philosophy, they are in fact Brightman’s greatest weaknesses. They expose him to the charges of solipsism which Hartshorne mentions in the correspondence, and even impersonalism (which is implied but not mentioned). Hartshorne’s charges are not proven, but he has a case. Brightman was as intellectually honest as any philosopher I know of, and the following expression of his uncertainty seems to suggest that he knows Hartshorne has raised issues his philosophy cannot handle:

Your worry about my philosophy is the idea that other selves are merely inferred but never given, you say. It is also my worry, a worry such as one experiences when one has a debt far larger than one can possibly pay. I’d like to be able to make sense out of the idea of a literal participation in other selves. But I have not yet been able to do so. Whenever I try, I find myself landed in contradiction, in epistemological chaos, and in unfaithfulness to experience -- all of which is hopelessly unenlightening, I know. (Letter of December 10, 1934)

The demand, then, that Hartshorne must meet is to give an account of literal participation which avoids contradiction, epistemological chaos, and unfaithfulness to experience. The fact that Brightman could not accomplish this (although he did not give up the effort) does not mean it cannot be done. It is interesting, to note, however, that Hartshorne has sought throughout his work to avoid precisely these pitfalls while maintaining a doctrine of literal participation. His success in this endeavor has been enormous, if not complete. In many ways this argument with Brightman can be seen as a formative moment in Hartshorne’s thinking which taught him as much about what he could not allow into his thought as about what he could.

I cannot settle the question here beyond all dispute, but my view of the matter is that Hartshorne’s approach is actually an enlargement and corrective which personalism needed55 -- that it saves personalism from tendencies which would lead it towards the reification of personality at one extreme, or a sort of solipsism which implies impersonalism at the other. In short, I am claiming that Hartshorne is a more thoroughgoing personalist than Brightman, and that any version of personalism which does not treat Hartshorne’s thought as personalistic is missing out on the most important corrective to and up-dating of personalist metaphysics and epistemology in the second half of the 20th century.

There is neither space nor time here to delve deeply into the particulars of how Hartshorne has corrected and expanded personalism, but allow me to present one final passage from the correspondence which suggests much about his expansion of personalism. The question of the literal participation of selves in one another’s being finally worked its way beyond the question of purposes and into the question of whether one mind can "contain" another mind. Hartshorne insists that it can -- because mind is dipolar. God can contain all my beliefs, including my erroneous beliefs, without believing them. Rather, God suffers my errors passively. Brightman thinks that any doctrine of that sort is pantheistic, and that no mind contains other minds, because a mind is a unitary, independent mode of being for Brightman. Any act of mind is an act of the entire mind. In this context, Hartshorne writes;

If a belief within a mind is not an act of that mind you cannot imagine what it is an act of. Of course, [it is] an act of some other mind within the first mind. This you hold to be impossible... but you argue: if any God contains my act as mine but not as his, then my act is not his in any personal sense, and contain" is impersonal or abstract. This assumes there are but two possibilities: personally containing an act by enacting it, and impersonally containing it. Naturally this only gives a verbal shift to the same old question. I hold that there are two ways of personally containing, concretely as a person containing, a belief, or an act, by believing it, and by suffering it as enacted, believed by an included mind, included by virtue of the "suffering" relation, as one’s own beliefs are included by an active relation. There is some activity in the suffering in a sense, for God’s doing is necessary to our doing, but it is not sheer doing but is also a being done in and to.56

Here we begin to get an indication of the nature of Hartshorne’s expansion of personalism. Where Brightman had remained ensnared in a Kantian view of mental activity -- and it would be difficult also to miss that his problem with the given and The Given parallels Kant’s problems with appearances and things in themselves relative to the production of knowledge, and the phenomenal and noumenal with respect to valuation -- Hartshorne has broken through. The self and God are dipolar, and to be a person is to be both relative and absolute, to act in suffering the acts of another, and to be receptive (in the sense of organic sympathy) in acting. To be a person is to be social all the way down, which means to have one’s being literally participate in the being of others. This is the advance that Hartshorne’s dipolar theory offers to personalism. There may also be an important advance which Brightman’s theory of the given and The Given can offer to process epistemology, but that question will have to be taken up in a further study.57

 

Notes

1. I have argued elsewhere that Dewey’s pragmatism is reconcilable with personalism at least in the domain of education. See "Is There Room for God in Education?" Public Affairs Quarterly 9 (1995), 1-13.

2. Whitehead, Religion in the Making (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1926 and new edition, with the same pagination, published in New York: Fordham University Press, 1996): ‘Thus religious experience cannot be taken as contributing to metaphysics any direct evidence for a personal God in any sense transcendent or creative" (74). Cf. also page 66.

3. Hartshorne definitely thought of Brightman as a process philosopher, largely on the basis of Brightman’s "A Temporalist View of God" in The Journal of Religion 12 (1932), 545-555, which Hartshorne cites with some frequency in his writing of the 1930s, 1940s and 1950s. Cf. Hartshorne’s statements about whom he holds to be the true process idealists in "A Reply to My Critics," The Philosophy of Charles Hartshorne, edited by Lewis E. Hahn (LaSalle, Ill.: Open Court, 1991), 712-713.

4. The correspondence is held, for the most part, in the Special Collections division of the Mugar Memorial Library at Boston University. Other parts of the correspondence, including one complete letter not available at the Mugar Library, are held by the author, a gift of Charles Hartshorne. The complete correspondence will appear in the coming year in a book edited by the present author and Mark Y. Davies. Another study of this same correspondence has been published by Robert A. Gillies, ‘The Brightman-Hartshorne Correspondence, 1934-1944," Process Studies 17(1988), 9-18. I will make use of this study (which I regard as quite good), but a few factual corrections could be made which I will not go into here.

5. McMurrin, "Hartshorne’s Critique of Classical Metaphysics and Theology," The Philosophy of Charles Hartshorne, edited by Lewis E. Hahn, 435-436.

6. Cf. Hartshorne, Philosophy and Psychology of Sensation (Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 1934), 101. This passage is quoted below.

7. See, for example, Hartshorne, The Divine Relativity (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1948), 77; Brightman, The Problem of God (New York; Abingdon Press, 1930), 113; also, perhaps the clearest explanation of Brightman s notion of passivity is in Personality and Religion (New York; Abingdon Press, 1934), 82ff. In the correspondence (June 5, 1943) Hartshorne says:

Maybe it is time to list some of the things we do agree upon. They are considerable.

1) God knows all things perfectly, including all our acts.

2) What we do, our acts, are done by us not by God.

3) Would you also say that in so far as we are active God is passive, that he suffers what we do?

Gillies also notes these passages as important in The Brightman-Hartshorne Correspondence, 1934.1944," 16.

8. See Brightman, "Do We Have Knowledge-by-Acquaintance of the Self?" The Journal of Philosophy 41(1944), 694-696: "Reflection leads us to the conclusion that the given is always a datum self. That is, it is a conscious experience, connected by memory and anticipation with past and future ‘datum selves,’ as well as being connected by causal interaction with its environment" (695).

9. See, for example, Hartshorne, The Divine Relativity,59; and Brightman, The Problem of God, 116.

10. For example one may think of Hartshorne’s well-known doctrine from The Divine Relativity that we can know and love ourselves only because God knows and loves us (see 16-17). In Brightman’s case one may see the same mode of thought at work in his account of unconscious purposes in Person and Reality, edited by P. Bertocci, J.E. Newhall and R. S. Brightman (New York: Ronald Press, 1958). There he suggests that our tendency to call purposes unconscious is a misleading way of speaking, since they are in fact God’s conscious purposes (see 207-209). This will become an important issue later in this essay.

11. Brightman is very cautious about using analogies in speaking about God, particularly if they involve spatializations of the relations. Here he follows a criticism that Bowne often made of "picture-thinking." See especially Brightman’s letter of October 31, 1942. and Borden Parker Bowne, Introduction to Psychological Theory (New York: Harper and Bros., 1887), 148-149; and Metaphysics, revised edition (New York: Harper & Bros., 1898), 152. Hartshorne is much bolder about the use of analogy. See The Divine Relativity, 30-40; Man’s Vision of God, 174-211; and his letters to Brightman of November 9, 1942, and June 5, 1943. In the latter, Hartshorne responds to Brightman’s charge of "picture thinking" as follows:

I think the debate about analogy is a misunderstanding between us. My point was an analogy between our minds and the divine. You don’t avoid such analogy. The very word "mind" means it. We are agreeing here I imagine. We both seek that in our experience to which certain features in God’s experience can be thought analogous. For surely they are not identical with features of our experience. In other words analogy means generalization here.

This statement seems to settle the matter in the correspondence, and Hartshorne refocuses the issue upon disagreements about how to describe human experience, rather than its analogousness to divine experience.

12. A subject of considerable debate between Hartshorne and Brightman in the last years of the correspondence is whether Hartshorne is or is not a pantheist. Hartshorne certainly claims he is not a pantheist, and complains that Brightman does not understand or appreciate the difference between pantheism and panentheism. Gillies has treated this aspect of the debate as well as it can be in "The Brightman-Hartshorne Correspondence: 1934-1944," 14-15. I would add to Gillies’ research the following passage by Hartshorne which describes his relation to pantheism, published shortly after having it out with Brightman over this issue:

It will perhaps appear that our argument defines a "pantheistic" not atheistic position. But we have not identified God or perfect being with the totality of things in any sense which prevents him from being personal and free with respect to them; for he is the flexibly self-identical totality, which is so radically independent of its parts (and they, in another way, of it) that it will be itself, no matter how they, as contingent and more or less free beings, develop .... This view should be called "panentheism not pantheism. Many tread Brightman and secondarily Whitehead] actually define "pantheism" as the doctrine that God is impersonal; but they also intend it to mean that God is the whole. Now this double definition neatly begs the question whether or not the whole is personal. ("The Formal Validity and Real Significance of the Ontological Argument," 241-242.)

One cannot possibly understand the full reason why Hartshorne includes this passage in the article unless one has read the correspondence. This passage is also the reason that the article interested Brightman enough to "respond promptly" with his final preserved letter on May 19, 1944.

13. For Brightman the term "monad" seems almost interchangeable with the "datum self-which not only human beings have, but also God. He did not really think of monads as little bits of stuff of which the universe is made, and he was not a panpsychist. It may be the case that while Hartshorne works within the three "levels of being" set Out earlier, Brightman really has only two-the datum self and God. If that is the case, then including the monadic as a separate level in this paper already favors Hartshorne’s view. However, Brightman was quite willing to speak about "monads," and never explicitly identifies them with the datum self. It is unclear whether they constitute a different level of being, but at the least, the vocabulary is not inappropriate.

Also, in at least two instances, Brightman mentions in print that he thought there may be sub-human persons," and this suggests that perhaps he is at least open to discussing what I have been calling the "monadic level." See Brightman, ‘Philosophical Ideas and Enduring Peace," Approaches to World Peace: Fourth Symposium, edited by L. Bryson, Cr al. (New York: Conference on Science, Philosophy and Religion, 1944), 545, 570. Hartshorne gives a brief commentary on this paper by Brightman on page 557.

For Hartshorne, the term "monad" really means occasion of experience, and these must have a material aspect. They are also infused with a tiny portion of consciousness, or feeling of feeling. The needed material aspect, or more properly, sensible aspect, is what makes feeling of feeling, or mutual immanence, possible as the basic relation of all actual entities. Even God must have a body for Hartshorne, i.e., the universe. But Hartshorne, as his career progressed became less and less willing to use the term monad," and he accepted Fechner’s distinction between the two types of panpsychism (or "psychicalism," as Hartshorne came to prefer): the ‘monadic," which he associates with Leibniz and rejects, and the "synechological" which he associates with Fechner’s view and is willing to accept with some qualifications. See Hartshorne, Insights and Oversights of Great Thinkers: An Evaluation of Western Philosophy, 248-249. One thing is certain: both Brightman and Hartshorne reject the Spinozistic version of pantheism.

14.This is according to the bibliography compiled by Jannette E. Newhall in The Philosophical Forum XII (1954), 27. Also, Albert C. Knudson, a far more established personalist than Hartshorne, not only contributed liberally to the same volume, but even wrote the general article on "God" immediately preceding Hartshorne’s article on ‘God, as personal." Ferm had two more established personalists to choose from, and the benefit of their editorial advice, and still asked Hartshorne to write the single article most near and dear to the personalist position.

15. See Ferm’s "Editor’s Preface," Encyclopedia 0f Religion (New York: Philosophical Library, 1945), vii.

16. See Ferm, Encyclopedia of Religion, 302-303.

17. Interview for KOCU Television, Oklahoma City, OK; December 1, 1993. Cf. Appendix III to the forthcoming book, God, Process and the Self The Philosophical Correspondence of Charles Hartshorne and Edgar Sheffield Brightman, 1922-1945.

18. Hartshorne, The Divine Relativity, 142-143. Cf. also 39-40, 88-89.

19. For example, Hartshorne’s statement in his Letter to Brightman of January 22, 1942 "in God’s immediacy is everything, everything actual as such, everything potential also as such."

20. What Brightman refers to as the "datum-self" in the correspondence and in his work in the 1930s and 1940s, is called the "shining present" in his most mature work (late 1940s/early 1950s).

21. Hartshorne, Philosophy and Psychology of Sensation, 101.

22. See Brightman’s letter of May 12, 1939.

23. See Brightman, "A Temporalist View of God," 555.

24. Cf. Hartshorne, Man’s Vision 0/God, 289.

25. In his review of Man’s Vision of God, Brightman issues the following challenge:

Does Hartshorne meet the case against pantheism? Although rejecting pantheism, he Is too sympathetic with it. He notes that the argument against pantheism is that an omniscient mind could not contain lesser minds as parts of itself without entertaining their partly erroneous beliefs (289). He then goes on to a subtly meant refutation to the effect that "the only way to contain a belief is actively to believe it. But perhaps one can passively suffer it." In thus arguing, Hartshorne omits the main point, which is that if one mind is part of another, then the former must be included as it is, with all its actively erroneous beliefs. If active error is not God’s, then something is not God, and pantheism is refuted. (99)

This is a shortened version of Brightman’s refutation of pantheism in The Problem of God, 115f. Hartshorne responds to this in his letter of January 22, 1942 as follows:

I do not say that there is nothing which is not (in every sense) God. I only say there is nothing which is not m some sense God.... what I say is not that God has no errors but that he commits none, that he suffers rather than does the doings of his parts. When I think a simple thought am I as simple as the thought? Why then must God be as ignorant as our thoughts when he also has them in a certain sense as his thoughts> the actively erroneous beliefs are "included in" God but are God’s only in the sense of beliefs he includes, not those he believes. You are saying, to include a belief is to have it in the sense of believing it.... And to include an ignorant belief is to have it in the sense of being no wiser. The ground?

26. See especially Person and Reality, 22ff., where Brightman explicitly rejects Kant’s approach as non-empirical, and then characterizes his own method, using James’ phrase, as "radical empiricism" which "will assume no source of information about the real, other than the experience of conscious persons" (23). He calls this "personalistic method," and emphasizes that "the term ‘personalistic’ is not used to anticipate the outcome of the use of the method, but to insist on the duty of the metaphysician to include all the data provided by personal consciousness" (23). Also see the defense of his method in Personality and Religion, 86-97.

27. Cf. also Brightman, Person and Reality, 35ff.

28. Brightman, "A Temporalist View of God," 544-545.

29. For example, in Brightman’s article "The Self, Given and Implied -- A Discussion, "Journal 0f Philosophy, 31(1934), 263-268, he actually says that "‘The Innocence of the Given’ treats of the fundamental epistemological situation, which is just as truly the fundamental metaphysical situation" (263).

30. The phrase "the innocence of the given" and its meaning Brightman takes from an essay by Donald C. Williams, ‘The Innocence of the Given," in The Journal of Philosophy 30 (1933), 617-628. Brightman responded to this article (cited above) early the next year; and Williams’ replied in the same issue (268-269). It is interesting that Williams’ response makes substantially the same criticism of Brightman as Hartshorne makes. In answer to Brightman’s view "that immediate experience is a part or a product of what is customarily called a self or person, Williams replies that this is "rather the apex than the foundation of a philosophy, and not properly described as ‘an experienced fact’ nor its acceptance as ‘radically empirical’" (268). In a phrase’ Williams is pointing out that Brightman’s deepest commitments are metaphysical and non-empirical. Cf. also Brightman, "Do We Have Knowledge-by-Acquaintance of the Self?" (cited above) 694-696.

31. Brightman is not unaware of this problem. Even before the discussion of this issue in the correspondence began he formulated this exact criticism of himself and attempted to answer it in Personality and Religion, 66-97. There he gives a fairly unsatisfactory account of how a strict empiricist may slowly build a reliable case that both reason and value given in experience point beyond our experience, and lead us through three stages of knowledge-other selves are known first, then nature, and finally the personal God. It is quite possible that Hartshorne’s criticisms m the correspondence led Brightman to see the partial inadequacy of this kind of defense. After the correspondence Brightman even begins to sound like a mystic whose confidence in reason is exhausted; see The Spiritual Life (New York: Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1947), especially 135-137. However, he still has not abandoned his confidence in the idea that value points beyond itself to a reality greater than is given in experience.

Brightman’s three stages in Personality and Religion are reminiscent of Descartes’ attempt in the Meditations to restore our knowledge of the world on the basis of the cogito, but there the order is self, God, other minds, and finally nature. It seems fair to say that Descartes did more for skepticism than for knowledge by attempting to escape solipsism through reason. Brightman may have re-enacted the same process, and with similar effect.

32. Brightman emphasizes the social character of human persons, but not as much as does Hartshorne. For example, Brightman puts explicit limitations on the sociality of personhood in Personality and Religion (New York: Abingdon Press, 1934), 144-148.

33. See Brightman, Person and Reality, 206ff. For a fuller treatment of this issue, see my essay, "Process Personalism," forthcoming in The Personalist Forum 15 (1999).

34. Brightman, Person and Reality, 206-207. The influence of Kant’s natural teleology in the Critique of Judgment should be noted here.

35. Brightman, Person and Reality, 207.

36. Brightman seems to recognize that this is a stretch for him, for when he asks of himself the same question after his correspondence with Hartshorne has ceased, Brightman expresses epistemological diffidence, counterbalanced only by a peculiar attitude of Scriptural faith:

A human purpose is not necessarily also a divine purpose. How then can we tell when the purposes of our life are in harmony with the purposes of God? A personalistic philosophy of life does not offer us absolute knowledge; ... we discover divine purpose in so far as our human purposes are ruled by the New Testament principles of logos and agape-reason and love. (Nature and Values. New York: Abingdon-Cokesbury Press, 1945, 159)

37. Brightman, Person and Reality, 56n.

38. Brightman makes the needed qualification of "the innocence of the given" to accommodate this change of view saying "the innocence of ‘the given’... does not mean that the given is always of in all respects innocent. ... The present as given is innocent. Every present can be viewed in its innocence, but the point of view of innocence is important chiefly because it acknowledges the fact of immediate experience. It is not the whole truth about any experience except the first, and perhaps even the first was too complex to be entirely innocent." Person and Reality, 47-48. There can be little question that Brightman is backing away from his earlier commitment to the innocence of the given. He must do this in order to avoid solipsism.

39. Hartshorne, The Divine Relativity, 60ff.

40. See Brightman’s letter of January 1,1939.

41. Brightman’s discussion of the "illuminating absent" in Person and Reality, 34-88.

42.Hartshorne, "The Structure of Givenness," in Philosophical Forum 18(1960-1961), 22-39. This essay was reprinted under the title "Brightman’s Theory of the Given and His Idea of God," in Hartshorne’s Creativity in American Philosophy (New York: Paragon House, 1984), 196-204.

43.In many ways this point calls to mind Descartes’ criterion of clarity and distinctness of ideas as the measure of their certainty, as well as Hume’s "force and vivacity" of simple impressions which enables us to distinguish present perception from memory. Epistemology seems to have progressed little in the past 400 years. Randall E. Auxier, "God, Process, and Persons" 199

44. Hartshorne’s letter of September 1,1943 (this letter is undated, but can be dated by context and Brightman’s response). Cf. Gillies, "The Brightman-Hartshorne Correspondence," 17.

45. Interview for KOCU Television, Oklahoma City, OK; December 1,1993. See Appendix IV to the forthcoming book, God, Process and the Self: The Philosophical Correspondence of Charles Hartshorne and Edgar Sheffield Brightman, 1922-1945.

46. Hartshorne expends a great deal of effort in clarifying this difficulty later in Creative Synthesis and Philosophic Method (Lanham: University Press of America, 1983, originally published 1970). See especially page 241 on the matter of "literal participation."

47. Hartshorne, Creative Synthesis and Philosophic Method, 65.

48. Cf. Brightman’s review of Hartshorne’s Man’s Vision of God, The Journal of Religion 22 (1942), 97.

49. Hartshorne seems to recognize that this reduction has taken place when he says: "I assert a duality in experience, and you and Wieman seem, though I am never sure about this, to assert a monistic view from the standpoint of modality, of contingency and necessity" (Letter of January 22, 1942). It is interesting that Brightman should insist so ardently upon his own dualism and Hartshorne’s monism, and then be charged with monism by Hartshorne, in the same sentence in which Hartshorne is declaring his own commitment to duality, if not dualism. Gillies oversimplifies this in the conclusion to his article on the correspondence; see page 18.

50. Hartshorne, "Some Causes of My Intellectual Growth," The Philosophy of Charles Hartshorne, 18.

51. See Hartshorne’s letter of January 22, 1942.

52. See Hartshorne’s letter of January 22, 1942.

53. Brightman says in the letter of January 1, 1939: "I am not able to persuade myself that my participation in the life of another self is literally immanence in that other self."

54. Hartshorne, Man’s Vision of God, 73-74. Hartshorne puts this very succinctly in the letter of July 31, 1937: "Personalism apparently accepts a conception of causality not illustrated in experience in order to transcend experience.

55. Brightman himself seems to concur in this judgment to some degree in that he recognizes in Hartshorne’s The Divine Relativity that "the idea of God as personal is retained and even enlarged." See Brightman’s review in The United States Quarterly Book List 4 (1948) under "Philosophy and Religion," 431-432.

56. Letter of June 5,1943.

57. See my essay, ‘Process Personalism" (forthcoming in The Personalist Forum 15 [1999]). 1 would like to thank Tom Buford and The Personalist Discussion Group for inviting me to speak on the Hartshorne-Brightman Correspondence before their annual session at the 1995 Eastern Division meeting of the American Philosophical Association. Without the invitation, this essay would not have been written, and it has contributed a great deal to helping me clarify my thoughts about the correspondence -- which has in turn improved my editing work. I must also acknowledge the co-operation of Margaret Goosetray of the Special Collections Division of the Mugar Library at Boston University, Robert S. Brightman for his insights regarding what motivated his father, Charles Hartshorne and Charles I. Richey for their hospitality when I have traveled to Austin for discussions and research. I must also express my appreciation for the generous comments on this paper made by my colleagues Toby Sarrge and Mark Y. Davies, and Barry Whitney, Editor of Process Studies.

A Dialogue on Bergson

The following dialogue took place on April 22, 1993 at the meeting of The Society for the Philosophy of Creativity (SPC) mentioned in the introduction to this focus section. As is usual for an SPC meeting, the dialogue was taped for the SPC archive at the Morris Library at Southern Illinois University, Carbondale. The full proceedings were later transcribed by the late John Broyer of Southern Illinois University, Edwardsville, who was then chair of the Central Division of the SPC. I have edited the dialogue for inclusion in this focus section, courtesy of the Foundation for the Philosophy of Creativity.

While the preceding articles have been completely rewritten and greatly refined in the intervening time, the dialogue retains its relevance. It will be clear from an examination of the following how Professor Hausman has modified his view of Bergson and now has greater sympathy for him than before, largely if not entirely due to the persuasiveness of Gunter’s case. At the time of the dialogue itself. Hausman had taken a more standard line on Bergson, although in the dialogue below it will be clear that Hausman is pondering in a preliminary way the very questions he has answered above.1 It must be clear to anyone who has read Hausman’s paper above that his view regarding Bergson has now changed, and I think greatly to his credit, and to Gunter’s. And indeed, my article above also reflects a shift in my interpretation of Bergson in the direction Gunter argued. Where I would previously have been inclined to agree with Whitehead’s characterization of Bergson that the intellect cart only grasp by spatializing, I now think (and have argued above) that I had failed to recognize fully the implications of the claim I had argued for in 1993 -- that if there can be no intuition without intellect, and if intuition can grasp intelligible things without spatializing, then there is a sense in which the intellect, insofar as it is manifest in intuitive operations of consciousness, can grasp experience without spatializing it. Hence, my own remarks in the dialogue below represent a viewpoint I no longer defend. Much of the value of this dialogue for process philosophers lies in following along precisely the sorts of things that Hausman and I said, for these are the sorts of things nearly all process philosophers say about Bergson, even those such as Hausman and I, who are very sympathetic to Bergson and try to study him closely (although admittedly, Hausman is really more a Peircean and I am more a Whiteheadian, and Gunter is really Bergson’s true apologist). Yet, I hope readers of this journal may hear themselves in the remarks Hausman and I made prior to devoting more thought to the issues, and to Gunter’s arguments. If you do hear yourself in our words, I urge you to re-examine the articles in this focus section, and to reconsider your view of Bergson.

In editing the dialogue for publication I have changed spoken English into written English, including the normal things (like: excising partial sentences, false starts, irrelevant asides, and things that needlessly impede the flow of reading the dialogue; filling in nouns for indefinite pronoun references; removing some colloquial language and contractions; and adjusting the grammar). I have not felt the need to make note of these changes as they occurred, since this is hardly an historically significant conversation, but I have tried not to be overly free. What follows is pretty much what was said, verbatim, with minimal changes to convert it into readable English. The session itself was chaired by Stephen Bickam, Mannsfield University Pennsylvania, and the dialogue was also enhanced towards the end by the contributions of Tom Stark.

Gunter: I have three responses to Randall Auxier. One of them is that there is a great deal of information on Bergson’s relationship to H. Wildon Carr, and H. Wildon Carr’s relationship to Whitehead. Whitehead and Carr worked together on the Aristotelian Society. Carr, who was a good businessman, besides being a capable philosopher, really was the person who kept that society alive economically. And Carr and Whitehead spent a great deal of time with each other for about a year. And since Carr was reading papers about Bergson to the Aristotelian Society, there is all kinds of evidence that he passed along a great deal of information about Bergson to Whitehead. Whitehead, through Carr’s papers and conversation, was presented with the essential Bergson.

Second, you raise an interesting question. Whitehead says that for Bergson the intellect always and inevitably spatializes and nothing can be done about it. And Whitehead says that he does not think it is inevitable that the human mind spatializes, though it often does this, and when it does, one way or another, whether through partiality or something else, it deforms the object of knowledge and of experience. . . . [But] Bergson believed that, at least to some significant degree, the spatializing tendencies of the human intellect and of human intelligence, can be overcome by a biology and a physics that is less mechanistic. That is, for both Bergson and Whitehead we can reform our abstractions. Whitehead thinks that it is easier to do than Bergson does. Bergson believes that we would almost have to stand on our heads to rethink abstractions in terms of process. But Bergson is also convinced that we can reform these abstractions, and even if we cannot get totally away from mechanism, we can get farther away from it than we were originally. The difference between Whitehead and Bergson here is a difference of degree.

I am really arguing here with Ilya Prigogine who thinks, as Whitehead expressed himself, that for Bergson the intellect is always a spatializer and can never think real time. And Prigogine considers his own accomplishment to be, in that sense, anti-Bergsonian, since Prigogine says that he has reformed the intellect. Bergson, though, was for that, and he kept puzzling about some new way to analyze the organism that would not leave out duration. . . . He leaves it up in the air, but he tried to find scientists who would look at it and do some research. That point is almost always left out by people who study Bergson.

My third comment is this: I would like to thank Professor Auxier for opening the way to a new examination of Bergson and Whitehead which I think needs to be done for a number of reasons, if for nothing else, for the sake of accuracy. That is not the only reason, but I am delighted that he should call for it and suggest ways to do it. Also I am pleased that Professor Auxier sees so clearly that without intellect or intelligence, intuition is just not possible at all for Bergson. If one lives a sort of instinctive life, then one is not reflective and cannot generalize. So there is a dialectical relationship between instinct and intellect, and the two have to work together to get intuition, which Bergson says is what lends us into new kinds of knowledge, so it is nice to hear that stressed. It is quite important.

Let me go down the list of Professor Hausman’s questions. He says that "reflection" usually means "abstraction." Well, yes, but not necessarily in terms of "clear and distinct ideas." Couldn’t there be a kind of very concrete reflection -- a kind of phenomenological reflection that tries to grasp the event in its wholeness, but is still reflecting on it? Is that not possible? Some philosophers would say it is not possible. They would say that reflection distances the mind from its object, so that if one reflects, one cannot participate in what one is reflecting upon. I am not convinced of that. It seems to me there are times when we are both inside the process and reflecting on it at the same time. At any rate that is what Bergson means by "intuition": concrete reflection, as opposed to abstract reflection.

Second point: I think I am responsible for misleading some of you. If I made it seem that, for Bergson, the rhythms of matter are absolutely discrete, I want to apologize. There are passages in various of his writings in which he makes it quite clear -- says it explicitly -- that between any two pulses of matter there is always a thread of memory . . . so that the pulsations of matter are never perfectly discrete, perfectly distinct. Whitehead, in talking about the discreteness of his epochs makes it hard to understand how prehension can occur. If the epochs are that discrete, how can they, in their early phases, grasp the characteristics of their predecessors? I have asked Charles Hartshorne that question over and over again. I have said: "Charles, either the successor reaches out to its predecessor and something out of the past is pulled into the present, or something from the past comes and sticks itself over into the present. But if neither happens, how does prehension happen?" He says "It just happens!" Well, for Bergson, there is always a thread of continuity. There is never any absolute discontinuity, whether between successive pulses of matter or between the successive pulses that make up any level of temporality. And that is true in Bergson’s concept of the pulsations of matter, which then is like the 1926-1927 quantum physics, and not like the earlier Niels Bohr model of quantum physics where the pulsations are perfectly distinct, going from one electron shell to the other without passing through the intervening space. Bergson’s theory of matter is more like what we now call classical quantum physics. Whitehead’s sounds more like early Niels Bohr quantum theory. So I am sorry if I misled people on the nature of pulsations of matter.

Regarding the point Hausman makes about Bergson’s critics -- for example, Bertrand Russell, Jacques Maritain, George Santayana, A. O. Lovejoy -- I have responded to these in various places, and I did not want to write another paper restating those criticisms. I will, however, add a footnote stating some of the responses. But let me give one example. Benedetto Croce said this: "Bergson will ask me to give up thinking in vain." This is really absurd. Bergson did not want anybody to give up thinking in any sense -- certainly not the critical, analytic kind of thinking that gives us discreta, because they are very useful and because we have to have them in order to give us the impetus to reflect. Nor did he ask anybody to give up reflecting concretely because intuition is a kind of reflection. But I would agree that responses to various critics would be helpful, and I will try to do that in a little appendix to my talk and deal with some of these things. . . .2

Then, Professor Hausman has said that to be intelligible is to be lawful. Do you mean by a "law" something like Boyle’s Law that always happens, or Galileo’s laws of falling bodies, or other laws that are based on repetition? Is that what you mean by "law" -- just the ordinary notion of scientific law?

Hausman: That would be included in what I mean by "law" but a more generic notion of it -- not a precise repetition, necessarily, but regularity. So there would have to be similarities from moment to moment that are regular.

Gunter: I think Bergson thought that there was a kind of regularity in evolution, for all its fireworks.

Hausman: Yes, obviously. I wouldn’t deny that.

Gunter: And that would be a certain element of intelligibility he was looking for.

Hausman: But that is a conceptual opinion. That is, that what is lawful, in that sense, is something for which one could provide a concept and articulate it in language.

Gunter: Yes, but there are intuitive concepts, and then there is their projection in the realm of quantity.

Hausman: That is the thing that just occurred to me as you were talking about fluid concepts. It would be another way to try to link the notion of intuition, and one could understand what intuitive reflection is.

Gunter: So I need to talk more about fluid concepts and how they relate to other concepts. O.K., I agree, I need to do something with that. But to continue with the notion of lawlike regularity, if creativity in evolution requires a long gestation period, followed by a rather rapid period of speciation, that would be a kind of rupture, granting that we are talking in time-scales that are just mind-boggling to us. But the suddenness of the rupture depends on summing everything up that went before. So, one has to have that continuity and repetition in order to have that transformation going on.

Hausman: We wouldn’t recognize it if we did not know what went before. But when you say "depends on," do you mean that it can be traced to something, so that it would have been predictable prior to the occurrence of the rupture? Or do you mean that the past is a necessary condition for what happens when there is a rupture or a creative moment?

Gunter: Well, it seems, as Bergson says about the artist, that if someone had taken a longer or shorter time to do a painting, it would have been a different painting. So, if it had taken a longer or shorter time to produce a new organism, it would have been a rather different organism. So there is some kind of overall "law-like-ness," but that is not all there is.

Hausman: That is a necessary condition for Bergson, I will grant you, but there is something more than what we find in a necessary condition. Otherwise creativity would be predictable, and Bergson would not have that.

Gunter: Oh no, he is not going to have that. But, somehow, the new creativity sums up the past, perhaps by rearranging it.

Hausman: There is more than rearranging. There is something added. There is an increment that Whitehead adds to the many.

Auxier: It is actually the same transcendence. Whitehead and Bergson have that in common, whether they got it from one another or not. The question is: What is the nature of this novelty? What is its status? What is transcendence for Bergson? And how?

Gunter: One meaning of it is this: We look at the world around us, and if we want to start getting into it, we start getting into its durations. Galileo did this. Instead of thinking in terms of high and low as Aristotle did, Galileo did it by following bodies down the inclined plane at each moment to see if he could find out something new about motion. So, Bergson was a great appreciator of Galileo in this respect. We transcend ourselves, first of all, by discovering new things about matter. Galileo transcended himself by finding something out about the laws of nature we had not known before. If Bergson is correct, then we transcend ourselves every time we get to know ourselves better. And he would also say that we transcend ourselves insofar as we try to grasp the nature of a being greater than we are -- God, for example. So in the sense that we get outside of ourselves -- are "ec-static" as Sartre says -- we transcend ourselves. I think that Berkeley probably would have said we can only transcend ourselves "towards" God, that we cannot get outside ourselves "towards" matter. But for Bergson we can -- and "towards" evolution, and "towards" all our new discoveries. Bergson said that Einstein made more discoveries farther from the ordinary run of human experience than any other man who ever lived. So one meaning of transcendence is: exploration of a world outside and distinct from our ordinary selves. That is not enough, is it? What else do you want to know?

Auxier: The problem is that your account sounds a lot like spatialization.

Gunter: No, because we transcend by grasping processes that are very real.

Auxier: By spatializing the processes.

Gunter: No, the processes are not spatialized. Explaining this requires a long answer. For example, Milic Capek wrote an essay describing Bergson as an enemy, a critic of the Cartesian notion of unextended mind. Mind is not purely non-spatial, but it is "out in the world." But mind is still dynamic and not purely spatial -- that is, not geometrical.

Hausman: Of all this -- and I think Professor Auxier could grant this too -- there is always something dynamic there, and the process is not itself static. And another thing is to say what that is, what happens. And once we do that we start to spatialize and segment. It seems to me that Bergson falls into the same trap. But it is not a trap if he would recognize it and say that we cannot help doing it. One cannot help intellectualizing and conceptualizing what we try to articulate and communicate to one another. The only way out is to use fluid concepts and to use metaphors. But when we do that, the metaphor itself, or the fluid concept itself will depend on some understanding of conceptualization that is at work with another concept in the metaphor and that pushes us on to what we are trying to say; but cannot say other than by constantly reiterating it with new metaphors and concepts that clash with each other.

Tom Stark: Can’t a metaphor be a hyperbole as well as some sort of a concept?

Hausman: I think this is right -- that the past has to be there, that the conceptualization is there, and hence the lawfulness is there. Otherwise we would not recognize the advance beyond the previous moment. But there is an advance. That, itself, is a departure from the conceptualization that lies in the past which enables us to see that there is a departure. And that is what I think every metaphor exhibits. So those who have recognized a transcendence are right that there is an activity that advances and gets beyond concepts. But without those concepts it could not happen, and the way we try to understand the activity that goes beyond the concepts is to develop more metaphors.

Stark: I was thinking also about artistic metaphors.

Hausman: I am too.

Stark: Metaphors an the sense of the stuff we heard about in high school, such as "smell metaphors," and "touch metaphors," and so on. I think of them as points of contact, as we are, ways of making contact m initially through the experience of sensation. But then we might say we are "drawn in," and I am not sure. Part of this process is conceptual. But, in addition, metaphors will link up, one with the other as part of the set-up of the storyteller. He gets a number of sequences going at the same time, some based on meaning, some based on a progression of metaphors as we move along. But the idea that metaphors are ineluctably conceptual I will have to give some thought.

 

Notes

1. For example, in 1984, Hausman said in print that he holds something like the very view that Gunter is seeking to revise or eradicate. See Carl Hausman, A Discourse on Novelty and Creation (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1984); this is a reprint of the book issued under the same title in 1976 by Martinus Nijhoff, but Hausman (more or less) affirms in 1984 what he said in 1976. While acknowledging certain deep affinities between his own thought and Bergson’s, Hausman still claims that Bergson does not give sufficient importance to the role of conceptualization to the recognition of Form and structure in the identification of radical newness (82). Hausman later says:

Bergsonian intuition alone cannot discern these identities as Forms as they are presented in tension, nor can intuition alone discriminate the discontinuities of radical change, since these erupt within definite boundaries. . . . Bergson, then, does not give as significant a role as I do to conceptual thinking, and he does nor emphasize the discontinuous character of finite consciousness a discontinuity given to an agency that demands continuity and identity as well as change in duration. . . . Bergson’s view does not call for this intimate connection between conceptual structure and intuitively apprehended meaning (140n-141n.).

2. Many of these criticisms have been answered in the revised versions of the papers published here (RA).

Causality, Chaos, and Consciousness: Steps Toward a Normative Cosmological Principle in an Evolving

The intent of this paper is to present a conceptual model of a physical and biological universe in a state of constant change and evolution, based on three principal ideas: (a) neo-Aristotelian notions of reciprocal causality, (b) chaotic dynamics and contingencies of self-organizing systems, and (c) emergence of consciousness and sense of moral purpose in humans. While these different ideas and conceptual frameworks may seem unrelated at first glance, it will be shown that they have certain common and interconnected features that are quite illuminating for developing a process- and ecologically-based ontology of an evolving universe. It is hoped that such an approach would lead to an articulation of a normative cosmological principle that is consistent with Alfred North Whitehead’s organismic metaphysics and process-based ontology, as extensively developed in Process and Reality.

I. Causality and Determinism

We shall begin by looking at the definitions of cause and effect within an Aristotelian classification system. In his Physics, Aristotle identified four types of causal relations: material, formal, efficient and final. It should be noted that while medieval scholars relied heavily on final causes in their descriptions of the natural world, modern developments in the natural sciences since the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries have placed almost exclusive emphasis on efficient cause as the basic determinant of physical and biological events. In Process and Reality, Whitehead mentions this Inversion of causal emphasis as follows:

[Aristotle’s] philosophy led to a wild overstressing of the notion of "final causes" during the Christian middle ages; and thence, by a reaction, to the correlative overstressing of the notion of "efficient causes" during the modern scientific period. (PR 84, emphasis added)

Today, efficient cause has become the prevailing deterministic norm for the natural sciences, since final or teleological causes either have been ignored or effectively expunged from its logically constructed world-view. Modern physical and biological sciences have replaced the former reliance on divine or teleological explanations of natural phenomena by its current emphasis on efficient or proximal causes which depend entirely on a deterministic chain of past events. This point of view has become so prevalent that it remains essentially unchallenged in the scientific community.

In this paper, we shall try to demonstrate the conceptual limitations and epistemological shortcomings of such a narrowly construed causal system in the natural sciences. As such, we wish to recover the intrinsic value of the original Aristotelian classification scheme on causality. Let us take the construction of a building as an illustrative example of re-utilizing such an Aristotelian causal scheme. Here, we may identify the purpose of final cause of our actions as the erection of the building, so that every act we take in its construction is guided or shaped by our desire to meet that goal. Hence, in addition to past events that necessarily "determine" our current activities, future objectives also guide us in selecting what we are engaged in at the present moment. In this example, there are a number of efficient or proximal causal agents -- such as architects, site managers and construction workers -- who participate in the construction of the building. But they do so because they have a common purpose of completing the construction of a building in the near future. From a temporal perspective, it is clear that each act we take in the present is determined both by past actions (efficient causes) and by the goals we have set in the future (final causes).

For the sake of completeness, let us now include other causal factors that are derived from the original Aristotelian classification scheme. In addition to efficient and final causes, the construction of the building is based on a plan or a blueprint (formal causes) and requires the use of proper building resources (material causes). Thus, we see the essential soundness of the Aristotelian causal system: once a decision about the future has been made, it requires us: (i) to choose a plan (formal cause), (ii) to select needed resources (material cause), (iii) to execute a set of activities (efficient cause), in order (iv) to achieve one’s final goal (final cause).

We shall now introduce an additional element or modification to the above classification system. We shall label this as an expanded neo-Aristotelian causal scheme. To begin with, let us designate the final cause of constructing a building as Objective A. We pose the following question: why are we constructing the building in the first place? One answer would be: to provide shelter to human beings. Are building structures the only means by which we may provide shelters to human beings? No, they are not, but regardless of what specific means we may choose for housing human beings, the basic objective remains the same, i.e., human shelter. We shall designate such an expanded purpose or final cause as Objective B.

It is clear that Objective B (shelter) is broader and more general in scope than Objective A (building). What then are the efficient, formal and material causes to achieve Objective B? They are clearly different from those related to Objective A, since there has been a qualitative change in the nature of its causal connections. For instance, under Objective B, the formal and material causes are no longer related merely to building plans or resources alone, but also to alternative housing options, i.e., they include both naturally occurring and man-made shelters in their choices. The efficient causal agents are no longer planners and builders of houses alone, but also include explorers and discoverers of natural shelters. In other words, the notion of shelter under Objective B is conceptually more generic than those of building structures under objective A. With Objective B, we have pushed the boundaries of final causes (Or teleology) beyond those of Objective A.

We may next ask if there are final causes that are significantly more general than either Objectives A and B. In the above example, the final cause for constructing shelters is to maintain and preserve the lives of human beings: this we shall designate as Objective C. While such a goal is the objective of human communities, are we able to identify an even broader set of final causations? For example, the preservation of human beings requires the preservation of other living organisms (Objective D) upon whom humans depend for food and energy. Thus, it would appear that the reciprocal preservation of the biosphere as a whole (Objective D) is a more generic final cause than the preservation of the human species (Objective C). In order to achieve such an biospheric objective, we must also sustain the geo-biochemical cycles on earth (Objective E).

To expand such a causal scheme to its logical conclusion, we should view it from a more cosmological context. Thus, to achieve Objective E, we must have an intact solar system (Objective F), which, in turn, requires the long-term stability of the Milky Way galaxy (Objective G). Finally, the preservation of our galaxy (and other galaxies) depends upon the preservation of a stable and evolving universe as a whole (Objective H). It would appear that the "ultimate objectives" between constructing a building for human shelter and the existence of an evolving and stable universe may be linked through a reciprocal series of incremental causal connections. The above series of final causations or teleologies may be summarized as follows:

Building (A) < -- >Shelter (B) < -- >Human L~(C) < -- >Bios-phere(’D)

< -- >Planet Earth (E) < -- >Solar System (F) < -- >Milky Way(G) < -- > Universe (H)

From the above, we see that as we increase the horizon of each final cause, we bring about a corresponding expansion of other causal factors. For example, the preservation of the human beings and the biosphere (Objectives C and D) depends upon a mutual web of causal interconnections between different species on earth -- e.g., the nature of the food chain, material resources, energy fluxes, ecosystem dynamics, etc. In such a biospheric model, the causal interconnections are the vast proliferation of extinct and living species, that continue to be related to each other over time and space. In other words, the biosphere is a mutually linked system, so that any major break or perturbation of its locally-dependent relationships may result in a drastic loss for the global whole. While we may designate natural selection of adaptive species as the efficient cause of biological evolution, its final cause may now be defined as the mutual preservation of all biological species on earth. Thus, biological evolution appears to be associated with a final causation or teleology – the reciprocal maintenance and proliferation of adaptive species over the phylogenetic scale in an evolving and stable physical universe.

II. Chaos and Contingency

While the above neo-Aristotelian expanded classification scheme on causality is useful in pointing out current epistemological deficiencies in the natural sciences, it is still not logically complete for our present purposes. For instance, within its conceptual framework, it is unable to account for the appearance of contingency, creativity or unexpected novelty in the physical and biological universe. For this we must now turn first to quantum mechanics and then to recent developments in chaos or complexity theories. In addition, we shall briefly examine the nature of far-from-equilibrium thermodynamic systems, where stochastic or random processes are generally prevalent.

Until very recently, the notion of contingency of events received very little emphasis in the natural sciences. Since the fifteenth and sixteenth centuries, the prevailing classical world view was defined entirely upon deterministic terms, leaving no room for chance in the universe. Events in the natural world followed a strictly causal pattern, along a predictable temporal order, such that every well-defined event or action would lead to similar outcomes. However, the introduction of quantum mechanical principles in the early part of this century brought about a dramatic change In our notions of causality, by allowing the concept of non-deterministic evolution of dynamical systems to gain ground in the natural sciences.

In quantum mechanics the exact spatial location of sub-atomic particles (e.g., an electron) is no longer viewed as a meaningful concept. This point of view is completely contrary to the deterministic principles of classical mechanics, where the spatial trajectories of macroscopic bodies could be determined to arbitrary degrees of accuracy. In quantum mechanics, we are unable to specify (even in principle) the precise spatial coordinates of a elementary particle without sacrificing the knowledge of its -velocity or momentum altogether. For these reasons, we can only determine the probabilities of an elementary particle’s coordinates within a specified spatial boundary. Under such constraints -- i.e., those imposed by Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle -- a strictly deterministic description of the dynamics of elementary particles is precluded for all sub-atomic systems. We have thus introduced, at a very fundamental level, the notion of contingency and randomness of physical events into the natural sciences.

We shall now review the non-deterministic features of chaos theories that lead to self-organizing systems. It is often stated that non-linear dynamical systems derived from chaos theory are deterministic in nature. For instance, the phrase "deterministic chaos" is frequently employed to describe the repeated formation of "random" patterns of dynamical trajectories of nonlinear systems. Technically speaking, such a designation is not entirely incorrect, since the use of a given mathematical algorithm (which describes the time series progressions of a non-linear system) always give the same global patterns in its phase-map plottings. It was soon realized, however, that such an apparently "deterministic" view also gave us a highly misleading picture of nonlinear dynamical systems. To begin with, while the overall global features of the phase-map of a specific non-linear system is predictable, the actual local trajectories do not follow pre-ordained and precise pathways.1 This is because the dynamical trajectories of non-linear systems tend to "bifurcate" at certain temporal or ordinal points in its phase mappings, such that the choice of bifurcated pathways is completely stochastic or unpredictable. That is, at the "local" level, the choice of dynamical pathways is a completely random event and, therefore, is non-deterministic.

In chaos theory, what we have achieved is highly significant, since we have introduced the notion of randomness or contingency in a classical dynamical system at any spatial or temporal scale, without invoking quantum indeterminacy only at a sub-atomic or microscopic level. Similarly, in far-from-equilibrium thermodynamic systems, I. Prigogine, G. Careri and others have described the stochastic nature of their underlying non-linear dynamics,2,3,4 In such an open or energetically dissipative thermodynamic system that maintains a dynamical steady-state, the local entropy of the system decreases, which (depending on the rate of dissipation) often lead to the appearance of "self-organized" structures.5 Thus, randomness and chance appear within all dissipative systems. This view was succinctly stated by Careri as follows:6

[C]hance plays a decisive role in the choice of new structures, by taking the system farther and farther away from equilibrium in an unpredictable direction. Thus the forced evolution of the system from one new structure to another must in part have a "historical" character because of the influence of the preceding situation, but it also has a "nondeterministic" character caused by the series of bifurcations it must come across.. This gives the system several alternative possibilities of evolution that cannot be predicted because each branch of bifurcation is selected at random at the moment of instability (first emphasis in original).

Before leaving this brief discussion on chaos theory, one additional feature of non-linear dynamical system should be mentioned. This relates to the sensitive dependence of non-linear systems to the initial values of its dynamical parameters (often referred as the "butterfly effect," a phrase coined by the meteorologist E.N. Lorenz).7 In such a system, even the smallest change (or uncertainty) of initial values of a non-linear or dynamically coupled system, show long-term divergence of its phase-map trajectories, leading to the formation of a basin of so-called "strange attractors." It would appear that the long-term deterministic predictability of dynamical systems (e.g., planetary orbits in the solar system) of classical mechanics in fact is illusory and does not reflect the underlying "non-deterministic" nature of physical systems over a sufficiently extended period of time. Classical Laplacian determinism had assumed that an "operational" truncation (or first-order approximation) of initial values of dynamical parameters were a mathematically rigorous approach for accurately predicting the future (or past) state of physical events. This naive point of-view appears to be untenable for physical systems with any degree of non-linearity or if they contain even weak interactive coupling terms. In the final analysis, this lack of determinism includes all natural phenomena, since no known physical or biological systems are strictly linear or non-interactive in form. Thus, non-deterministic (or non-predictable) outcomes must occur for all dynamical systems if they are examined at a sufficiently refined scale of computational analysis.8

III. Consciousness and Purpose

We have arrived at the final part of our three-fold examination of ontological principles that underlie the dynamical process of an evolving physical and biological universe. We shall now examine the goal-seeking and purposeful aspects of cultural evolution in human societies and contrast them to the apparent lack of such teleology in biological evolution. We shall examine also the nature of human consciousness and moral values in order to determine if they have any unique characteristics that could assist us in distinguishing between causal and contingent features of an evolving biological or social system.

In recent years, natural scientists have considered the possibility that the emergence of human cultural evolution have distinct and novel characteristics that are not simply reducible to biological or genetic factors. Following T. Dobzhansky and F. Ayala, we may define the concepts of internal (or natural) and external (or artifactual) teleology as conceptually useful terms in describing causal features in biological and cultural evolution.9 Such a definition of internal and external teleology was recently summarized by Ayala as follows:10

Objects purposefully designed to send a certain function by the actions of an agent have external teleology. Behaviors or actions purposefully performed by an agent seeking certain goals are also endowed with external teleology. A person mowing a lawn or purchasing an airline ticket is acting teleologically and these actions may also be seen as teleological, in the external sense.... Internal teleological systems are accounted for by natural selection which is strictly mechanistic process. Organisms and their parts are teleological systems in the internal sense .... The evidence from paleontology, genetics and other evolutionary sciences is also against the existence of any immanent force or vital principle directing evolution toward the production of specified kinds of organisms (emphases added).

Thus, the natural selection of adaptive species in biological evolution may be looked upon as an internalized teleology, since there is no "conscious" (or self-directed) attempt to choose "desirable traits" on the part of mutating organisms. For example, according to Darwinian evolutionary principles, when primitive reptilian species mutated to develop bird-like wings, they did so in an unselfconscious (or "blind") adaptation to a changing natural environment. That is, there was no conscious attempt on the part of individual reptiles to seek such biological changes, since a series of random genetic mutations (over a sufficiently long span of time) took its natural course to achieve an environmentally adaptive bird-like species. Hence, biological adaptation may be viewed as an entirely "natural" or organic process wherein there is no apparent design or overarching purpose in the evolutionary scheme.

In contrast to biological evolution, cultural evolution appears to be an externalized teleology, since a sense of purpose and the setting of "conscious" goals are distinctively human characteristics. To a lesser extent, however, one may also observe purposive activities among animals, especially among species at the upper end of the phylogenetic scale. On the other hand, the presence of a complex and highly developed "culture" among mammalian species (e.g., primates) do not seem to have occurred over the period of biological evolution on earth. Thus, cultural evolution, while in the first instance arises from and is dependent on genetic or biological factors, must now be viewed principally as an "epigenetic" or emergent phenomena. In other words, cultural evolution is an explicitly purposive and conscious activity, whose historical developments are only marginally linked to the selection of adaptive biological traits in a changing natural environment.

We may conclude, then, that goal-setting and purposive activity is a fundamental factor in cultural evolution, and that final causes -- in the form of externalized teleologies -- play a significant role in the activities and social relationships of human beings. But what are the final/efficient causal relationships that govern the process of cultural evolution? In our earlier discussions on causality, we examined a series of increasingly broader set of objectives in order to maintain and proliferate human and other life-forms on earth. The preservation of human life was linked mutually to the presence of other stable forms of biological organisms; this subsists in a homeostatic and well-balanced ecosystem on earth. In turn, global biospheric stability necessitated the long-term reciprocal existence and viability of other astronomical bodies -- ultimately, the observable universe as a whole.

From the above discussion, it appears that conscious human behavior, In its cultural and moral context, encompasses both biological and cosmic evolutions. Therefore, we may pose the following question: is there a cosmological principle that describes the sustenance of physical, biological and human evolution in the universe? To see if such a far-reaching conclusion is warranted, we shall now examine the incorporation of such a cosmological perspective within the ontological tenets of Whitehead’s process philosophy.

IV. Cosmological Imperatives of a Process-Based Ontology

Whitehead’s principal aim in developing a metaphysics of an organismic universe was to transcend the self-imposed conceptual boundaries and rigid conventions of the natural sciences. In doing so, he moved away from the narrow constraints placed on modern science by the use of metaphorical language that often gave a highly restricted picture of the natural world. For example, for the frequently used word "events" (used in describing natural phenomena in space-time coordinate systems) he substituted the term "actual occasions," which for him gave a more accurate (and richer) picture of "real" or "concrete" happenings in the natural world.11 In this regard, he avoided the use of such commonly employed metaphysical terms such as "sensation" and "perception" -- derived from seventeenth and eighteenth philosophers such as Locke, Berkeley, Hume and Kant -- since for him they had a narrow psychological rather than appropriate epistemological meanings. Related to this was his concern that natural scientists and philosophers frequently indulged in what he termed the "accidental error of mistaking the abstract for the concrete" ("fallacy of misplaced concreteness," SMW 51).

We shall first examine Whitehead’ s notions of "prehension" and concrescence," which are his attempts to place "actual occasions" within a causal framework. To begin with, Whitehead divides the universe into two major categories of "real" objects: (a) "eternal objects" (or pure potentials), and (b) "actual entities" (also synonymous with "actual occasions" or "final realities") (PR 22-24). While eternal objects subsist, their togetherness (or relatedness) brings about seemingly separate entities into a unity (or conjunction) of "actual entities" or occasions into a "nexus." Thus, "prehension" is described as an incomplete and partial bringing together of "actual entities" into a "nexus":

Any such particular fact 0f togetherness among actual entities is called a nexus . . . .The ultimate facts of immediate actual experience are actual entities, prehensions, and nexus. All else is, for our experience, derivative abstraction (PR 20, emphasis added).

The highly complex (and often opaque) vocabulary of Whitehead’s Process and Reality may obscure at times the foundational simplicity of his metaphysics. On the other hand, in his earlier publication, Science and the Modern World, Whitehead spoke with less formality in expressing the main outlines of his process-based philosophy:

We conceive actuality as in essential relation to an unfathomable possibility. Eternal objects inform actual occasions with hierarchic patterns, included and excluded in every variety of discrimination. Another view of the same truth is that every actual occasion is a limitation imposed on possibility, and that by virtue of this limitation the particular value 0f that shaped togetherness of things emerges.... But there are no single occasions, in the sense of isolated occasions. Actuality is through and through togetherness -- togetherness of otherwise isolated eternal objects, and togetherness of all actual occasions (SMW 174, emphasis added).

Thus, starting with isolated (or disjunctive) "eternal objects," they become manifested through a process of "prehension" into "actual entities," that leads to the unity (or conjunctive) togetherness of "actual entities," described as a "nexus" of possible (or subjunctive) "actual occasions." In simpler language, we may state that primordial objects in the universe (grounded in an ineffable reality) are causally transformed into a limited set of cosmological, biological and cultural entities, which at the same time, allows for an endless number of creative outcomes and novel possibilities.

The process of bringing "eternal objects" and "actual entities" into creative and novel nexus of "actual occasions" is termed by Whitehead concrescence." Thus, he states:

[T]he "production" of novel togetherness is the ultimate notion embodied in the term "concrescence." These ultimate notions of "production of novelty" and of concrete togetherness" are inexplicable either in terms of higher universals or in terms of the components participating in the concrescence. The analysis of the components abstracts from the concrescence. The sole appeal is to intuition. (PR 21-22, emphasis added)

The process philosophy of Whitehead is essentially a metaphysics of concrescence, inasmuch as it is based on the "ontological principle," which states that all "actual entities" and "actual occasions" comes from "something" and not from "nothing" (PR 244). That is, all "actual occasions are prehensively derived from "eternal objects" or forms of definiteness which are associated with God as the ground of concrescent being -- in contrast to the Aristotelian deistic concept of an omnipotent being as the "prime mover." Moreover, it goes well beyond the conventional notions of an absolute deity as the original creator of the universe. For instance, in the novel togetherness of "concrescence," there is "creative advance" that is not determinable in an temporal (or ordinal) sense. In other words, there is nothing in the physical, biological and cultural dimensions of the universe where there is a fixed and determinate causality. In process philosophy, therefore, the omnipotence of the Creator (as the original ground of being) is no longer deemed absolute, but appears circumscribed and indeterminate.

VI. Towards a Process-and Ecologically-Based Ontology

Let us now briefly review what we have uncovered in our examination of non-deterministic and reciprocal causalities and the emergence of human consciousness and purposive actions, so as to place them within the context of a process-based ontology. In our discussions of chaos or complexity theory, we have established the underlying non-deterministic (Or stochastic) nature of all dynamical systems with interactive and self-organizing component parts. We have shown that strict determinism can be invoked only if we assume that all second and other higher order (i.e., non-linear) terms are negligible in a dynamical system. While such simplifying assumptions were deemed acceptable in the past, they can no longer be regarded as a correct reflection of the underlying dynamics of any realistic natural system.12 Above all, we have shown the contingent (or probabilistic) nature of all dynamically evolving systems at both the microscopic (atomic and sub-atomic) and macroscopic (terrestrial) levels.

We have discussed cultural evolution in human societies as an emergent phenomenon of biological evolution. It appears that human beings (and, to a lesser extent, other biological organisms) act in a conscious and purposive manner. In this regard, we described two types of biologically-based teleologies: (i) an external teleology, where there is a deliberate and conscious setting of goals, those that are generally found among human beings and possibly in higher animals; and (ii) an internal teleology, where there is no self-directed or conscious goal-seeking on the part of living organisms, such as in the natural selection of favorable traits among biologically adaptive species. From a purely evolutionary point of view, "inner" (or non-self-directed) teleologies led to the appearance of conscious beings in the universe who are governed by "external" (or self-directed) teleologies. While such a provisional teleology is a useful starting point, it is only partially complete when viewed in the larger context of biological and cultural evolutions. For instance, how are we to account for the "external" or goal-seeking teleological features of the evolution of human societies within a seemingly non-purposive physical universe? Moreover, we must account also for the presence of chance and contingency in the natural world, such that the present evolving universe is not a strictly deterministic outcome of the original cosmic "big bang."

It would be illuminating to place the questions posed above within the metaphysical framework of a process-based ontology. In Whitehead’s philosophy, the whole of reality (in its broadest sense) is embodied in the "concrescence" of the moment -- i.e., in the evolution of the "actual occasions" through the unconscious (and richly endowed) "prehensions" and unity (or togetherness) of "actual entities" ("nexus"). Only by a process of physical and conceptual "prehensions," "feelings" and "experiences" -- through several levels of increasing awareness -- do we arrive at a final resolution in acts of self-cognition and conscious purpose.13 In other words, Whitehead believed that conscious and purposive acts are the tip of a "prehensive" iceberg that remains below the level of consciousness, yet participates in every moment of concrescence, resulting in novelty and creativity in an evolving universe.

Let us put the above process-based ontology within a neo-Aristotelian classification scheme of causality. We have identified such a logical system as an ever-widening series of reciprocal final causations that have corresponding material, formal, and efficient causes. We accomplished this by commencing with purposive and conscious actions of humans (e.g., in the construction of a building structure), which required the sustenance of other entities (plants, animals, planets, galaxies, etc.) within the spatial and temporal framework of an evolving universe. We shall now designate this fundamental reciprocal causal relationship in space and time as the principal underlying ontological basis for existence. While biological evolution of adaptive species may have occurred through a series of localized internal (or non- purposive) teleologies, the concrescence or bringing together of physical and biological processes corresponds to both a globally internalized (non-purposive) and globally externalized (purposive) teleology of the observable universe. In its broadest sense, we may initially state the cosmological principle in a process-based ontology as follows: the emergence of purposive actions and consciousness within the creative and novel concrescence of an evolving physical and biological universe.14

More importantly, the reciprocal causalities within the concrescence of a process-based ontology brings about an awareness of an added ethical dimension in an evolving universe. We may identify it, especially in its prehensile and emerging state, as a cosmological moral imperative, that both drives and sustains the evolutionary process. We are now able to detect a heightened sense of responsibility that attends any action taken by self-aware and conscious sentient beings in a mutually dependent and causally related universe. Which means that every step taken in such an evolving universe becomes charged with a sense of personal or collective responsibility. However, in a process and ecologically based ontology, such an ethical or normative plane is not given a priori as a fixed or non-changing Platonic ideal, but is derived continually within the concrescence of an ever-changing and evolving universe. In other words, in a process-based ontology, there are no transcendental ethical rules about right or wrong courses of actions. Here one’s sense of moral responsibility and consequent courses of actions depend on "actual occasions" and whole "experiences." While a process-based ontology may avoid prescribing an immutable set of moral principles, we may yet discern -- within its existential uncertainties and contingencies -- a universal normative principle that reflects the reciprocal causal unity and "novel togetherness" of the many becoming one.

Initially, in our epistemological investigation of a process and ecologically based ontology, we demonstrated an evolving physical and biological universe that was filled with potential novelty and creativity. We are now presented with a more ethical, albeit largely anthropocentric, view of human responsibility in the context of such an evolving and interdependent universe. This means that as human ingenuity in controlling the natural world increases, the potential for affecting the physical and biological environments on earth (and presumably, elsewhere in the universe) is greatly enhanced. In this century alone, we have witnessed the build-up of unimaginable weapons of destruction, while at the same time human societies continue to strain the carrying capacity of natural systems on our small planet. In short, we are technologically capable of adversely impacting many, if not all, living organisms and their life-support systems on earth.

In both the short and long-term, human beings have an enormous and abiding burden of responsibility for maintaining the viability of the natural world within the context of an evolving physical and biological universe. However, in such a process and ecologically based ontology, ethical reflections and choices of actions can only be effectively carried out in an interdisciplinary and multi-cultural context, since no single scientific, philosophical or normative point of view will suffice. As envisioned by Whitehead, an ever-present and mutually respectful synthesis of art, science, culture and religion is needed in all facets of our lives. It is here where the experiential "nexus" of scientific knowledge, artistic creations, moral values and spiritual wisdom meet and reside. In such an aesthetic, intellectual and ethical context, a normative cosmological principle may now be emphatically stated as follows: the acceptance of a deeply-rooted sense of human responsibility with respect to all creation (both inanimate and animate) in an evolving physical and biological universe.

 

Notes

1. Edward Ott Chaos in Dynamical Systems (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1993).

2. Ilya Prigogine, From Being to Becoming: Time and Complexity in the Physical Sciences (New York: W.H. Freeman and Co., 1980).

3. Giorgio Careri, Order and Disorder in Matter, translated by K. Jarratt (Menlo Park, Calif.: The Benjamin/Cummings Publishing Co., Inc., 1984).

4. P. Glansdorff and I. Prigogine, Thermodynamic Theory of Structure Stability and Fluctuations (New York: John Wiley and Sons, 1971).

5. By contrast, in "near equilibrium" thermodynamic systems, also known as the linear "Onsager regime," the physical state tends toward maximum disorder (i.e., minimum negative entropy), while maintaining the temporal symmetry of classical Newtonian mechanics.

6. G. Careri, 109.

7. For an interesting discussion on this phenomena, see David Ruelle, Chance and Chaos (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1991).

8. For example, analytic solutions of "linear" differential equations that describe simple harmonic motions are only found in dynamical systems with small amplitudes, where non- linear terms are assumed to be negligible. Similarly, inclusion of interactive coupling terms in "many-body" problems do not lead to exact "deterministic" solutions of the dynamical system.

9. T. Dobzhansky, F. Ayala, G. L. Stebbins and J.W. Valentine, Evolution, Chapter 16 (San Francisco: W.H. Freeman and Co., 1977).

10. Francisco Ayala, "Darwin and the Teleology of Nature," a paper presented at the GCSSR -- AAAS Symposium on Science, Cosmology and Teleology. Intercultural and Interdisciplinary Perspectives (Seattle, Wash., February 12, 1997).

11. To Whitehead. "actual occasions" are shaped not only by logical reasoning, but includes all aspects of one’s subjective experiences, including the use of ones imagination, aesthetic feelings, and other forms of non-cognitive and unconscious influences.

12. This is true particularly with the appearance of computational devices of extraordinary power and refinement today. Thus, numerical (if not analytical) solutions to many complex, non-linear systems can be carried out with relative ease.

13. See for example, Thomas E. Hosinski, Stubborn Fact and Creative Advance: An Introduction to the Metaphysics of Alfred North Whitehead, 46 -128 (Lanham, Md.: Rowman and Littlefield Publishers, Inc., 1993).

14. Such a point of view may appear to extend the so-called weak versions of the "anthropic principle," which asserts the primacy of the appearance of life (as we know it) in the universe. However, it would be misleading to believe that biological life, as we observe it on earth, are the only forms in which living systems may exist in the universe.